diff options
Diffstat (limited to '35391.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 35391.txt | 9461 |
1 files changed, 9461 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/35391.txt b/35391.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2e3cabb --- /dev/null +++ b/35391.txt @@ -0,0 +1,9461 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, by Various + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898 + Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the + islands and their peoples, their history and records of + the catholic missions, as related in contemporaneous books + and manuscripts, showing the political, economic, commercial + and religious conditions of those islands from their + earliest relations with European nations to the close of + the nineteenth century, Volume XLIII, 1670-1700 + +Author: Various + +Editor: E. H. Blair + +Release Date: February 24, 2011 [EBook #35391] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, 1493-1898 *** + + + + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team for Project Gutenberg at +https://www.pgdp.net/ + + + + + + + + + + The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898 + + Explorations by early navigators, descriptions of the islands and + their peoples, their history and records of the catholic missions, + as related in contemporaneous books and manuscripts, showing the + political, economic, commercial and religious conditions of those + islands from their earliest relations with European nations to the + close of the nineteenth century, + + Volume XLIII, 1670-1700 + + + + Edited and annotated by Emma Helen Blair and James Alexander Robertson + with historical introduction and additional notes by Edward Gaylord + Bourne. + + + The Arthur H. Clark Company + Cleveland, Ohio + MXMVI + + + + + + +CONTENTS OF VOLUME XLIII + + + Preface 9 + + Document of 1670-1700 + + Dominican Missions, 1670-1700. Vicente de Salazar, O.P. + [From his Historia de el Santissimo Rosario (Manila, 1742).] 27 + + Bibliographical Data 95 + + Appendix: Some later ethnological features of the Philippines + + Preliminary note 99 + + Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos. Tomas Ortiz, + O.S.A.; ca., 1731. [From his Practica del Ministerio (MS.)] 103 + + The people of the Philippines. Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga, + O.S.A. Sampaloc, 1803. [From his Historia de las Islas + Philipinas.] 113 + + Jolo and the Sulus. Charles Wilkes, U.S.N., Philadelphia, + 1844. [From his Narrative of the United States Exploring + Expedition.] 128 + + Letter from Father Quirico More. Davao, January 20, 1885. + [From Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jesus, Manila, + 1887.] 193 + + Letter from Father Pedro Rosell. Caraga, April 17, 1885. + [From ut supra.] 212 + + Letters from Father Mateo Gisbert. Davao, January 4, + February 8, February 20, July 26, December 24, 1886. + [From ut supra.] 229 + + Letter from Father Pablo Cavalleria. Isabela + de Basilan, December 31, 1886. [From ut supra.] 255 + + Extract from a letter from Father Pablo + Pastells. Manila, April 20, 1887. [From ut supra.] 268 + + Letter from Father Jose Maria Clotet. Talisayan, May 11, + 1889. [From Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jesus, + Manila, 1891.] 288 + + Present beliefs and superstitions in Luzon. Jose Nunez, + Manila, December 6, 1905. [From supplement of El + Renacimiento, December 9, 1905.] 310 + + + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + + Chart of the harbor bar of Manila, and vicinity of + river Pasig, 1757; photographic facsimile from original + manuscript in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla 35 + + Plan of the bay and city of Manila; photographic facsimile + of map 58 in Apres de Mannevillette's Le Neptune oriental + (Paris, 1745); from copy of original map in Library of Congress 129 + + Map of the Caroline Islands; photographic facsimile of map in + Lettres edifiantes (Paris, 1728), xviii, facing p. 189; from + copy in library of Harvard University 231 + + The Philippine barangay; from photograph taken + by Otto Fischer, 1888; procured in Madrid 271 + + + + + + +PREFACE + + +This volume carries forward the history of the Dominican order +in the Philippines, and, like the other instalments of Dominican +history, or, to speak more broadly, of the history of the orders, +contains many interesting sidelights. The increasing power of the +order is well seen in the new arrivals of missionaries from Spain, +and their pushing out into the territory regarded by the Recollects +as their own, to the detriment of the latter, which the Dominicans +are able to do through the great influence of Felipe Pardo, the +archbishop. The tone of the history is one of ecclesiastical jealousy +and aggrandizement. In the appendix which treats in great part of +the Moros and peoples of Mindanao, the chief things to note are +the similarity of these latter-day Malay peoples in many of their +customs and characteristics with the early Filipinos as described by +the early writers. The persistence of the old superstitious beliefs +in the province of Nueva Ecija, Luzon, is interesting, and probably +typical of the islands as a whole, at least in districts somewhat +out of the usual line of travel. As this appendix shows, there is +yet much work for the ethnologist in all parts of the Philippines. + +The first portion of this volume treats of the Dominican missions, in +general between the years 1670-1700, the matter being translated and +condensed from Salazar's Historia. In 1671 and 1679 new contingents +of religious arrive in the province from Spain, which prove of great +profit to the overworked missionaries, for they have missions on +the Asiatic mainland as well as in the Philippines which must be +supplied. In the latter year the Zambal mission is transferred to +the Dominicans, they supplanting the Recollect order, who have been +in charge there for over sixty years. This is at the request of the +natives themselves, but it is discovered shortly that that request +is only a ruse on the part of the latter in order to escape any +obligation to accept the faith, for they soon petition that they +be given Jesuits in place of Dominicans. Before the transfer of +the mission the Dominicans have already begun to work in the Zambal +district, but desist because of the complaints of the Recollects that +their territory is being invaded. When they resume their work there in +1679, they are aided considerably by the governor, Vargas y Hurtado, +and his military representative in the Zambal district. These chapters +show in extenso the methods used by the missionaries in advancing +the faith. The soldiers are of considerable aid in escorting those +who are to become reduced to a civilized life in the villages where +the fathers can watch over their welfare carefully. The harshness of +the soldiers is counteracted by the mildness and solicitude of the +missionaries. The work of the latter also extends to the industrial +training of the new converts. Natives of civilized villages are +specially hired to instruct them in agriculture, but so lazy are many +of the Zambals that after their lands have been cultivated, sowed, +and tended, they refuse to harvest them themselves and many of them +take to the mountains and apostatize from the faith. Some, however, +gather the harvest as they have the profit in sight. In those new +missions the children, from regarding the fathers with suspicion and +abhorring their very sight, soon flock about them at their appearance +and will scarcely be persuaded to part from them. The children, too, +are the ones whom the fathers first win over to the faith and the +instruction, and these in turn bring in their parents and the other +older people by taunting them with their ignorance. The astute Fray +Domingo Perez, who is in charge of the Zambal field, suppresses the +practice of murders by means of a trick, for by feeling the pulses of +all the men of a village he is able through the natural fear of the +culprit to detect the murderer. Therefore the superstitious Zambals +imagine that he can detect any wrongdoing by simply feeling the pulse, +and look upon him with awe. But still notwithstanding the seeming +success of the missions after three years the father learns through +the children that the Indians have been secretly maintaining their +old idol worship. Horrified, he straightway sets about destroying +the worship and the idols, and after a vigorous campaign succeeds +in wiping out idolatry. The balance of the missionary work of the +Dominicans relates mainly to the northern province of Cagayan, where +the Dominicans have many villages and peoples under their charge. Two +fathers sent out from Manila in 1673 sound the Irraya district in +order that they may discover whether those people are ready to embrace +the faith. The field is however, not yet ripe, and hence nothing +further is done there until the year 1677, when Fray Pedro Jimenez is +assigned to that district. Being shortly recalled, he is sent back +there the following year, and the work is taken up in earnest. Many +Indians are reduced, both with and without the aid of the soldiers, +for Fray Pedro is a fearless worker. In seven years he has founded +three permanent villages; but at the end of that time he is removed +from his mission because of certain slanderous reports against him, +although he returns later after being fully vindicated. The Dominicans +open up a road to the province of Cagayan at their own expense in +order that they may have easier access thereto. At the intermediary +chapter of 1680 various new missions are accepted formally by the +order and religious assigned to them. The mission of Palavig is +composed of Visayans who flee thither, and of Christian apostates and +heathens. Though that mission had first been founded in 1653, it had +been soon abandoned because of some sudden fear, and the people had +taken to the mountains. Also after its reestablishment, the mission +is of but little permanence, for the people abandon it because of +annoyances received from a commandant who comes there to watch for +the Acapulco ship. Early in the eighteenth century a new mission is +established in that district at Bavag, which is soon moved to Dao, +and then to Vangag. The work of the missions is enforced in 1684 by +a band of forty-nine missionaries. That same year also, Fray Pedro +Jimenez is sent to Fotol on the borders of the country of the Apayaos +(incorrectly called Mandayas), a people who are especially fierce +and bloodthirsty. There he manages to patch up a quarrel among +opposing factions by his diplomacy, and gains the hearts of the +people. Accompanied by twenty-two heathens he goes to Aparri, where +the alcalde-mayor bestows honors and titles upon them. Notwithstanding +the rumors that the Apayaos are plotting to kill him, the father +visits their mountain fastnesses, where his confidence meets its just +reward. Some months later he returns thither and builds a church among +them. In 1686 so greatly has the work prospered that Fray Pedro is +given two associates, and in 1688 another. With the increased aid, +he establishes a new village of over 500 converts, but he is soon +compelled to abandon the mission because of sickness, whereupon +the inhabitants of the village of Calatug, supposedly Christians, +attack the mountaineers to whom they have always been hostile, +and the village is consequently abandoned by the survivors, some +of whom flee to the mountains and others are transferred to another +mission site. The intermediary chapter of 1688 accepts certain houses +in Pangasinan. In the mission of San Bartolome which is composed of +Alaguetes and Igorots, many intermarriages take place and the people +are knit closer together. That village exists more than twenty +years, but is finally burned in 1709 or 1710 by hostile Igorots, +and the father in charge and the faithful of his flock remove to +San Luis Beltran which is located farther from the mountains and is +safer. The latter mission is twice removed and at each time some of +the Indians refuse to accompany it, because of their disinclination +to abandon the locality where they have become fixed, or flee to the +mountains. In 1732 another mission is established at that point. The +mission of Tuga is opened by Fray Juan Iniguez, who begins his work +there in 1688 with great success. That mission also experiences various +removals, and in 1715, the remaining Christians are removed to the +mission of Tuao. The revolt in Cagayan in 1718 finishes the mission, +for its inhabitants apostatize and take to the mountain. The work is +taken up later there in 1722; and in 1731, although still called the +mission of Tuga it is moved nearer Tuao. As a result of the chapter +of 1680 work is taken up in the Batanes Islands. Fray Mateo Gonzalez, +who has been assigned to the Cagayan missions, extends his work to +the Babuyanes Islands to the north of Luzon. He establishes a village +on the Cagayan coast with people from those islands, but an order +from the government sends those people back to their islands and the +mission village is destroyed. In 1686, the first efforts are made in +the Batanes, but the attempt proves abortive through the death of two +of the fathers assigned to that field. In 1718 another attempt there +proves successful. In 1693 the mission of Santa Cruz is established +near Malaueg by Fray Jose Galfarroso, who working zealously through +those rough mountains, gains the most influential man of the region +to the Christian faith, in consequence of which many conversions are +made. New mission bands reach the province in the years 1694 and 1699, +and an examination of the names shows that it is difficult to obtain +priests for the work for many of those sent are only brothers and +acolytes. The mission of Itugug or Paniqui is flourishing and in +Zifun a fine field is opened under charge of Fray Jeronimo Ulloa. + +The ethnological appendix opens with a short account by Tomas Ortiz, +O.S.A., of various superstitions and heathen beliefs and practices +that still exist among the natives, notwithstanding all the efforts +of the religious to stamp them out. Many of them show a strange +mingling of heathenism and Christianity. Their belief in nonos, +primarily, ancestor worship, leads them to ascribe spirits or +souls to everything, somewhat as did the primitive North American +Indian, and they are very careful to propitiate the spirit or nono +of river, field, and wood, etc. The ceremony of tibao, or awaiting +the soul of the deceased, is still practiced by the natives, and +they endeavor by various methods to outwit the fathers. Ashes are +spread in the house where the death occurred and by the tracks made +thereon, they ascertain whether the soul has returned or not. They +have numerous beliefs regarding the tigbalag, the patianac, the +asuang, the last two of which are the enemies of childbirth and +children. Various ridiculous conjurings are performed in order to +scare off those terrible monsters of the imagination. The bongsol are +certain enchantments caused in the body by a sorcerer called ganay, +and in order to drive them away, one must have recourse to another +sorcerer. In any sickness that is deemed natural when it first comes +on, if the cure is not effected as quickly as desired, it is always +referred to enchantment or bongsol, and is exorcised. Bilao is an +elaborate ceremony, in which the rosary plays a conspicuous part, +for the discovery of any thief. The anting-anting is carried by many +of the natives. Both males and females are circumcised. There is a +curious custom of spanning their weapons while reciting the Lord's +Prayer, and if the two operations end at the same time, then one may +kill with impunity. Many heretical beliefs and many false preachers +exist, the proximity of the Mahometans having its effect. Eclipses of +the moon mean that that orb is being swallowed by some awful monster, +and all the people endeavor to scare away that beast with the great +din that they make. Inasmuch as all these beliefs are not universal, +the missionary must exercise great prudence at all times. + +Another Augustinian, Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga, also devotes a +chapter of his Historia to the Peoples of the Philippines. There +are only two classes of peoples in the Philippines--the Negritos +and the Filipinos--and even these in last analysis are, he says, +homogeneous. Most of the chapter is taken up with the attempt to prove +that the Philippine Islands were peopled from the East and that they +are perhaps of the same origin as the Indians of South America, who +would then be the parent stock. All the peoples of the South Seas are +homogeneous, according to him, and he believes that he has proved his +case by the faulty philological method. His views are interesting, +as he is the only person who has put forward such claims. In reply +to those who claim a Malay origin for the peoples of the Philippines, +he states that the method of writing might very well have been learned +from the Malays, but that the people must have come from the east and +not the west, as the east winds prevail throughout the torrid zone. He +gives a brief description of the people, and various of their customs. + +The selection from Wilkes's narrative of his celebrated expedition +may be said more properly to be a general description of the island +of Jolo than a special study of its people. His narration contains so +many interesting observations, however, both in regard to the people +and their daily life and the other matters touched upon, that it is +deemed not to be out of place here. Besides it is the first authentic +account of that island by an American. The expedition leaves Manila, +January 21, 1842, and coasting steadily to the south, with short +stays at Mindoro and at a village in Panay, anchors January 31, +at Caldera in Zamboanga province. At that time, in all Mindanao, +there were, says Wilkes, only about 10,000 people under Spanish rule, +and about one-half of those were in Zamboanga. Caldera is a convict +settlement for native Filipinos, but Spanish criminals are sent to +Spain. On the first of February, they leave Mindanao and in due time +anchor at the village of Soung or Jolo. An interview with the sultan +is set by the governor, Dato Mulu, at which, when it is held, the +sultan agrees to a treaty of trade with the Americans. Wilkes gives +much interesting information regarding the customs and social and +industrial life of the Sulus; describes their chief city which has its +Chinese quarter; describes the government which is an oligarchy, the +chief governing body being the Ruma Bechara or Trading Council which +is presided over by the sultan to whom but scant respect is paid, for +the individual datos retain as much power as possible. Trade is free, +and both freemen and slaves engage in it at will, the slaves of the +island often attaining to a high degree of importance. The naturalists +are disappointed in their attempts to make researches on the island, +as the sultan, although in order to evade the request, declares that +it is unsafe, because of the hostile datos. Wilkes gives considerable +sound advice in regard to the navigation of this district, trading at +Jolo, and various other matters, besides an interesting though brief +history of Jolo, before and after the advent of the Spaniards. Those +interesting people the sea-gypsies are described. The expedition +reaches the Straits of Singapore on February 18. + +The remainder of the appendix, except the last document, constitutes +letters written by the Jesuit missionaries from Mindanao and +Basilan, and an ethnological survey of the Mindanao peoples by +a Jesuit of Manila who had formerly spent a number of years in +Mindanao. They are all comparatively modern, extending through the +years 1885-1889. January 20, 1885, Father Quirico More writes to the +father superior of the missions mainly concerning the Moros about the +Gulf of Davao, where the Spaniard Jose Oyanguren defeated them and +brought them under the dominion of Spain. Various events are related +in regard to efforts to reduce these Moros who are less in number +than is generally supposed, for though the Moros generally acquiesce +in the Spanish proposals to assume village life, their willingness +is only feigned. Those about the gulf are the "remains of powerful +and warlike Moros, who in the not distant past collected tribute from +the Mandayas and other heathens." There are two classes of Moros, the +datos, or aristocracy, and the common people. With the first rank must +be included the panditas or priests. Though the Moros endure, they do +not accept, Spanish rule, and await the time when they can throw it +off. Meanwhile they also suffer from the heathens about them, who are +hostile to them. To obtain the best results the officers of dato and +pandita should be suppressed, and other radical measures carried out. + +Father Pedro Rosell writes from Caraga, April 17, 1885, in regard +to a visit of inspection of the visitas of the southern part of the +district made by himself and Father Pablo Pastells, in December 1884, +to the Mandayas. He reports a most encouraging state of affairs there +pertaining to the conversion and reduction of the Mandayas. Especially +helpful has been the conversion of three bailanes or priestesses. With +the occasion of that conversion, the writer describes the method +of sacrifice among the Mandayas, and the effects produced on the +bailanes who are believed to be the true mediators between men and +gods. In describing the form of belief Father Rosell finds an analogy +to the Trinity in the Mandaya divinities, and one to Satan in the +two spirits of evil. Of great interest in this letter is the song +sung by the bailanes while sacrificing. + +A series of five letters from Father Mateo Gisbert, written from +Davao in 1886, contains much interesting material. In his letter of +January 4, the Hispano-Germanic controversy over the Carolinas is +mentioned, and the heathen and Christian fear in the Davao district of +a German invasion. There are many heathens in Davao, some of whom are +industrious and intelligent, but few of whom are baptized. In southwest +Davao there are about 12,000 Bagobos, and they still maintain their +old heathen customs, among them that of human sacrifice. They have +two feasts during the year, one before the sowing of the rice, and +the other at the end of the harvest. The latter is called the feast of +women, and there is nothing worse seen at it than feasting, drinking, +and dancing. In the former feast, the human sacrifice figures. The +Bagobos recognize two beginnings and each person has two souls. Various +remarks are made in regard to their legends or beliefs. At death also, +the human sacrifice is performed in order to remove the mourning. One +such sacrifice is described. The second letter of February 8, recites +certain superstitious customs of the Bagobos. In times of sickness they +invoke their gods. They always give the first fruits of the harvest to +the diuata. Birds may be both good and bad omens; sneezing is always +a bad omen. There are few thefts among them, for they believe that by +the use of certain magic powders, they will compel the thief to inform +on himself. The Bilans are the most industrious of all heathen peoples +about Davao and they number about 20,000. Although they have some of +the customs of the Bagobos, their language differs from that of the +latter. In his letter of February 20, Father Gisbert describes the +customs of the Tagacaolos who number 12,000 or 14,000. Their language +is understood by the Visayans. There are many intertribal feuds among +them and they are continually at war among themselves, those of one +district capturing and selling to the Moros those of another. They +are more docile than are their neighbors. The Manobos are lazy and +warlike and constantly on the hunt for slaves. The Moros thereabout +are a race of thieves and are exceedingly treacherous. The Atas or +Negritos live in the interior, and but little is known of them. Their +number may reach 25,000, and they possess their own language. The +letter of July 26 is written in a slightly depressed tone. Father +Gisbert gives a short Bagobo genealogy. They have indulged in human +sacrifice for many years. Human sacrifices prove, though it seems +a paradox, a lucrative and real business, and not only Bagobos, but +Moros and others traffic in them. Various details of a human sacrifice +are given. The fifth letter of December 24, relates the results of a +visit to the island of Samal. There the Moros of the Davao district, +afraid that the Christian conversion is about to prevail, machinate +to keep control, and oppose missionary efforts. The action of the +Spanish authorities in giving titles as captains and lieutenants +to Christians makes such persons the real datos of the island and +weakens the hereditary allegiance. The remnants of the Moros about +Davao ask for villages, but it is only pretense, in order that they +may continue to live under their old customs, and so that the datos +may not lose the few followers left to them. It is advised that the +people be encouraged to desert their datos and panditas, and that +all the Moros be assembled into one village. The many small villages +of the Moros, each with its dato and pandita, are an obstacle to the +reduction and conversion of the heathens. + +The letter written by Father Pablo Cavalleria to Father Francisco +Sanchez from Isabela de Basilan in the island of Basilan, December 31, +1886, gives a great deal of most important information regarding the +Moros of that island. The native race is evidently fewer in number +than the Moros (who number ten or twelve thousand), and is partially +christianized. The Moros inhabit the coast and the interior, the former +being known as Samal Laut, who are fishermen, and the latter as Yacans, +who are agriculturists. They are hostile to each other. With the Samal +Laut are mingled also Joloans and Malays. Personal descriptions of +the Moros, their mental characteristics, their religion, marriage and +mortuary customs, etc., are given. Their chief feast is the celebration +of the birth of Mahomet, though that date is not fixed but depends +rather on when there is sufficient food for a good feast. They are +superstitious, and perform various superstitious rites. They have seven +heavens and seven hells, each with its distinctive signification. Their +method of fighting is described. Their hatred toward the Christians +is well shown in a native song quoted by Father Cavalleria. + +Father Pablo Pastells, in a letter to the father provincial, +written from Manila, April 20, 1887, devotes considerable space to +an ethnological survey of the peoples of Mindanao. The population +of that island is divided into Malays and Indonesians (although the +latter has no foundation), and Negritos; and there is still another +division into Old Christians, New Christians, and heathens. The first +named number 186,000, and their customs are influenced to a greater +or less degree by those of the heathens according as they are more +or less removed from them. Father Pastells describes their social +life in many details, which shows that they have become "reduced" +fairly well to a half civilized life. The New Christians date from +1876 (the date when the Jesuits reentered Mindanao) and are scarcely +to be differentiated in life and customs from the heathens from whom +they have proceeded. The heathens (among whom are evidently numbered +the Moros) aggregate 300,000, and among them are found Chinese and +Japanese crossings, says Father Pastells. In greater or less detail, +is set forth information concerning the Mamanuas, Manobos, Mandayas, +Manguangas, Monteses, Guiangas, Bagobos, Calaganes, Tagacaolos, +Tirurayes, Tagabili, Samales, Subanon, Lutangos Moros, Calibuganes, +and Moros. The worst of the last named, are the Moros of Jolo, and +the Samales Laut, while the most pacific are the Yacanes. + +Father Joseph Maclotet writes to the rector of the Ateneo Municipal, +from Talisayan, May 11, 1889, concerning the Buquidnons of Misamis +province who are divided into three groups, numbering in all about +13,000. Socially and religiously they resemble other natives of +that district. They are described and compared to the Visayans. They +are intelligent and modest, and have some idea of God, heaven, and +eternity. They are polytheists and have four gods. The spirit of evil +is also propitiated by them. The sacrifices, consisting of products of +the soil, wine, and fowls, are generally offered by the old men. Their +marriage ceremonies and various other social features of their life +are described. They are industrious and engage in various industries +and occupations, the chief being agriculture. Their implements are +described, among them being an ingenious cotton-gin. The Chinese +with whom they trade take every advantage of them and cheat them on +all sides. They have rude musical instruments. They punish crime +according to certain traditional laws, the dato being judge. Many +superstitions and omens, as in all other heathens of Mindanao, enter +into their lives. + +The final document of the Appendix is translated from the supplement +for December 9, 1905, of El Renacimiento, of Manila, and treats of +the still prevailing belief among the more ignorant people of Luzon +in regard to witches. The mangkukulam, the male or female witch, +cannot look another person straight in the face, and has immense +power of doing evil to his neighbors. He causes various aches and +pains. The symptoms exhibited by the person bewitched are given, +as also the modus operandi of the witch. Regular physicians are +powerless because they do not believe in enchantment. Instead, a +special witch doctor is employed. His treatment consists in the use +of anona bark which has power over the witchcraft, and in bad cases +a good caning is often administered, or, the last resort, bathing in +boiling water. This last proves effective, for the patient dies under +it. The belief is that these severe measures do not harm the patient, +but the witch. There is another witch doctor, whose procedure differs +somewhat from that of the former and does not involve the discomfort +of the patient to so great a degree. A small wax figure made in human +shape is put into boiling water, whereupon the witch is bound to +present himself and confess his fault. The writer relates a personal +experience, in which, against his will, he was made to act the part of +witch doctor. The people have another name for another sort of witch, +who sends his sickness, which is incurable, through the air. Every +Friday, all witches suffer terribly as a sort of recompense for the +power which they possess, and next day attend the witches' frolic. + + + The Editors + + September, 1906. + + + + + + +DOCUMENT OF 1670-1700 + + + Dominican missions. Vicente de Salazar, O.P. [From his Historia + de el Santissimo Rosario.] + + +Source: This is translated and synopsized from Salazar's Historia de el +Santissimo Rosario (Manila, 1742), from a copy owned by Edward E. Ayer. + +Translation: This is made by James A. Robertson. + + + + + + +DOMINICAN MISSIONS, 1670-1700 + + +[The following is translated and synopsized from Vicente Salazar's +Historia, [1] from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago. The +first five chapters contain nothing directly on the missions.] + + + +CHAPTER VI + + A new reenforcement of religious arrives at this province and the + [post of the] commissary of the Holy Office is given back to it. + + +[In 1671, a band of thirty-three missionaries, who had been gathered +by the definitor, Juan Polanco, arrives at Manila. [2] They are +as follows:] + +The father lector, Fray Alonso Sandin, son of San Estevan, of +Salamanca, and head of the mission. + +Father Fray Alonso de Cordova, son of Santo Domingo y San Pablo, +of Ezija. + +Father Fray Miguel Rodrigo, of the convent of San Estevan, of +Salamanca. + +Father Fray Andres Toro, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of El Campo +de Zafra. + +Father Fray Alonso Dominguez, of the convent of San Ildephonso, +of Toro. + +Father Fray Bartolome Marron, of the convent of San Pablo, of +Valladolid. + +Father Fray Domingo Mezquita, of the convent of Preachers, of Zaragoca. + +Father Fray Diego Ortiz, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Diego de Villar, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Domingo de Escalera, of the convent of El Rosario, +of Madrid. + +Father Fray Francisco de la Maza, of the convent of Nuestra Senora, +of Atocha. + +Father Fray Francisco Luxan, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Father Fray Jacinto Samper, of the convent of Caspe, in Aragon. + +Father Fray Geronimo de Ulloa, of the convent of Santiago de Galicia. + +Father Fray Juan de Santa Cruz, of the convent of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Juan de Arjona, of the convent of San Vicente, of +Plasencia. + +Father Fray Joseph de la Trinidad, or Galfaroso, of the convent of +Santiago, of Pamplona. + +Father Fray Juan Catalan, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Joseph Valdes, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Melchor Lorenzana, of the convent of San Pablo, of +Plasencia. + +Father Fray Matheo Goncalez, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia. + +Father Fray Mathias Ramon, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Avila. + +Father Fray Pedro Gonzalez, of the convent of Nuestra Senora, of la +Pena de Francia. + +Father Fray de la Pena, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Pedro Fenollar, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Mallorca. + +Father Fray Pedro de la Fuente, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Victoria. + +Brother Fray Juan Ybanez de Santo Domingo, of the same convent. + +Brother Fray Diego de Almazan, of the convent of Preachers, of +Zaragoca. + +Brother Fray Dionisio Morales, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Ciudad de el Caller. + +The last three were choristers, and the following were lay-brethren: + +Fray Matheo Gascon, of the convent of Preachers, of Zaragoca. + +Fray Joseph Garcia, of the convent of Preachers, of Magallon. + +Fray Raymundo Martorel, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Graus. + +The last named remained in Mexico in the hospice of the order +there. With the other thirty-two who reached this land, our ministries +and missions in charge of the province were reenforced, and other +missions which were promoted because of that new reenforcement, and +were shortly after founded as will be told later in the following +chapters. + +[The remainder of the chapter relates to the reestablishment of +the post of commissary of the Holy Office to the Dominicans, who had +always held it previous to Fray Joseph de Paternina, O. S. A. Chapters +vii-xxvii contain lives of various missionaries of the Philippines and +the Asiatic mainland, notices of provincial elections, and accounts +of the missions of the Asiatic mainland.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + + Arrival of a new mission of religious at the province; the province + assumes the administration of the Zambals. + + +[In 1679 a band of Dominicans arrive at the islands in charge of Fray +Francisco Villalba. [3] Those religious are as follows:] + +The father vicar, Fray Francisco Villalba, son of the convent of San +Pablo, of Burgos. + +The father presentee, Fray Manuel Trigueros, son of the convent of +the Preachers, of Zaragoca. + +The father presentee, Fray Francisco Matoces, son of the convent of +Santa Catharina Virgen y Martir, of Barzelona. + +Father Fray Magino Ventallol, doctor in the holy canons, son of the +same convent. + +Father Fray Raymundo Berart, doctor in both laws, and professor of +the university of Lerida, son of the said convent of Barzelona. + +Father Fray Raphael Morert, graduate from the same branches, and son +of the said convent. + +Father Fray Joseph Vila, son of the said convent. + +The father lector, Fray Miguel Ossorio, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Sevilla. + +The father lector, Fray Francisco Ruiz, son of the convent of San +Pablo, of Valladolid. + +The father lector, Fray Francisco Vargas, son of the convent of San +Estevan, of Salamanca. + +The father lector, Fray Francisco Ximenez, son of the convent of Xerez. + +Father Fray Juan Yniguez, son of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Father Fray Miguel de Castro, son of the same convent. + +Father Fray Diego Burguillos, son of the same convent. + +Father Fray Juan de Santo Thomas, son of the same convent, collegiate +and now lector in the college of Santo Thomas, of the said city. + +Father Fray Juan Rois, son of the convent of Lugo. + +Father Fray Juan Fernandez, son of the convent of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Juan de Todos Santos, son of the said convent. + +Father Fray Juan Goncalez, son of the royal convent of Nuestra Senora, +of Atocha. + +Father Fray Gregorio Xiraldez, son of the convent of Pontevedra. + +Father Fray Francisco Nunez Bravo, son of the convent of Santa Cruz, +of Segovia. + +Father Fray Fernando Ortubia, son of the convent of Santiago de +Galicia. + +Father Fray Domingo Muta, a Sicilian, son of the convent of Turin. + +Father Fray Bernardo Lopez, son of the convent of San Pedro Martir, +of Toledo. + +Father Fray Antonio de Santa Maria, son of the convent of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Alonso de Herrera, son of the convent of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Alonso Cobelo, son of the convent of Lugo. + +Fray Francisco de Frias, deacon, son of the convent of Burgos. + +Fray Inigo de San Joseph, son of the convent of San Pablo of Palencia. + +Fray Thomas de el Rosario, of the convent of La Puebla de los Angeles. + +And three lay-brethren, as follows: + +Brother Fray Juan Calvo, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia. + +Brother Fray Juan Martinez, of the convent of Nuestra Senora of Nieva. + +Brother Fray Francisco de la Cruz, of the convent of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +That same year, on the first of February, a student, a native of +Galicia, and a relative of the archbishop of Mexico, one Antonio de +Eguiar y Seijas, took the habit for this province in the hospice of +San Jacinto in Mexico; and at the proper time in the following year +he professed and immediately came to this his province. + +That new reenforcement was very necessary because of the great amount +of work to be done in this province. For, besides the Christian +districts in its charge, and the Chinese missions, and those of +Tunking, on the eleventh of May of the said year, the governor of these +islands as vice-patron of these churches, in the name of the king +our lord, had entrusted us with the administration of the province +of Zambales, which had thitherto been in charge of the Augustinian +Recollect fathers. [4] Its administration was now entrusted to our +province for the following cause and reason. Those Indians were and +are the rudest that are known in these environs of Manila. They are +very cruel and bloodthirsty, and fond of murdering people without +more cause than their liking for cutting off heads. They were always +the bugaboo of the Spaniards, and the terror of the Indians of the +other provinces. They could never be wholly conquered, especially +those living in Buquil; for they were a people who lived in the +mountains where the Spanish arms could not reach them. And less +was it possible to conquer them by means of mildness, gentleness, +kindness, and caresses, although the preachers of the holy gospel of +the Recollects of our father St. Augustine tried to invite and lure +them to the knowledge of the true God and to consider the welfare +of their souls. Consequently, although those missionaries were among +them for more than seventy years, they were unable to reduce them to +the mild yoke of the law of Christ. And although they worked with +zeal in that attempt, with great merit and profit to themselves, +yet they always lived in great disconsolation, at beholding the +hardness of those hearts. Not less affliction and trouble was caused +to the Indians when they saw fathers and Spaniards in their lands, +for since they were so stiff-necked, and accustomed to liberty, they +did not look with favor on the payment of tribute or submission and +obedience to the fathers. Consequently, they were dissatisfied with +the fathers, and discussed various plans to oust them. They did not +dare to murder them for fear of the Spaniards, who had a presidio or +fort in Paynaven (the center of that province), and because since they +were near Manila, any action that they attempted would be avenged +by the Spaniards who would send troops of soldiers there by both +land and sea. Hence the final plan discussed by the inhabitants of +Buquil was to have recourse to the governor, asking him to remove +those fathers, and in their place give them Dominican fathers. This +was not because of any greater affection that they had for us than +for them, but because they imagined that by successive changes, they +could better conserve their liberty. This seems clearly to be their +end, for before the end of seven years after our entrance into that +province, they were dissatisfied with us, and begged fathers of the +Society. They are a fickle people and fond of change. Their idea was +that one sort of ministers succeeding thus to others, neither the +one nor the other sort could get a foothold, or be able to put the +preaching or the evangelical instruction on a sound basis among them. + +It happened, then, in the year 1676, that the alcalde-mayor +of Pampanga, then Sargento-mayor Don Francisco de Texada, and +Sargento-mayor Alonso Fernandez Pacheco, former chief commandant +of the fort of Balas, began communication with the Zambal Indians +of Buquil and having gained their good will with their zeal for +the welfare of their souls, persuaded them to become baptized, +for as abovesaid, most of the people of Buquil were heathens. They +answered that they would become baptized if they were given Dominican +ministers; for they wished to be administered by them alone. Having +received that petition and proposal of the Indians, the said alcalde +and commandant informed the governor of these islands, then the +master-of-camp, Don Manuel de Leon. He desirous of the reduction of +those infidels, petitioned the father provincial of this province, +then father Fray Phelipe Pardo, to send some religious to Zambales as +missionaries for those mountains, in order to ascertain whether the +effect of reducing those barbarians to the faith of Christ could be +obtained in that way--a matter that all desired greatly. By virtue +of that, the father provincial sent father Fray Pedro de Alarcon [5] +and father Fray Domingo de Escalera to the place called Buquil. To +another place called Balacbac, which is located behind the mountains +of Abucay, he sent the father vicar of the said village, namely, +Father Domingo Perez. The latter immediately departed for Balacbac and +having assembled some Indians there, baptized nine, and returned to +Abucay, bringing five Zambals with him whom he afterward catechised +and baptized. One of them was the nephew of the priest of the idols, +and the father taught him to read and write, for he was more clever +than the others. That Indian was very useful, and afterward was of +much help to the said father in the reduction of the Zimarrones of +the mountains, and in telling their customs and idolatries. The two +fathers who were at Buquil, assembled some Indians into a place which +they called Nuestra Senora de Atocha, where they baptized some and +catechised others. But the governor having died at the beginning +of the following year, the former ministers of that province began +to complain to the father provincial that we were entering their +administration. Notwithstanding that he had a sound reply that the +vice-patron of those fields of Christendom had entrusted the matter +to us, the father provincial in order to avoid anger between both +orders, enjoined the fathers to return. That was the end of that first +entrance which our religious made in Zambales. The provincial chapter +was held after that, and in it the said father Fray Domingo Perez was +elected vicar of Samal. The latter, by virtue of the order which was +enacted in the said provincial chapter for all the father vicars of the +houses near the mountains where there were any heathens to reduce, to +endeavor to make entrances among them in order to allure them to the +faith of Christ, did in that part what was ordered, by making some +entrances among those mountains in order to reduce some Negritos, +who are called Zambals. [6] Although the father worked with energy +in that attempt, and went to great expense in kindnesses to them, +he could obtain nothing from them because of their great barbarity +and other reasons which it is not the present purpose to mention. + +In the year 1678, Master-of-camp Don Juan de Vargas y Hurtado, +knight of the Order of Santiago, came to govern these islands. With +the coming of the new governor, the Zambals of Buquil renewed their +former petition that Dominican fathers be given them. In order to make +surer of their demands, they presented themselves to the archbishop, +saying that they would quickly be reduced and would embrace the +faith of Jesus Christ, if ministers of our order were given them. The +archbishop, having seen that proposal, informed the governor of it, +to whom as vice-patron belonged the right of assigning one or another +sort of ministers to those Indians. The governor brought with him +a royal decree from his Majesty ordering him to entrust to one of +the orders the administration of the island of Mindoro, which was +in charge of secular priests. Upon seeing the representation of the +Zambals, he offered the administration of the said island of Mindoro +to the Augustinian Recollect fathers, on condition that they leave +the province of Zambales, in order that our religious might assume +its administration in accordance with the petition of the Indians +of that province. The father provincial of the Recollects accepted +the exchange, although they assert that the cession was not legal, +as it was not made by the provincial chapter of their province. That +annulling clause was not put forward then, and the cession made by the +father provincial of the administration of Zambales before the said +governor having been seen, the Recollects were given that of the island +of Mindoro. By virtue of that, the said governor in his Majesty's name, +conceded to the Order of St. Dominic the administration of the province +of Zambales from the village of Marivelez to that of Bolinao. The +father provincial of this province, namely, the father commissary Fray +Balthasar de Santa Cruz, immediately sent some religious to administer +the said Indians. In the intermediate congregation of the following +year, the houses of the said province were accepted in due form, and +ten religious were established in them for the cultivation of those +fields of Christendom, and for the new reductions of the heathens.... + +[Chapter xxix deals with the customs of the Zambals, and is omitted +here, as we shall give in a future volume the original MS., on which +it is based.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXX + + How our religious continued to soften those Zambal Indians and + reduce them to civilization + + +[Notwithstanding that the Recollects had preached in the province +of Zambales for seventy years and many of the Zambals were baptized, +many of them were still wild, and refused the gospel message held out +to them. This is because of their great love of liberty and hatred +of restraint, and not because of lack of zeal on the part of the +Recollects. Besides the Zambals lived scattered in many rancherias +so that it was difficult for the fathers to visit them more than +once or twice a year, and consequently, the little instruction that +could be given them was insufficient to leaven them with the gospel +spirit throughout the year. They had been unable to reduce them to +fewer settlements because the various bands were often at war with +one another and could not reconcile their difficulties. Then, too, +the magistrates, sunk in their self interest, did not furnish the +aid that should come from them. "This is the reason, and there is +no other, why there is so much infidelity in these islands; for it +is clearly seen by experience that when the secular government has +been in earnest, and encouraged a mission, very abundant fruits have +followed therefrom." The narrative continues:] + +And this is what our religious had in their favor when they entered +that province of Zambales, for the governor of these islands, Don +Juan de Vargas y Hurtado, was very desirous of that reduction, and +made exact measures for it. In imitation of him the chief commandant +of the fort of Paynaoven, namely, Adjutant Alonso Martin Franco, +tried to cooperate in this design by his continual vigilance and +efforts and at the evident risk of his life, and without heeding his +own interest in the many offers of gold which the Indians made him so +that he might desist from his purpose and not oblige them to leave +their retreats. Our religious protected by that aid, proposed to +the Indians of those rancherias as soon as they reached Playahonda, +to collect into one settlement in the site that they thought best, +in order that they might be more easily taught and administered by the +religious. Since they had promised to reduce themselves if Dominican +ministers were given them, and since the governor had given them +those ministers, they ought also to fulfil their word. The Indians of +Playahonda replied that they were not the ones who had gone to Manila +with that request, but it was those of Buquil. Consequently, the latter +ought to be confronted with that promise, and not they. Thereupon, +the religious summoned those of Buquil and making them the proposal +abovesaid, the Indians began to offer various excuses. By that our +religious recognized that all their promises were feigned, and that +they were very far from any intention to become reduced. Consequently, +that reply having been heard by the religious, which was so contrary +to what they had expected, and seeing that stronger measures were +needed, the father vicar provincial returned to Manila to represent +to the governor the rebellion of the Zambal Indians. The said father +was welcomed by his Lordship, from whom he obtained what he wished, +namely, the prohibition of trade between the Zambals and the Indians +of Pampanga and other provinces, in order that, being deprived of that +recourse, hunger and necessity might compel them to descend from the +mountain and live in a settlement in order to exist. + +But that provision proving insufficient to make the Zambals live in +definite villages, the governor ordered the proclamation of an edict +ordering all the Zambals to descend the mountains under penalty of +being severely punished. The edict was proclaimed in Paynaoven and +in other places of that province, whence the notice of it could +be carried to those who were living in the mountains. More than +five hundred Zambals of Buquil descended on the day and to the site +assigned. There the commandant of the fort again imparted to them the +edict and order of the governor. Their reply to the proposal was to +submit the whole matter in common to an Indian called Quiravat, who +had been the chief agent in begging our ministers for religious. He +said "Let him who wishes to descend to settle, do it and welcome, +but as for me, I am going to live with my people where I choose." The +commandant angered at his boldness, manacled and bound the said +Quiravat, and the Indians his associates seeing that, began to +discharge a cloud of arrows at the commandant and his soldiers, in +number twenty-two men. Thereupon, the said commandant ordered Quiravat +to be beheaded, and the other Indians retired with the death of twelve +of their companions, but without their having done any harm to the +Spaniards. That fray and encounter inspired the Indians with fear, +and some, although they were few, descended. But in the following year +of 1680, three hundred soldiers having entered by way of Pampanga, +and the commandant of Paynaoven and his men having made a raid in that +other part, the Zambals were inspired with so great fear, that many +of them descended from the mountains. Consequently, it was possible +to form or increase three villages: one near the fort called Alalan; +another in Balacbac, called Nuevo Toledo; and the third south of the +two, called Baubuen. The Indians who descended from the mountain +were gathered into those three villages, whether from fear of the +Spaniards, or through the persuasions of the fathers. The latter, by +the aid of the soldiers, caused the Indians to show them more respect; +and with the affability and benignity of their treatment, softened the +hardness of their hearts. The same effort was made in other places of +the said province, where there were already some villages, although +they were very small and distant, and could not be administered by +the religious without evident risk and danger. Consequently, they +soon asked that they be placed in such condition and distance that +there might be easy communication from one village to the other. All +that was done at the cost of the order, which paid those who built +the houses. Those houses were built by people of other villages and +provinces, and they were given already built to the Zambals; for to +compel them to make them was morally impossible. + +This effort of causing the Indians to form their villages would +have been of slight use, if at the same time they had not been +obliged to work in making their fields in order that they might +have the wherewithal to sustain life, so that they might not be +under the necessity of abandoning their villages and returning to the +mountains, where with the hunt and with various roots, the Indians are +wont to sustain life at small cost, without the care and trouble of +cultivation. And as they were unaccustomed to the cultivation of the +soil, and did not know how to plow, or dig, and had no instruments +for that, nor even seed for planting: they were provided with all +this by our religious. More than fifty buffaloes or carabaos (which +are their oxen), by which the plowing is done in this country, were +taken there at the cost of the order. Also many plows were bought +for them, and they were also given the seed so that they could +allege no reasonable excuse. Inasmuch as they did not know how to +plow or to plant, salaried Indians were taken from other provinces, +so that they might cultivate the land, and so that the Zambals might +learn of them. After the land that first year had been cultivated, +and the rice had headed, it was given to them at the time of harvest, +so that they might reap and gather it. But so great was the laziness +of those Zambals that many of them refused to accept the land because +it was not reaped. But others, having the profit so plainly in sight, +set to work to reap it and gather it; and since by that means they made +sure of their food, they were inclined to work and the cultivation of +their fields. Our religious encouraged them in this by thus forcibly +setting before their eyes the profit of the harvest, that they would +have afterward. The religious accompanied them to the fields to work, +heartily praised those who applied themselves, and perhaps, in order +to inspire them by their example, put their hands to the plow. For +the religious very well understood that if the Indians did not turn +husbandmen, they would not be secure in the level land, and they would +easily return to the mountains under the obligation of necessity. And +thus that necessary diligence was compulsory in order to reduce them +to a civilized life and to a good government. + +All the time the fathers continued to soften their hardness by +their kindness and mildness, which they showed them not only in +the gentleness of their intercourse and conversation, but also much +more in the generosity and liberality which they used toward them, +providing them with all that was necessary, both for the building of +their houses and for the cultivation of their fields. They gave the +Indians a quantity of clothing to wear, besides the other acts of +kindness and the presents which they made them. In that our province +spent much money, a sum which, according to the accounts, exceeded +ten thousand pesos. The thing that robbed still more their affection +was on seeing that the fathers defended them when the soldiers wished +to employ violence with them, for they took the part of the Indians, +and softened the fury of the soldiers. By that means the Indians came +to perceive two things: one that the fathers considered their good; +and the other that they were higher than the soldiers, since the +latter obeyed the religious and desisted from the attempted severity +when the fathers ordered or petitioned them. Hence they came to infer +that to stand well with the fathers and to obey them was of great +profit to them, for so they were assured by the Spaniards, and among +the religious they experienced no evil treatment, but everything was +mild, gentle, and peaceful. Consequently, they moderated themselves +and became so mild, within a year, that it caused great surprise to +see those who had formerly been so wild and unmanageable become so +conformable and domestic. + +When our religious entered at the beginning, the children ran away +from them when they saw them, and the women also hid; but the former +later became so familiar with the religious that they would scarcely +let them alone. When the religious entered any village, the children +all descended from their houses and went behind him, and walked with +him, and followed wherever he went. Scarcely would they let him walk, +for some of the children seized him by the habit, and others placed +their scapularies under his eyes [for him to bless?]. + +While the father was in the convent, it was not empty of Indians, who +were going and coming, some to beg for relief in their necessities, +while others begged consolation for their troubles, some medicine +for their pains, and some relief in their afflictions. All found +there whatever they needed, for charity serves for everything. And +since the Indians beheld that of the fathers toward them, they +loved them, esteemed them, and favored, and were so well inclined to +their intercourse, that, on a certain occasion, when they thought +that the fathers were going to leave them, and return to Manila, +the sorrow manifested by all was great until the fathers undeceived +them, and released them by various means of their vain fear. Those +who had previously fled from the fathers, and those with whom the +above-mentioned violence had to be used in order to gain admittance +in the beginning, reached this condition of sociability and mildness +in little more than one year.... + + + + +CHAPTER XXXI + + Fruit of the preaching of our religious in the changing of the + customs of the religious + + +When once our religious had gained the goodwill of the Indians they +immediately began to exercise the apostolic ministry of the preaching +in order to eradicate their ancient vices and customs and reduce +them to the perfection of a Christian life. There was much to do and +accomplish in this province, for there were yet many heathens in it, +and many apostates from the faith which they had received, and some, +who made use of the name of Christian, living in their rancherias +or visitas, far from the intercourse with, and teaching of, their +ministers, were only Christians in name, but in their morals and +even in their religion they were heathens, since they did not know +the Christian doctrine or the mysteries of the Catholic faith, and +neither prayed nor knew how to pray, nor heard mass, nor observed +the feasts, nor took any account of Lent, fasting, or abstinence, +and did not show any other token of a Christian. For since they lived +in the mountains, in remote and distant places, where the ministers +could not visit them unless by running great risks and dangers, as +abovesaid, they were not sufficiently rooted in the faith which the +preachers had taught them; and, living intermixed among the heathens, +they easily took on their rites and customs. If, perchance, they wore +the rosary at the neck it was when they were going to the villages of +Christians, so that they might not be taken for heathens. But there in +their rancherias among the mountains, very rarely did they wear it; +for the devil had persuaded them that nothing good could happen to +them if they had those beads with them. Consequently, when they went +to hunt, or to commit a murder, they immediately took off the rosary, +in order to obtain success in their undertaking. In short, to tell the +whole thing, those Indians of Buquil were even idolaters, and although +they had received baptism, they continued in their idolatries, and in +their sacrifices to the demon. Only in the capitals where the fathers +lived, were there a few perfect Christians; but in the rancherias and +visitas, especially those of the district of Buquil, since they did not +have the ministers over them, they lived in entire liberty with their +ancient vices and superstitions. They killed one another without cause +or reason, became intoxicated, worshiped idols, and lived together +as they did before, without taking any account of their Christianity. + +In order to free them from all such things our religious toiled +and labored earnestly arguing, exhorting, and checking them in all +patience and instruction, according to the advice of the apostle. And +inasmuch as all the barbarity of their customs originated from their +lack of faith, the fathers began to set before them and to explain +to them the immortality of the soul, the reward or punishment of the +other life, and all the other mysteries of the Catholic faith. Their +instruction took so fast hold once more on the apostates and on the +people of Buquil, that they looked at one another in stupefaction at +what they heard the fathers say. The latter seeing the surprise that +those things caused in the Indians, decided that it was necessary to +start that undertaking from its very beginnings, and to teach them +to pray and the instruction, which they had either never understood, +or they had completely forgotten. They began that effort by the +children, whom they instructed excellently in the prayers, and in the +explanation of the doctrine. After them the older people went to the +church, in order not to be put to the blush before the children. The +latter, either by the advice of the fathers or because of their own +natural loquaciousness, upbraided their elders later with the little +knowledge which they had had of God before and because they had +lived like heathens. By that means the elders were put to shame, and +submitted to the teaching. Little by little they began to open their +eyes, and to see the blindness in which they had lived. Confused and +ashamed of their old way of living, they applied themselves indeed +with all earnestness to learn what was necessary for salvation. The +church was filled with people all day long who wished to learn the +prayers and formulas, which the children prayed in a loud voice, so +that the others learned them in that way. The religious preached to +them quite frequently, explaining to them the mysteries of the faith, +and threatening with the wrath and anger of God those who did not keep +the holy commandments. They did that with so great spirit, and fervor, +that it caused great terror to those who heard it, and thus daily +they were becoming reduced to live according to the laws of Christians. + +[The preaching of the religious is aided by divine miracles, and the +religious also make use of stratagem to banish vice. An instance of +the latter is as follows.] + +Such was the one of which the father vicar provincial, Fray Domingo +Perez, made use, to banish homicide. He frequently censured that +vice in them, but for all that they were wont secretly to commit +murders. The father would hear of the murder, although the aggressor +was not known. Assembling all those of the village, he would declare +that he would ascertain it by means of the pulse. Then he took the +pulse of each one, and since confusion is natural in the criminal, +especially in these Indians, who understand so little of dissimulation, +when the father would take hold of the pulse of the aggressor, the +latter trembled all over his body. Hence, by a happy conjecture, the +father would deduce that he was the one, and then by censuring him or +punishing him according to his deserts, the others were deterred from, +and afraid of, committing that crime, which could never be hidden from +the father, since he learned everything from the pulse. So certain were +they of that, that if any of them had had anything stolen from him, +he went to the father to complain, and requested him to feel the pulse +of all, in order to ascertain the thief who had stolen it. And although +the father usually excused himself from doing that, they could not rid +themselves of the idea, which they had formed on the first occasion, +that the fathers learned all things by means of the pulse. Therefore, +they managed to check many of their ancient customs and superstitions. + +But not so quickly did our religious learn what can not be mentioned +without tears, namely, that although the Indians were apparently +Christians, and were subject to the teaching of the fathers, and +had abandoned some of their ancient customs, and embraced in part +the observance of the divine law, yet they desired to serve God and +the demon at the same time, and they desired to embrace the matters +of the faith in such a manner that they should not become separated +from the ancient worship which they attributed to the demon in their +false gods. That matter was kept very secret among them, for since +they feared lest it should reach the ears of the fathers, they had all +sworn an oath to keep close concerning that fact. They kept that oath +so well that it was never revealed through them. But God revealed it in +a curious manner to the religious for the welfare of those miserable +people. We have related in chapter xxviii that Father Fray Domingo +Perez baptized a boy in Abucay, the nephew of a priest of the idols, +who having been taught to read and write, and having been given devout +books to read, became a very excellent Christian. He and other lads +whom the father kept in the convent, asked the said religious many +things concerning the faith, which he taught them and explained to them +most gladly, so that daily they became more imbued in all its articles +and mysteries. Three years after the entrance of our religious into +that district, those lads asked the father if it was right to do such +and such things, namely the idolatries which the Indians practiced, +and the sacrifices which they made to the demon. The father asked +them what it was that was done, and they like children went on to +tell whatever they had seen their elders do, and whatever they were +practicing secretly even to that time. The father's grief at such news +can well be imagined. But dissembling its effects for the time being, +in order not to frighten them away from the hunt, he charged the lads +to keep still about what they had told him. Summoning the schoolboys, +whom he petted and treated with great kindness, he was informed by +them with so great clearness on this head, that he learned who were +the priests of those sacrifices, and the instruments that each one +had for their diabolical functions. Also charging those children to +keep still, he ordered them to tell no one what they had told him, +so that their parents might not beat them. The father having learned +everything very clearly, and having consulted with God concerning the +matter in prayer, he resolved, when Lent came in the year 1683, to put +an end to that idolatry, although he knew very well that it would be +at the cost of great labor, and many troubles and dangers. For the +principal priests of those sacrifices were the principal people of +the village, and they were respected and venerated by all and could +set afoot any treachery against him. And since they had all sworn not +to reveal the matter, as he had not yet proved it, it was a point in +which all were interested, and in which all would be against him. + +However, having placed all his confidence in God, and with the +information that he possessed of the whole matter, he began to summon +one after another the chiefs, and chide each one in private for the +execrable evil that he was practicing by offering sacrifice to the +demon. Before that one could deny the truth to him, he said to him, +"You have such and such instruments, and with them you sacrificed +on such and such a day, in company with such and such a person." To +another he said: "You are a priest, and consequently, you have +so many instruments kept in such a place for the sacrifices, by +which you give to the demon the honor that belongs to God; and as +proof of it you performed that sacrifice on such and such a day +with such and such a person, and this other on such and such a day, +with such and such a person." In such wise did he examine them all +and censured them for so great evil. They, seeing that he was giving +them so sure proofs, considered the religious as a diviner and gave +him the instruments of their idolatries. He commenced by the village +of Bauguen, whose church was dedicated to Santa Rosa. By the aid and +favor of the saint he collected a great number of those instruments, +which some gave to him willingly and some reluctantly. He called +the children, and ordered them to break up those instruments, and +they obeyed immediately. "Now throw them into the privies," said the +father, "and let the children perform the necessities of nature on +them." They obeyed his order instantly, and made a mockery and jest +of those instruments. The Zambals were astonished that the father and +the children were not killed for the disrespect that they showed to +their gods, for they believed that he who touched or profaned such +instruments would die. The father preached to them, and taught them +what they were to do in the future. Having finished that matter in +Bauguen, he went to Balacbac to do the same; and although he had some +difficulty, with the help of God, it was conquered. From Balacbac +he went to the village of Alalan, and although he found the people +there obstinate and pertinacious, by his kindness and arguments, +he induced them to do the same that had been done in the preceding +villages. Then he went to Buquil and did the same as in Playa-Honda, +breaking and burning all the instruments of their idolatries. And +although the father had many troubles on account of that, he stood it +all with great patience, as he saw that he was performing the cause +of God in this; for which, as we shall see later, they deprived him +of life and made him a glorious martyr. + +That so pernicious root having been torn out, the religious had no +difficulty in sowing in the land of their hearts the good doctrine and +teaching. The holy fear of God, the frequency of the holy sacraments, +the devotion of the queen of the Angels, and the exercise of the +holy rosary persuaded them. And since now the demon had left their +souls, and he had been bereft of the right which he had to them, the +instructions and inducements of the religious found no resistance in +their hearts; and, consequently, they agreed thoroughly in all those +things, and thereby they daily became more perfect, and became fervent +Christians, anxious for their salvation, and given to the exercises +of piety. Now one never heard, as formerly, of violent murders; and +now there was no intoxication or other disorders; now the superiors +were obeyed and respected by their inferiors; now one no longer heard +among them a "I do not wish," as they were wont to answer formerly; +now all were safe, each in his own house, and no one thought of +taking vengeance on another. They attended mass almost every day, +and went to recite the rosary in the afternoon. They all wore the +rosary hanging from their necks with great devotion, and recited it +in their houses every night. They observed the fasts of the Church, +and the days of abstinence with punctuality, for they feared greatly +lest God punish them, as He did punish some for the example of +others. In fine, such was the reform in their morals, and the change +of life in those Indians, that the fathers themselves were surprised +to see what had been wrought by the hand of God, which had changed +them in the briefest of space from ravening wolves to gentle lambs, +and from fierce and savage men into faithful and obedient sons of the +Church. And although our religious worked mightily in this yet all the +glory is due to God, who not only gave His spirit to the ministers, +but also cooperated in their preaching with many manifest miracles +which will be related in the following chapter. + +[Chapter xxxii recounts the miraculous occurrences above mentioned, +all of which resulted in greater faith and devotion to the new precepts +taught by the missionaries, and instilled fear of God into the hearts +of the Indians.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIII + + Of another mission in the farthest villages of Yrraya in the + province of Cagayan + + +Not only in that mission of Zambales did the province labor in +that time, but also in another of not less fruit in the ends and +confines of Cagayan. There were formerly four villages there, namely, +Batavag, Pilitan, Bolo, and Abuatan. They comprised about two thousand +houses. Those villages in the seventh year of their foundation, when +although many of their inhabitants were heathens, notwithstanding +that more of them were already Christians, were abandoned on the day +of the Ascension of the Lord in the year 1615, by their dwellers, who +retired into the interior, deceived by their aniteras or priestesses, +who did not look with favor upon their Christianity, because of the +profit that they lost thereby in their sacrifices and diabolical +functions. And so much were those priestesses able to say to induce +them to make that retirement, that at last they resolved to do it, +apostatizing from the faith which they had received, as is mentioned +in the first part of this history, book 2, chapter 3. [7] That +apostasy caused great pain, especially to the fathers of Cagayan, +who had charge of those four villages which they had founded amid +severe labors, drawing their inhabitants from heathenism and luring +them to the faith of Christ. When they saw now that all that they +had obtained by their labor in many years was lost in one single day, +they were caused great pain and disconsolation, and they saw that the +fruit of their labors had been ill obtained. Therefore those fathers +made a few efforts on various occasions to reduce those Indians to +a settlement, but they obtained from them no further fruit than the +obtaining of a few souls whom God had predestined for His glory. But +since the zeal of the religious was directed to much more, namely, +the reduction of all that people, they lost no opportunity for that +enterprise, to solicit it with might and main. + +In the year 1673, when the father commissary, Fray Phelipe Pardo, +was elected provincial of this province, the definitory (as we +remarked above) charged him straitly to strive for new missions +and reductions of heathens to the faith of Christ. Consequently, +the said father provincial going to visit the province of Cagayan, +the religious of that province petitioned him to found that mission +of Yrraya, and the prelate meeting their fervor, sent two religious +to that district, namely, father Fray Pedro Sanchez and father Fray +Geronimo de Ulloa, [8] who played the part of explorers, in order +that by talking and by treating with the apostates, they might sound +their minds and good will, and ascertain whether it was the season +for that harvest so that they might put therein the sickle of the +preaching. The two said religious went thither, and although the +apostates received them well, they could not obtain what they were +after by entreaty, namely, that they should reduce themselves to +their former villages. For those people were prevented beforehand by +the Indians of the village of Cabagan, who induced them, for their +own private interests, not to return to their Christianity. In order, +then, to get them to reestablish the said villages, they were prevented +from trading with the heathen, which was a source of great profit and +gain to them, and at the same time those of Cabagan remained more +in the interior of the province, without having so easy a place of +retreat open in time of any insurrection. Just as in the wars with +Portugal, some did not wish that country to be conquered, so that they +might have an easy refuge in the time of any trouble, so also, those +Indians of Cabagan, although Christians, induced the heathens not to +become Christians, and pointed out to them the burden of the tribute, +the polos, the personal services, and other penalties and troubles +which the Christians feel when they are settled. What passes in this +country is incredible, for on one and the same foundation, namely, +greed, opposing results are built. Many Chinese heathens live here, +and very rarely does one see one of them who dies without baptism, not +only because of the inducements of our religious, who have charge of +that mission, but also because when any of those heathens falls sick, +all his relatives, even the pagans, unite in persuading him to become +a Christian, not for any zeal which they have for the faith, for they +remain in their paganism, but for fear lest, if they die heathens, +their property might suffer some loss, as has been established in +practice according to law or custom. On the contrary, it happens among +the Indians, that the Christians of the villages near the heathens +persuade them not to become Christians, in order that they might not +lose thereby their commerce and trade, in which is placed their gain +and interest. And it is not to be wondered at that the Indians do so, +since they are new and recent Christians; for there are Europeans +who oppose the missions greatly, for their own interest. Whatever the +religious effect by their efforts is destroyed easily by an alcalde or +a commandant for his own private conveniences. This has always been, +and is, the cause, as abovesaid, of there being so much infidelity in +these islands. In fine, the two religious whom the provincial sent, +returned without it having been possible for them to obtain anything +of substance, as the apostates were very obstinate because of the +inducements of the people of Cabagan. + +In the year 1677, a provincial chapter was held in this province. Among +other ordinances established in it was the one mentioned above several +times, namely, that the vicars of the villages near the heathens +endeavor most earnestly to reduce them. The venerable father, Fray +Pedro Ximenez, [9] an apostolic man, and one at home in missions, +was elected vicar of Cabagan in that chapter. In addition to the +said ordinance of the chapter, the recently-elected father provincial +charged him with the reduction of those infidels and apostates. The +father provincial going upon his visit, and consulting over the method +of that reduction with the fathers of the province of Cagayan, sent +the said father Fray Pedro Ximenez to the abovesaid site of Yrraya, +assigning him as companion of that undertaking his own associate and +secretary, then father Fray Andres Goncalez, afterward bishop of Nueva +Caceres. But the said father provincial having died in a few days, +the said reduction ceased for the time being. + +In the following year of seventy-eight, a chapter was again held in +this province, and the said father Fray Pedro Ximenez was reelected +vicar of Cabagan. While that chapter was being held, the governor +of these islands, at the petition of the archbishop and the bishop +of Cagayan, as well as of the recently-elected father provincial, +namely, father Fray Balthasar de Santa Cruz, called a council of +war in regard to that reduction. In that council it was resolved +that the said father Fray Pedro Ximenez, selecting five Spaniards, +five Pampangos, and sixteen Indians should proceed to the reduction +of those heathens, summoning them in the name of the king, our +sovereign, by pardon for all their apostasies, murders, and other +crimes that they had committed, and that the apostates who became +reduced, would be excused from paying tribute for three years, and +the heathens for ten years if they were converted. He was ordered to +inform the superior government of the result of his journey so that +the measures necessary and fitting for the said reduction, might be +taken. With that order the said father, Fray Pedro Ximenez, went to +Cagayan. The alcalde-mayor of that province furnished him with all +that was needed for that undertaking, although the father refused +to take any soldiers with him but only the sixteen Indians for his +protection and so that they might act as rowers in the boat. The +father ascended to those paramos and desert places, and by treating +those heathens with kindness and gentleness he reduced many of those +of a district called Ziffun to descend to settle in a place called +Santa Rosa, where the village of Batavag had formerly stood. They did +that immediately without any delay, and without the aid of troops +or escorts. Besides them others offered themselves to the father, +in number about three hundred, but since they lived farther inland, +they needed escorts to accompany them and to take charge of their +effects and household goods. The alcalde-mayor of that province, +Admiral Don Pedro de la Pena, who was zealous for the honor of God and +for the welfare of souls, was of great help with his measures. They +were allowed to select a village where they wished to live. Some +of them went to Cabagan, others to the said village of Santa Rosa, +and others to another new village called Ytugug, which was under the +advocacy of Nuestra Senora de Victoria. Besides them a hundred persons +descended and founded the village of San Fernando, where the ancient +village of Bolo was established. Thus of the four former villages, +three have been reestablished, namely, San Fernando, Santa Rosa, +and Ytugug. + +The devil was envious of that reduction, and accordingly attempted to +destroy it and undo it, making use of the same instruments by which he +had prevented it so many years before. He suggested then to an Indian +of Cabagan to stir up the Indians who had descended, but the latter +not daring to do it himself made use of a heathen called Baladdon. The +latter treacherously killed twelve persons of those who had recently +become settled, and through that deed the reduction was on the point of +being undone and the Indians of returning to the mountains, seeing how +little security there was in the villages. In order to quiet and calm +them the alcalde-mayor took a hand. By means of a troop of soldiers +whom he sent, he avenged those treacherous murders, by killing some +of the accomplices and capturing others, in all seventy in number; +and by looting their possessions and goods, which rightly went to +the troops. By that vengeance which was taken on those traitors, +the new villages were calmed and quieted, and the enemies were too +fearful to attempt another such thing. Father Fray Pedro remained in +the said new villages, instructing and teaching the apostates, and +catechising heathens, in order that they might receive holy baptism. + +All this news was reported in Manila, and was gladly received there +by both the governor of these islands and the ministers of the royal +Audiencia. Taking action for the permanence of that reduction, they +ordered the alcalde of Cagayan to establish a presidio in the province +of Paniqui, which was located inland, so that the said new villages +might be assured, and the disturbances from the enemies cease. The +said presidio was not established, for although the alcalde-mayor of +the said province went by way of Cagayan, the one sent by the governor +did not arrive by way of Ytuy. But the journey of the alcalde-mayor of +Cagayan was not in vain, for father Fray Pedro had formerly treated +with some heathens of a place called Ambayao to descend to the new +villages, and now by the aid of the alcalde and his men father Fray +Pedro went down to the said Indians, with their wives, families, +and household goods, and reaching the village of Ytugug with them, +they were allowed to choose a site in which to live. Some hundred +of them remained there, while the others went down to Cabagan, Lalo, +Yguig, Fotol, and to other villages. + +When the matter was at the height of its success, the devil managed +to put forth all his efforts in order to cause all the said reduction +to cease. He so overturned affairs that the very ones charged with +the movement, petitioned most earnestly that an end be put to it, +relying on some opinions apparently correct, but of little profit +to the mission. Hence father Fray Pedro was ordered to cease to +bring heathens to settle if troops and escorts were needed for that +purpose. The religious obeyed that new order and took care only to +instruct those who had been reduced, and did not attempt to make +further conquests with the aid of troops or escorts. But alone, +without troops or noise, people kept descending those mountains, and +many of them summoned him to go to get them. But since he was ordered +not to take troops, with only the Indians of the new villages, some +of whom were neophytes and others catechumens, he went through those +deserts and collected many apostates and heathens. On one occasion, +he led one hundred and fifteen persons, and one week afterward +another thirty-five followed from a place called Yobat. They said +to the father: "If you stay in Yobat two days more, a vast number of +people will descend. Do you not hear them calling to you from afar and +inviting you to go to them?" The said father did not understand it so, +but thought on the contrary that they were enemies, and as he had so +few people with him could not trust himself; besides those men whom +he took had enough to do in carrying the children and old and sick +people, and the possessions and household goods of those who descended. + +Amid such glorious enterprises and tasks father Fray Pedro was +employed for seven years, during which he reduced very many apostates, +and baptized innumerable heathens, with whom he founded the three +villages above mentioned, which are still in existence today after a +period of more than sixty years. The other villages of the province +were increased by those who descended from the mountains to live in +them. But when the hopes of reducing all those pagans were greatest, +the devil laid such snares and so many witnesses rose up against the +father that it became necessary for this province to remove him from +that ministry, and to transfer him to another one very distant from +it. There without his rivals or least of all the devil designing it, +God carried him to other reductions, of which an account will be +given in due time. In the meanwhile that mission was taken charge +of by other fathers who were also zealous workers, who made their +raids into those mountains and the districts of the heathens from +time to time, and led many of them by means of their inducements +to descend to live in the settlement; in order that they might +be better taught and instructed in what pertained to the welfare +of their souls, until after the lapse of several years and [until] +all had been disabused of their error, and of the false opinion that +they were laboring under against the innocence of the said religious, +the province again placed him as minister of those new villages, in +order that he might continue the former reduction. By his efforts the +mission was rejuvenated and finally the father ended his days there, +as will be related farther on when treating of his death. + +During these latter years in which this account is written, that +mission has been reestablished with seemingly more success than ever; +for although the attempt has been made several times to reduce all that +paganism, it has been impossible to obtain it until now as the said +heathens live in remote places and are separated from communication +with other provinces. Therefore, they seem almost unconvertible, as the +missionaries could not live among them without notable discomfort, +lack of health, and even not without danger to their lives. For +on eight or more occasions that the religious have entered those +mountains for the purpose of reducing the heathens who live in them, +sometimes escorted by soldiers, and at other times without that aid, +in all of them, they have experienced lack of health and death of the +missionaries and even of the soldiers who accompanied them. Hence, +the reduction of all that paganism was deemed impracticable. But now +during these latter years, the earnest solicitude of the prelates +has made that land communicable by opening through it a road from +the province of Pangasinan to that of Cagayan. Although very heavy +expenses have been incurred in this, this province considers those +expenses as excellently employed, since from them has followed the +conquering of the impenetrability of that land, the thing that rendered +the said reduction most difficult. That difficulty having been thus +removed, there has been no difficulty in the missionaries living and +dwelling there permanently, as at present some religious are doing, +occupied in the conversion of those heathens. Many of the latter are +now baptized and are founding many new villages which make a good +province distinct from those of Pangasinan and Cagayan; and it is +hoped that there will be a very plentiful harvest, according to the +good condition of the crops which are now apparently ripe and only +need the workers from Europa to gather the fruit of our labors. + + + + +CHAPTER XXXIV + + An intermediary congregation is celebrated in this province; notice + of the mission of Vangag and of an Indian woman of especial merit. + + +[An intermediary chapter is held at Manila in May, 1680, at which +notice is given of the entrance of the Dominicans into Zambales. The +following houses of that province are accepted: Santiago of Bolinao; +San Andres of Masinloc; Nuestra Senora de el Rosario, of Marivelez; +Nuestra Senora de el Sagrario, of Nuevo Toledo; Nuestra Senora de la +Soledad, of Paynaven; Nuestro Padre Santo Domingo, of Alalang; Santa +Rosa, of Baubuen. Ten religious are assigned to them. The house of San +Thelmo, of Apparri, located at the port of the province of Cagayan, +is also accepted. "The vicar of the house of Binmaley was given a +vote in the provincial chapters, and the vicar of the island of the +Babuyanes was given a vote in the intermediary assemblies."] + +One of the missions which flourished with great fruit in this +province during that time was the mission of Palavig, which is the +mission now called Vangac. This is a mission on the coast of Cagayan +near the mountains of Paranan which end at the cape called Engano +[i.e., deceit]. The land of this island becomes more lofty as it +approaches nearer the north. That mission is composed of Visayan +Indians of the opposite coast of that province, who fleeing from the +village of Paranan and from other villages, inhabit those inaccessible +mountains, where they are safe because of the inaccessibility of those +ridges. Among them are some Christian apostates and many heathens who +were born in the mountains. On the brow of those mountains that mission +was founded in the year 1653 by the earnest and laborious efforts of +the venerable father, Fray Juan Uguet, under the advocacy of St. Thomas +of Aquinas. And when the mission was in a good condition, and there +were many recently-baptized people in it, and others reconciled from +their apostasy, they were frightened by the Indians of the village of +Buguey, and they consequently returned immediately to the mountain, and +the mission was abandoned and destroyed, and all the toil of the father +came to nought through the persuasions of those bad citizens. It was +God's will to have them reunite at the same site of Palavig, through +the inducements of some zealous missionaries, but they afterward left +it again because of the annoyances which they suffered annually from +a commandant who goes to that district to watch for the ship from +Acapulco. Under that pretext he usually causes considerable vexation +to the Indians of the village of Buguey, and much more to those of +the mission as they are naturally a very pusillanimous race. Hence, +that mission has suffered its ups and its downs, for however much the +fathers labored in it, the inhabitants of Buguey by their persuasions, +and that commandant by his bad treatment, destroyed their labors. It +is now about twenty-five years since they returned to settle on a creek +called Bavag under the advocacy of St. Michael, who among other saints +fell to their lot. Thence they moved to Vangag, in order to draw those +people from the mountain whence they had gone. For the same reason, +they were moved on another occasion to a site called Dao, which is the +site where they still live, although still under the title of Vangag. + +[Salazar relates the steadfastness of a native girl at the above +mission, who was of considerable use to the missionaries. Two fathers +while on an expedition concerned with the mission, are carried across +a river by Negritos, of which race Salazar says:] + +Those blacks of those mountains are very barbarous and ferocious, +above all the other inhabitants of Cagayan.... Those black men of +the mountain flee from the water even more than from fire; for every +night in order to go to sleep, they make a fire in the open, and sleep +on the cinders or hot ashes, but they will never bathe or wash, in +order not to get wet, although they stand so greatly in need of it, +and bathing is a common and daily thing among the other natives of +this country. [10] + +[The Negritos' hatred of bathing makes our author imagine that those +who carried the fathers across the river are spirits sent by God to +aid His chosen ones in their trouble. The chapter ends with an account +of a pious Indian woman who dies in Abucay. Following this chapter, +the missions of the Asiatic mainland and the Pardo troubles and +controversy are discussed in chapters xxxv-xlviii; and the lives and +deaths of various Dominicans in chapters xlix-lxii, of which chapters +l-lv treat of Fray Domingo Perez (see VOL. XXXIX, pp. 149-275).] + + + + +CHAPTER LXIII + + A new band of religious arrives in the province, one of whom dies + at sea + + +[More than two hundred religious went to the Philippines in 1684, as +recruits for the orders of St. Francis, St. Augustine (both calced and +discalced), and St. Dominic. Those for the last-named order number +forty-nine, "which is the most abundant succor which has reached +this province since its foundation." [11] Those missionaries are +as follows:] + +The said father, Fray Jacinto Jorva, son of the convent of Santa +Catharina Martyr, of Barcelona. + +Father Fray Francisco Miranda, of the convent of San Pablo, of +Valladolid, and collegiate of San Gregorio of the same city. + +Father Fray Pedro Mexorada, of the convent of San Estevan, of +Salamanca. + +Father Fray Diego Pinero, of the province of Andalucia. + +Father Fray Diego Velez, of the province of Espana. + +Father Fray Juan Truxillo, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Xerez. + +Father Fray Miguel de la Villa, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Sevilla. + +Father Fray Sebastian de el Castillo, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Francisco Marquez, of the convent of San Pablo, of Cordova. + +Father Fray Thomas Croquer, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Xerez. + +Father Fray Thomas de Gurruchategui, of the convent of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Antonio Beriain, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Victoria. + +Father Fray Joseph Beltroli. + +Father Fray Jacobo de el Munt. + +Father Fray Juan de Soto, of the convent of San Pablo, of Palencia. + +Father Fray Pedro Martin. + +Father Fray Diego Casanueva. + +Father Fray Gaspar Carrasco. + +Father Fray Manuel Ramos, of the convent of San Estevan, of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Miguel de San Raymundo. + +Father Fray Raymundo de Santa Rosa. + +Father Fray Sebastian Bordas, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Mexico. + +Father Fray Juan de Abenojar. + +Father Fray Diego Vilches, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Father Fray Antonio de Santo Thomas, a Pole. + +Father Fray Francisco de la Vega. + +Father Fray Nicolas de el Olmo, of the convent of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Francisco Morales, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Gabriel Serrano, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Santiago de Monteagudo, of the convent of Santiago, +of Galicia. + +Father Fray Francisco Ruiz. + +Father Fray Julian de la Cruz. + +Father Fray Juan de la Barrera. + +Father Fray Joseph Plana, of the convent of Xirona. + +Father Fray Juan de la Nava, of the convent of San Pablo, of Cordova. + +Father Fray Juan Romero, of the convent of San Gines, of Talavera. + +Father Fray Francisco Gomez, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Avila. + +Father Fray Thomas Escat, of the convent of Santa Catharina Martyr, +of Barcelona. + +Father Fray Diego Arriola. + +Father Fray Blas Iglesias, of the convent of San Vicente, of Plasencia. + +Father Fray Miguel Matos, of the convent of Nuestra Senora de la +Candelaria, of the Canary Islands. + +Fray Fernando Ybanez, deacon. + +Fray Thomas de Plasencia, acolyte. + +And six lay-brethren, who are the following: + +Fray Francisco Tostado, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Fray Manuel Santos, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Segovia. + +Fray Juan Ruiz, of the convent of Santa Cruz, of Villaescusa. + +Fray Thomas Gomez. + +Fray Manuel Goncales. + +And Fray Lucas de el Moro, of the convent of Nuestra Senora, of Atocha. + +[To this band must be added the name of Fray Juan Marcort, son of the +convent of Xirona, who died at sea after the vessel had left the port +of Acapulco.] + +[Chapter lxiv treats of an English pirate (Dampier) who cruises among +the Babuyanes, and defiles a church of the Dominicans. Chapter lxv, +the last of the first book, reviews the life of Fray Antonio Calderon, +who dies while provincial of his order. Chapter i, of the second book, +records the election as provincial of Fray Bartholome Marron.] + + + + +CHAPTER II + + Of the reduction of the Mandayas Indians to our holy faith + + +[Father Pedro Ximenez, who had labored for six years in the mission of +Irraya, being compelled to leave that place because of slanderous +reports, is sent in 1684 to the village of Fotol, on the border +of the Mandaya country in the central part of Luzon. The needs +that he finds there will not allow him to take the rest that +he has planned after his active and laborious campaign against +infidelity in Irraya, and he takes up his work in the new mission +with undiminished zeal. The people of Fotol he finds in the midst +of famine, for the fierce Mandayas [12] of the uplands will not +allow them to cultivate their fields. The father resolves upon +the reduction of the Mandayas. He begins by writing letters to an +influential apostate who is living in the mountain region, and +those letters so stir up the conscience and memory of that man +that he resumes the faith which he had abandoned, and is later +of great service to the father, and lives in Christian humility +until his death which occurs within a short time. Not without +hindrances from the evil one, however, are the efforts of the +gospel worker. That enemy of mankind causes an inhabitant of the +village of Nabayugan to murder another heathen, whereupon all is +confusion and the breathing forth of threats. The father learning +that that murder may be atoned for by two ways, namely, by fighting +or by a fine, promises to pay for it himself in the interests of +peace. Through his native ambassadors he sends a present of shirts, +salt, needles, combs, and tibors, to the aggrieved faction. Won by +such generous kindness, the ambassadors are treated most cordially, +and a favorable answer sent to the father, and they promise to +descend the mountain to meet him near Capinatan. The energetic +priest immediately sets out, but the devil ever watchful in the +interests of his evil trade, manages to upset the boat in which the +father is journeying on the river at the hour of midnight. However, +nothing but a wetting and considerable discomfort is the result, +and next day Fray Pedro meets the heathens. After a stay with +them of two days, the father returns accompanied by two chiefs +and four others of the heathens, a not slight undertaking on +the part of those timid people, as they are in constant fear +of treachery. They return to the mountains after short visits +to the villages of Capinatan and Affulug, accompanied by some +of the inhabitants of the former village. Among their people +they relate the good treatment which they have received from +the father, "as well as from the commandant of the fort, who +really aided considerably in that reduction by his affability, +kindness, and good treatment. If the other commandants of the +forts near the heathens carried themselves in that manner, they +could gather more fruit than the fathers for their conversion and +reduction. But the pity is that most of them not only do not aid, +but even offer opposition on this point, and think only of their +profit and interests." Once more the devil endeavors to destroy the +peace which seems about to spread throughout the district. One of +three heathens, who go down to the village of Malaueg, is killed +by the inhabitants of that place, and the other two are seized +and sent to the commandant of Nueva Segovia. To their surprise +that commandant, instead of praising them for their vigilance, +seizes the captors and frees the captives, the latter upon the +supplication of the father, being sent to him and returned to +their people. Other troubles are also satisfactorily settled +through the agency of Fray Pedro. At his invitation twenty-two +of the heathens accompany him to Apparri, where the alcalde-mayor +confers on them titles and honors, thus increasing the favorable +opinion of the Mandayas. The village of Calatug still proves +an obstacle to the general peace, for they are hostile to the +Mandayas, and have declared that if the latter become reduced +they will attack and kill them. The Mandayas who wish to become +civilized, after holding a council, resolve to ask aid of the +alcalde-mayor against the village of Calatug, and that aid is +promised them. Meanwhile it is reported that there is a plot to +kill Fray Pedro, and that all the friendliness of the Mandayas is +only treachery. Refusing to believe that, the father determines, +against advice from all sides, and a vigorous protest from the +commandant of the fort at Capinatan, to ascend the mountains in +company with only one Mandaya and his daughter, and the necessary +rowers, eight in number. His confidence is well answered by +the joyful reception accorded him by the Mandayas, among whom +he remains for about a fortnight. The following September, in +conformity with his promise he again ascends the mountains, and at +that time a church is built which is dedicated to Nuestra Senora +de la Pena de Francia. In 1686 that church numbers more than one +thousand three hundred converts and apostates who have come back to +the faith. The number of converts in that mission is opportunely +increased by an epidemic of smallpox, when the mercy of God is +seen in many, both those who die and those who recover. In 1687 +the growth of the work causes the chapter held that year to assign +Fray Pedro two associates, and in 1688 he is made an independent +missionary and given one other associate. That increase enables +him to found another village in a district less mountainous and +hence less difficult to administer, and soon there is a Christian +population of over five hundred there. But the father falling +ill, and finding it necessary to retire, the people of Calatug, +still hostile to the Mandayas, assault the village, and all but +one hundred and forty of them are either killed or flee to the +mountains. Them the alcalde-mayor of the province removes to the +village of Camalayugan, and that mission comes to an end.] + +[Chapters iii-ix discuss the lives of various gospel workers, and +Chinese affairs. Chapter x treats of certain miracles that occurred +in the hospital of San Gabriel.] + + + + +CHAPTER XI + + Of the intermediary congregation of the year eighty-eight, and + the houses which were accepted by it. + + +[In 1688 the intermediary chapter held at Manila, accepted the +ministries of San Policarpo of Tabuco and its adjacent ministries of +Santo Thomas and El Rosario; and that of San Bartholome of Anno in +Pangasinan. The first had been assigned to the Dominicans in 1685 +by Felipe Pardo because of the lack of seculars to administer it +and they keep it until the death of that archbishop, when it again +passes into the control of the seculars. Much has been done there +in the meanwhile by the religious entrusted with its administration, +namely, Fray Juan Ybanez de Santo Domingo and two associates. The other +house of San Bartolome was founded for the reduction of the Igorots +and Alaguetes in its neighborhood. With the ones converted from those +peoples and some oldtime Christians from Pangasinan, the village soon +acquires considerable Christian population and a church and convent are +built at the cost of the Dominican province. Since the location of the +mission is poor, and communication with the nearest Dominican houses of +Pangasinan difficult, an intermediary mission is founded midway between +San Bartolome and the other missions, to which is given the name of +San Luis Beltran. In the mission, many are baptized, "especially +of the Alaguetes, who were more docile than the Igorots, although +also many of the latter were converted." That mission lasts more than +twenty years. In 1709 or 1710 "because of disputes that arose between +those of the village and the Igorots, who lived in the mountain, the +latter descended the mountain at night and set fire to the village, +without being perceived." Consequently the village is deserted, +and the father and the inhabitants remove to San Luis Beltran, which +being farther from the mountains is safer. After six years there, a +government decree removes them to Maoacatoacat. Later the mission is +moved to Pao, and finally to Manaoag. But since the natives dislike +to leave the sites where they are settled, and also enjoy a life +of freedom where they are not molested by the tribute, many of the +inhabitants refuse to move at the successive transfers. Falling into +relaxation in consequence, many become infidels, and their number +is increased by others who flee to them to escape the tribute and +the restrictions of religion. In 1732, in response to a petition by +the Dominican provincial, the government again establishes a mission +village in San Luis Beltran. Starting thence, a new mission is opened +on almost the same site of San Bartolome under the name of San Joseph +at a site called Maliongliong for the conversion of the Igorots. As a +result of the efforts put forth there, a new province called Paniqui +is opened up which is in charge of four Dominican religious. Much +fruit is gathered for the faith in that region.] + +[Chapters xii-xxi treat of the lives of various missionaries, among +them that of the famous Fray Felipe Pardo.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + + Election as provincial of the father commissary, Fray Christoval + Pedroche, and founding of the mission of Tuga. + + +[The above father is elected provincial in 1690, after his return from +exile to Nueva Espana, on account of the Pardo troubles. During his +term there is considerable activity among the Chinese missions, those +of Batanes, and that of Tuga. This last mission is the outcome of the +work of father Fray Juan Yniguez, [13] who is entrusted in 1688 "with +the conversion of the Indians of Mananig and the other neighboring +nations who inhabited the rough mountains near the village of Tuao +in the province of Cagayan, on the western side of the said village; +and extend north and south for many leguas. At the same time the said +father was charged to learn the language peculiar to that country +of Ytabes, [14] and compile a grammar and lexicon in it.... In the +short space of six months, he learned the language of the Ytabes, and +reduced it to a very detailed grammar.... In the same time he founded +a new village in the mission in the very lands of the heathens about +six leguas south of the village of Tuao, on a plateau below the creek +of Tuga, whence that mission took its name, which it keeps even in +our times." The church built there is dedicated to St. Joseph, and +mass said on the second of February, 1689. Notwithstanding the many +oppositions offered to the new mission, it grows and prospers. At the +end of eight years, the mission is moved to a more pleasant site two +leagues nearer Tuao, and although it receives the name of Tuga there, +it is sometimes called San Joseph de Bambang, from a mountain called +Bambang. In 1710, lack of friars causes the abandonment of Tuga as an +active mission, and it becomes a visita of Tuao. That epoch marks its +decline, and in 1715, after many have fled to the mountains where they +have resumed their pagan life, the remaining Christians are transferred +to Tuao. "After the year 1718 the whole province of Cagayan rose in +revolt [15], and that disturbance began especially in that district +of Ytabes where the said village of Tuao is located. Thereupon the +new Christians of the mission who had assembled in that village, +returned to their former sites and mountains, and apostatized from the +faith which they had received." At the close of that insurrection, +the Dominicans attempt to regain the ground that they had lost. In +1722 a friar is assigned to that mission to regain the apostates and +work for new conversions among the heathens. Both objects are largely +fulfilled. In 1731, the missionary established there, Fernando de +Lara, moves the site of the mission still nearer to Tuao because of +the greater conveniences. The new site which is maintained is called +Orac, although it is still called by the former name of Tuga.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + + Foundation of the mission of Batanes; death of Fray Matheo + Goncalez, and Fray Juan Rois in those islands. + + +[At the chapter meeting of 1680, Father Matheo Goncalez [16] is chosen +vicar of the Babuyanes Islands which lie north of the province of +Cagayan. His work there is successful and he reduces many to the faith, +those who are baptized moving to the chief village where the church +and convent are located. Extending his labors to the farthest of the +Babuyanes Islands, the father arrives there at the time when a volcano +is filling its natives with terror. Taking advantage of the situation, +he so adds to their terror by his preaching that both apostates +(of whom many have gone to that island) and heathen resolve to leave +the island and go to Cagayan with the father. Leaving en masse they +are taken to Cagayan and form a new village on the seacoast between +the two villages of Yguig and Nassiping. That village is however +suppressed later by order of the government, and its inhabitants +return to the Babuyanes. Another village called Amulung is stationed +there in 1733 which is formed of Indians from other villages, and a +church and convent established there. Casting their eyes to the three +Batanes Islands north of the Babuyanes, [17] and thirty leagues from +Cagayan, the Dominicans plan for their spiritual conquest; but not +until the year 1686 can anything be done. In that year Fray Matheo +Goncalez is again appointed vicar of the Babuyanes, and given Fray +Diego Pinero [18] as associate. They visit the Batanes with the object +of exploring them and learning the language. The islands appear ripe +for the harvest but more laborers are needed. Consequently, as it is +the time for the intermediary chapter the vicar returns to Cagayan +for help, leaving Fray Diego Pinero alone. One other worker, Fray +Juan de Rois is assigned to the field. But scarcely have the three +fathers begun their labors when sickness causes the death of the +father vicar and his latest associate, whereupon Fray Diego Pinero, +notwithstanding the murmurs of the natives, returns to Cagayan to seek +more aid. But no more religious can be spared just then for there is +a great lack of them for even the settled missions. Not for thirty +years later (1718) is another attempt made in the Batanes, when Fray +Juan Bel being appointed vicar of the Babuyanes, visits them. In 1720, +as a consequence to his report, five religious are assigned for the +mission. As the Batanes are not healthful for Europeans, the island of +Calayan [19] midway between the Batanes and the Babuyanes is chosen +as the place of residence for the new mission. In that island as +many as possible of the new converts are removed, and the church and +convent are established there. The king being petitioned bears part +of the expenses of the transferring of the converts to Calayan. The +venture is successful, and at the time of Salazar's writing (1742), +the mission still exists.] + +[Chapters xxiv-xxxiii discuss the lives and work of various +missionaries, and Chinese affairs.] + +[Chapter xxxiv treats of the life of Mother Sebastiana de Santa Maria, +a native woman, who became a member of the tertiary branch of the +Dominican order.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXXV + + Foundation of the mission of Santa Cruz in Cagayan; and the death + of two most virtuous hermits in this province. + + +In the year 1693, the mission of Santa Cruz was established at a place +called Gumpat, near a visita of Malaveg, called Santa Cruz, whence the +mission took its name. It was founded by father Fray Joseph Galfaroso, +[20] or de la Santissima Trinidad, son of the convent of Pamplona, +a man most zealous for the welfare of souls. While vicar of Malaveg, +he, not being satisfied with the administration of the said village, +made various entrances through the neighboring mountains in search of +the heathens who lived in them, in order to lure them to the bosom of +our holy faith. Those mountains are rough and broken, and the heathen +who inhabit them are very brave, and give the Christian villages +much to do with their continual raids and assaults with which they +keep them terrified. Among those heathens of the mountain, a chief +named Don Joseph Bucayu, who was the terror of all those mountains +and of the neighboring villages, was prominent for his valor and +courage, and was feared by all. This man God wished to take as the +instrument for the foundation of that mission, for with the authority +and respect that all had for him, he could attract many to his side, +and taking example from him whom they considered their leader, many +should embrace our holy faith. + +[Through the grace of God, the fierce heart of this chief is softened +and he embraces the faith, and by the force of his example draws many +after him. He becomes the chief pillar of the new mission that is +formed at Santa Cruz. Great success attends that mission until the +year of the insurrection in Cagayan (1718), when that place is also +deserted and its inhabitants take to the mountains. The remainder of +this chapter is concerned with the life and death of Domingo Pinto of +the tertiary branch of the Dominicans, who had lived as a hermit for +twenty-three years; and information concerning a man known as Diego +Peccador (i.e., Sinner), a Spaniard presumably of good blood, who lived +as a hermit close beside the church at San Juan del Monte, for five +or six years, practicing the most austere penances and mortifications, +after which he disappeared and nothing else was heard of him.] + + + + +CHAPTER XXXVI + + Election of the father commissary, Fray Juan de Santo Domingo + [21] as provincial. Mention of the deceased of the records of that + time. The new mission of religious which arrived at the province + that year. + + +[The above-named father is elected provincial in 1694. At that +chapter meeting mention is made of two members of the order who have +passed away--Fray Manuel Trigueros, who dies in China in 1693; and +Sister Mariana Salzedo; of the tertiary branch of the order, a Spanish +woman. In 1694 a band of thirty-eight religious arrives at the islands, +[22] which has been collected in Spain by Fray Francisco Villalba, +who has been exiled from the islands by order of the Audiencia +in consequence of the Pardo troubles. Of the original number of +forty religious in this band two remain in Mexico. The names of the +thirty-eight men are as follows:] + +The father lector, Fray Pedro Munoz, son of the convent of Nuestra +Senora, of Atocha. + +The father lector, Fray Francisco Cantero, son of the convent of San +Pablo, of Ezija. + +Father Fray Vicente de el Riesgo, son of the convent of Leon. + +The father lector, Fray Jayme Mimbela, son of the convent of Preachers +of Zaragoca, and collegiate of the college of San Vicente, of the same +city, who afterward became bishop of Santa Cruz, of the port of Peru, +and later of Truxillo. + +Father Fray Pedro de Santa Theresa, son of the very religious convent +of Nuestra Senora, of Las Caldas. + +Father Fray Fernando Diaz, son of the convent of San Pablo, of +Palencia. + +Father Fray Francisco Goncalez de San Pedro, son of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Juan Cavallero, son of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Joseph Martin, of the convent of San Gines, of Talavera. + +Father Fray Alonso Robles, of the convent of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Alonso Texedor, of the convent of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Francisco Marzan, of the convent of Santo Thomas, of Avila. + +Father Fray Marcos de Arroyuelo, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Burgos. + +Father Fray Juan Ruiz de Tovar, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Oviedo. + +Father Fray Francisco Goncalez, of the convent of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Juan Goncalez, of the same convent. + +Father Fray Fernando de la Motta, of the convent of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Francisco de Escalante, of the convent of San Pedro Martir, +of Toledo. + +Father Fray Andres Lozano, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Father Fray Diego Ballesteros, son of the convent of Toledo. + +Father Fray Manuel de Santa Cruz, of the convent of Avila. + +Father Fray Geronimo Martin, of the convent of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Lorenzo Fernandez, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Father Fray Joseph de el Rosario, of the convent of San Ildephonso +of Zaragoca. + +Father Fray Manuel Ruiz, of the convent of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Pedro Vegas, of the convent of Santo Domingo, of Ocana. + +Father Fray Francisco Lopez, of the convent of Salamanca. + +Father Fray Antonio Ruidiaz, of the convent of Valladolid. + +All the above were already priests. Those who came as choristers are +the following: + +Fray Manuel de Escobedo, deacon, of the convent of Nuestra Senora, +of Atocha. + +Fray Juan de Astudillo, deacon, of the convent of Santo Thomas, +of Madrid. + +Fray Pedro Humanes, deacon, of the convent of San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +Fray Diego Constantino, of the convent of Atocha. + +Fray Martin de Ona y Ocadiz, of the convent of Burgos. + +Fray Diego Liano, of the same convent. + +And Fray Francisco Novarin, an Asturian, son of Santo Domingo, +of Mexico. + +And two religious lay-brothers: the first, Fray Francisco de Toledo, +son of the convent of Guadalaxara; and the second, Fray Vicente de el +Castillo, son of the convent of Burgos. In addition there were two +others, who as above said remained in Mexico with the father vicar, +Fray Francisco Villalba, who could not return to the province because +of his sentence of exile. + +[With that band also comes one Fray Domingo Mezquita, who had first +gone to the Philippines in 1671, but after some years residence there +had returned secretly to Spain. Moved again by the will of God, +he returns to the islands where he dies after some years. Those +missionaries are detained in Mexico for two years waiting for a +ship. Finally a ship is bought at Acapulco in which is sent the +royal situado, the Dominican religious, a mission band of sixty +Recollects, and a few soldiers. After a voyage fraught with danger, +for the ship is old and rotten, the harbor of Cavite is finally reached +June 28, and as soon as all the cargo and passengers are safely off, +it founders. The much-needed missionaries are distributed among the +Philippine and Chinese missions.] + +[Chapters xxxvii and xxxviii treat of the Chinese missions and +the lives and work of certain fathers. Chapter xxxix notes the +celebration of the intermediary chapter of 1696, and treats of +members of the Dominican order who die during this period: namely, +father Fray Diego Vilches, a Montanes native, who takes the habit at +the Sevilla convent; and Dona Antonio de Jesus y Esguerra, a Spanish +woman, and a member of the tertiary branch of the order. Chapters +xl-xliii relate the foundation and progress of the beaterio of Santa +Catharina, of Manila. The disputes between Archbishop Camacho and the +orders (see VOL. XLII, pp. 25-116) and the questions of the friars' +estates, are taken up in chapters xliv-xlvi. The following chapter +records the results of the provincial chapter of April 10, 1698, and +states the condition of both Philippine and Chinese missions. That +chapter accepted the mission of San Luis Beltran (of which mention is +made in an earlier chapter) in Pangasinan. The mission work of that +district results in the intermarriage of Pangasinans and Alaguetes, +and the idiom of Pangasinan becomes the common language. Chapter +xlviii reviews the lives of prominent members of the order who die +in this period: Fray Francisco Sanchez, Fray Francisco de Escalante, +and Sister Jacinta de la Encarnacion, of the beaterio.] + + + + +CHAPTER XLIX + + New reenforcement of religious, which arrived at this province, + and the voyage of two of them to Kun-King. + + +[In 1699 a band of thirty-seven missionaries reaches the province. They +have been collected by Fray Francisco Villalba (his third mission) +who escorts them to Acapulco. [23] Those missionaries are as follows:] + +The father lector, Fray Thomas Tocho, son of the royal convent of +Santo Domingo, of Mallorca. + +The father lector, Fray Francisco de Barrera, son of the convent of +Santa Maria, of Nieva. + +The father preacher, Fray Juan Martinez, son of the convent of San +Pablo, of Burgos. + +The father lector, Fray Juan de Toro, son of the royal convent of +San Pablo, of Sevilla. + +The father lector, Fray Antonio Diaz, son of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Antonio Goncalez Laso, son of the convent of La Puebla +de los Angeles. + +Father Fray Phelipe Fernandez, son of the royal convent of Santa Maria, +of Nieva. + +Father Fray Diego Perez de Matta, son of the royal convent of Santo +Domingo, of Mexico. + +Father Fray Antonio de Argollanes, son of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Oviedo. + +Father Fray Joseph de Rezabal, son of the convent of San Pablo, +of Victoria. + +Father Fray Domingo Salzedo, son of the convent of San Pablo, +of Burgos. + +Father Fray Balthasar de Andueza, son of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Antonio Rodriguez, son of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Ciudad de San-Tiago. + +Father Fray Juan Pinta, of the convent of San Pablo, of Valladolid. + +Father Fray Andres Goncalez, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of San-Tiago. + +Brother Fray Francisco Petite, deacon, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Brother Fray Bartholome Sabuquilla, deacon, of the convent of Santo +Thomas, of Madrid. + +Brother Fray Manuel de Esqueda, deacon, of the convent of Santo +Domingo, of Cadiz. + +Brother Fray Antonio Perez, deacon, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Zamora. + +Brother Fray Mauro Falcon, deacon, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of San-Tiago. + +Brother Fray Antonio Zabala, deacon, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Burgos. + +Brother Fray Juan Crespo, subdeacon, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Brother Fray Francisco Cavallero, subdeacon, of the same convent. + +Brother Fray Francisco Molina, subdeacon, of the same convent. + +Brother Fray Bernardino Membride, subdeacon, of the same convent. + +Brother Fray Gregorio Vigil, acolyte of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Oviedo. + +Brother Fray Juan Matheos, acolyte, of the convent of San Estevan, +of Salamanca. + +Brother Fray Pedro Campuenas, acolyte, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Brother Fray Andres de Lubitero, acolyte, of the convent of San +Estevan, of Salamanca. + +Brother Fray Miguel Velasco, acolyte, of the convent of Santo Domingo, +of Mexico. + +Brother Fray Joseph de Palencia, acolyte, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Brother Fray Joachin de la Torre, acolyte, of the convent of Santo +Domingo, of Oxaca. + +Brother Fray Joseph Barba, lay-brother, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Brother Fray Joseph Barba, lay-brother, of the convent of San +Ildephonso, of Zaragoca. + +Brother Fray Domingo Sena, lay-brother, of the convent of San Pablo, +of Valladolid. + +Brother Fray Martin de San Joseph, lay-brother, of the convent +of Burgos. + +Brother Fray Joseph Pina, lay-brother, of the convent of Burgos. + +Besides these thirty-seven religious, came another, a Genoan, who +was sent by the Propaganda, one Fray Thomas Sextri, of the Dominican +convent of Turin. [The remainder of the chapter is occupied with the +relation of the voyage to Tun-King by two of the above religious.] + +[Chapter l mentions the intermediary chapter of May 1, 1700, and the +state of the Philippine and other missions of the order. In Cagayan +the missions of Zifun and those to the Mandayas are in a flourishing +condition. Through the efforts of Fray Francisco de la Vega, [24] +the earnest work of Fray Pedro Ximenez is carried on, and the fierce +dwellers of the village of Calatug are reduced to the faith. The +assembly earnestly charges the missionary at Fotol to bend all his +energies to the conversion of the Mandayas. Fray Vicente de el Riesgo +[25] is appointed to the mission of Ytugug, and he is charged with +the reduction of Yogat and Paniqui; and well does he obey those +injunctions. Not only does he reduce again the villages of Ytugug, +Santa Rosa, and San Fernando, but also villages of Cagayan. "Besides +that mission of Ytugug or Paniqui, another harvest field, no less +abundant, had been discovered, in the very center of those mountains, +on the side looking toward the east, in an extensive field called +Zifun. There the venerable father, Fray Geronimo Ulloa, vicar of the +village of Tuguegarao, filled with zeal for the reduction of those +infidels, had made various raids in those mountains. That father was +very fond of missions and had labored in others with zeal and fervor, +and although he was now very old, and had in his charge so large a +village as Tuguegarao, and was very far from those mountains, yet +he was unable to restrain his zeal, and his desire for the welfare +of souls. Hence burning with the ardor of youth, as soon as he was +freed from the obstacles of the necessary occupations of his ministry, +he entered those mountains alone in search of those straying souls +in order to lure them to the flock of Christ, without stopping to +consider dangers or discomforts in order that he might gain some souls +for heaven." So great is his success, and so many the souls that he +reduces that the intermediary chapter gives him an associate, in order +that the father may give all of his time to the mission work of Zifun.] + +[Chapters li-lvii (which complete the volume) treat of the lives of +various fathers and sisters of the order. In the biographical notices +of these chapters, as well as in all the other biographical chapters +of this volume, there is necessarily much on the mission work of the +Dominicans; but the method of treatment is almost entirely from the +standpoint of the individual, and offers no view of the mission work +as a whole, or at least nothing new is added to the broader aspects +of the work. Consequently, we do not present anything from those +chapters in this survey of Dominican missions.] + + + + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA + + +The documents contained in the present volume are from the following +sources: + +1. Dominican missions, 1670-1700.--From Salazar's Historia de el +Santissimo Rosario; (from a copy of original edition (Manila, 1742), +in possession of Edward E. Ayer, Chicago.) + +2. Preliminary note.--Editorial. + +3. Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos.--From Ortiz's Practica +del Ministerio, ca., 1731, chapter i, Sec.4, pp. 11-15 (from Retana's +edition of Zuniga's Estadismo, Madrid, 1893, ii, pp. *14-*21). + +4. The People of the Philippines.--From Zuniga's Historia de las +Islas Philipinas (Sampaloc, 1803), ii, chapter ii, pp. 19-38; from +a copy of the original edition belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago. + +5. Jolo and the Sulus.--From Wilkes's Narrative of the United States +Exploring Expedition (Philadelphia, 1844), v, pp. 343-390; from a +copy belonging to the Wisconsin Historical Society. + +6. Letter from Father Quirico More.--From Cartas de los PP. de +la Compania de Jesus (Manila, 1887), vii, pp. 76-91; from a copy +belonging to Edward E. Ayer, Chicago. + +7. Letter from Father Pedro Rosell.--Ut supra, pp. 198-216. + +8. Letters from Father Mateo Gisbert.--Ut supra, pp. 117-128, 137-145. + +9. Letter from Father Pablo Cavalleria.--Ut supra, pp. 27-35. + +10. Extract from a letter from Father Pablo Pastells.--Ut supra, +pp. 336-349. + +11. Letter from Father Jose Maria Clotet.--From Cartas de los PP. de +la Compania de Jesus (Manila, 1891), ix, pp. 170-184; from a copy in +possession of the Library of Congress. + +12. Present beliefs and superstitions in Luzon.--From the December +9, 1905 supplement of El Renacimiento; from a copy loaned by James +A. LeRoy. + + + + + + +APPENDIX: SOME LATER ETHNOLOGICAL FEATURES OF THE PHILIPPINES + + + Preliminary note. + Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos. Tomas Ortiz, O.S.A., + ca., 1731. + The people of the Philippines. Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga, O.S.A., + 1803. + Jolo and the Sulus. Charles Wilkes, U.S.N., 1844. + Letter from Father Quirico More. Davao, January 20, 1885. + Letter from Father Pedro Rosell. Caraga, April 17, 1885. + Letters from Father Mateo Gisbert. Davao, January 4, February 8, + February 20, July 26, December 24, 1886. + Letter from Father Pablo Cavalleria. Isabela de Basilan, December + 31, 1886. + Extract from a letter by Father Pablo Pastells. Manila, + April 20, 1887. + Letter from Father Jose Maria Clotet. Talisayan, May 11, 1889. + Present beliefs and superstitions in Luzon. Jose Nunez, Manila, + December 6, 1905. + + +Sources: The material for this appendix is obtained as follows: No. 1, +editorial note. No. 2, from extracts given by W. E. Retana, in his +edition of Zuniga's Estadismo de las Islas Filipinas (Madrid, 1893), +ii, pp. *14-*21, of Tomas Ortiz's Practica del Ministerio (chapter i, +Sec.4, pp. 11-15), a MS. conserved in the library of Eduardo Navarro, +O.S.A., at Valladolid. No. 3, from Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga's +Historia de las Islas Philipinas (Sampaloc, 1803), ii, chapter ii, +pp. 19-38, from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer. No. 4, from +Charles Wilkes's Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition +(Philadelphia, 1844), v, pp. 343-390 (mainly verbatim), from a copy +belonging to the Wisconsin Historical Society. Nos. 5, 6, 7, 8, and +9, from Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jesus (Manila, 1887), +vii, pp. 76-91, 198-216, 117-128 and 137-145, 27-35, and 336-349, +respectively, from a copy belonging to Edward E. Ayer. No. 10, +from Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jesus (Manila, 1891), ix, +pp. 170-184, from a copy belonging to the Library of Congress. No. 11, +from a copy of the supplement of the Manila periodical El Renacimiento, +of the issue of December 9, 1905. + + +Translations and Compilations: These are made by James A. Robertson. + + + + + + +PRELIMINARY NOTE + + +In this series, ethnological material will be found in the following +volumes of those hitherto published: II, pp. 68-72, 109-113, +122, 125, 126, 197-199, 201, 202; III, pp. 34, 54-61, 74, 97, +141-172, 181, 197-204, 286-288, 297, 298; IV, pp. 26, 27, 67-70, +98-101, 105; V, pp. 34-187 (Loarca's Relation); VI, pp. 140, 141, +145-147; VII, pp. 173-196 (Plasencia's Customs of the Tagalogs); +XII, pp. 212, 213, 217-220, 235-244, 249-251, 261-275, 293-296, +302-310; XIII, pp. 56-58, 200-203 (Chirino's Relation); XIV, +pp. 156-159, 304, 305, 307; XVI, pp. 69-135 (Morga's Relation), +221-223, 235, 321-329 (Customs of the Pampangos); XXIX, pp. 281-301; +XXX, pp. 190-193; XXXIII, and part of XXXIV (Pigafetta's Relation); +XXXIV, pp. 185-191, 204, 215, 225, 226, 278, 279, 292-294, 318-321, +376-380, 386-388; XL, Appendix. Ethnological material is included +in the following books, which we are unable to reproduce because of +the limits of space, although we have used some of them extensively +for annotation. Delgado's Historia (Manila, 1893; though written +about 1754) part i, book iii, pp. 249-392, contains a portion of San +Agustin's famous letter (see VOL. XL, pp. 187-295) and whose comments +on which we published in part; also in appendix added by the editor, +a portion of Loarca's Relation. Le Gentil's Voyage (Paris, 1781), as +follows: chap. i, art. ix, Of the genius of the inhabitants of the +Philippines, and of the peculiar punishments, which the religious +inflict on women who do not attend mass on days of observance, +pp. 59-63 (following in great part the account of San Antonio--see +VOL. XXVIII, Appendix--); art. x, Of the language and characters +used by the natives of the Philippines, pp. 63-65; art. xi, Of some +manners and customs of the Indians of the Philippines and of their +marriages, pp. 66-74. Concepcion's Historia (Sampaloc, 1788-1792), +i, chap. i, nos. 7-21, pp. 10-32; part 2, chap. i, nos. 309-320; +iii, chap. ii, nos. 5, 6, pp. 27-37, nos. 10-13, pp. 46-55; v, +chap. ii, no. 1, pp. 20-23. Mas's Informe de las islas filipinas +(Madrid, 1843): i, no. 1, Origen de los habitantes de la Oceania; +no. 2, Estado de los Filipinos a la llegada de los Espanoles (contains +nothing special); no. 5, Poblacion (containing a great portion of San +Agustin's letter, with commentary, most of which is incorporated in +our VOL. XL). Mallat's Les Philippines (Paris, 1846): i, chap. iii, +pp. 43-74, Condition of the country before the discovery; ii, chap. xx, +pp. 89-129, Physical characteristics and customs of the savage races; +chap. xxii, pp. 131-145, Customs of the children of the country, +of the mestizos and the Chinese. Jagor's Reisen in den Philippinen +(Berlin, 1873): chap. xiv, pp. 118-132, Manners and customs of the +Bicols; chap. xvii, pp. 161-175, The Isarog and its inhabitants; +chap. xxii, pp. 227-238, Manners and customs of the Visayans. In +the Ethnological Society Transactions, new series, vol. ii, session +1869-70 (London, 1870), appears (pp. 170-175), an article by Jagor, +entitled "On the natives of Naga, in Luzon." Cartas de los PP. de +la Compania de Jesus de la mision de Filipinas, eight vols. (Manila, +1879-1891). Of this series Pardo de Tavera says (Biblioteca filipina, +p. 87): "It is an important publication, in which is found not only +information concerning the spiritual administration of the missions, +but also remarkable information concerning the geography, history, +ethnography, linguistics, fauna, and flora, etc., of Mindanao, which +is the chief point of the activities of the Society of Jesus." In +the following selections, we have used the volumes for 1887 and +1889. Retana's Archivo (Madrid, 1895), i, no. x, Short notice of +the origin, religion, beliefs, and superstitions of the old Indians +of Bicol by Fray Jose Castano (written expressly for the Archivo, +1895). Algue's Archipielago filipino (Washington, 1900), i, tratado +ii, "Ethnography," pp. 151-238. This is translated in Report of the +Philippine Commission for 1900, iii, paper no. vii, pp. 329-412. It +follows on the whole the beaten lines, and much of it is unreliable. By +far the most valuable material that has yet appeared on ethnology in +the Philippines are the comprehensive reports which have been issued +since American occupation by the Ethnological Survey, of the Department +of the Interior. These have been frequently referred to in this series, +and are as follows: The Bontoc Igorot, by Albert Ernest Jenks (Manila, +1905); ii, part i, Negritos of Zambales, by William Allen Reed (Manila, +1904); ii, parts ii and iii, The Nabaloi Dialect, by Otto Scheerer, and +The Bataks of Palawan, by Edward Y. Miller (Manila, 1905); Relaciones +agustinianas de las razas del norte de Luzon, compiled by father +Fray Angel Perez (Manila, 1904; Spanish edition)--containing among +other things a number of letters written by Augustinian missionaries +of the eighteenth century;--iv, part i, Studies in Moro History, by +Najeeb M. Saleeby, a native Moro (Manila, 1905). With these reports +must be classed History of the population, in Census of Philippines, +i, pp. 411-491, by Dr. David P. Barrows, at the time of its writing +chief of the Bureau of Non-Christian Tribes, but at present (1906) +superintendent of education in Manila. Dr. Barrows's article is +followed by a compilation (pp. 492-531), entitled Characteristics of +Christian tribes; and another (pp. 532-585), entitled Characteristics +of the Non-Christian tribes. + + + + + + +SUPERSTITIONS AND BELIEFS OF THE FILIPINOS + + +[The following interesting account is from the Practica del Ministerio +by Tomas Ortiz, O. S. A., [26] and is translated from W. E. Retana's +edition of Zuniga's Estadismo de las islas Filipinas (Madrid, 1893), +ii, pp. *14-*21. Retana found a copy of this important MS. at the +Augustinian convent at Valladolid in the collection of father Fray +Eduardo Navarro, where it still exists and where we ourselves examined +it not long since. The following selection is from chapter i, section +iv, pp. 11-15.] + +No. 31. Inasmuch as many natives, especially those of the provinces +distant from Manila are much inclined to nonos or genii, to idolatries, +maganitos, superstitions, enchantments, charms, and witchcraft, which +have as great a diversity as have the witches, and therefore they call +them by different names, according to the various duties which they +attribute to them; it is necessary for the father ministers, not only +to preach to them continually, and to argue against, censure, and decry +so pestilent abuses, but they must also be very skilful, solicitous, +and careful in discovering persons infected with that mortal poison, +and to apply to it the necessary remedy. In the confessions, for the +same reason that but seldom will they accuse themselves all possible +efforts ought to be made (without overstepping the boundaries of +prudence) in order to see whether anything may be obtained; and he +who has the good fortune to have any witch confess to him, will bear +himself toward her as the authors teach. They ought also to charge +the natives with their obligation to denounce to the ordinary,... etc. + +No. 32. There are many abuses (or as they say ugales) which the natives +practice against our holy faith and good customs, among others of +which are the following. First, the above-mentioned idolatry of +the nonos. In regard to this it must be noted that the word nono +does not alone signify "grandfather," but that it also is used as +a term of respect to the old men and genii. The Indians comprise +these under the word nono, just as the Chinese do under the word +Espiritus [i. e., "spirits"], and the Romans under the word "Gods," +which other called Lares, Penates, etc. With the above-mentioned +genii or nonos the Indians perform many acts of idolatry frequently, +such as for example, asking permission, relief, and aid from them, +and that they do the people no harm, and that they do not prove +hostile to them, etc. They make such requests on many occasions, +and among others are the following. When they wish to pluck any +flower or fruit from the tree, they ask permission from the nono or +genius to pluck it. When they pass certain fields, rivers, creeks, +or streamlets, large trees, sugar-cane plantations and other places, +they ask permission and good passage from the genii or nonos. When +they are obliged to cut any tree, or not to observe the things or +ceremonies which they imagine to be pleasing to the genii or nonos, +they ask pardon of them, and excuse themselves to those beings by +saying, among many other things, that the father commanded them to do +it, and that they are not willingly lacking in respect to the genii, +or that they do not willingly oppose their will, etc. When they are +taken with the sickness that they call pamave, which they attribute to +the genii or nonos (although they try to conceal this by saying that +the country [has not?] agreed with them) they ask them for health and +offer them food. They do that both on this, and many other occasions, +in the fields, sugar-cane plantations, streamlets, at the foot of +any large tree, more generally some calunpan, [27] and in various +other places. This sort of idolatry is very deeply rooted and of long +standing among the Indians. Consequently, it is very necessary for +the father ministers to be very careful and make great efforts to +extirpate it, and not avoid any labor or work until it is annihilated. + +No. 33. Secondly, the Indians very generally believe that the souls +of the dead return to their houses the third day after their death, +in order to visit the people of it, or to be present at the banquet, +and consequently, to be present at the ceremony of the tibao. They +conceal and hide that by saying that they are assembling in the house +of the deceased in order to recite the rosary for him. If they are told +to do their praying in the church, they refuse to comply because that +is not what they wish to do. Consequently, the minister will prevent +the gathering at the house of the deceased after the burial, and will +not allow the people to ascend into the house under any considerations, +least of all on the third day. On the fourth day, in consequence of +the said ceremony of the tibao, or because of their evil inclination, +they light candles in order to wait for the soul of the deceased. They +spread a mat, on which they scatter ashes, so that the tracks or +footsteps of the soul may be impressed thereon; and by that means +they are able to ascertain whether the soul came or not. They also +set a dish of water at the door, so that when the soul comes it may +wash its feet there. It does not appear that it would be much to say +that those matters of the nonos or genii and the deceased were taken +by the Indians from the Sangleys who are reared with various things +[of belief]. [28] It needs a strong remedy nevertheless. + +No. 34. The tigbalag which some call a ghost and others a goblin, +appears to be the genius or devil, who appears to them in the shape +of a black man, or in the shape of an old man (or as they express it +in the shape of a very small old man), or in the shape of a horse, +or of a monster, etc. That being inspires them with so great fear that +they come to make friendship with him, and surrender their rosaries to +him, and receive from him superstitious things, such as hairs, herbs, +stones, and other things, in order that they may obtain marvelous +things, and that they may be aided by him in certain of their affairs. + +No. 35. The patianac whom some also call a goblin (but it is only +their invention, dream, or imagination) must be the genius or devil +who generally plays with them as also with many others, when losing +the faith, they espouse his cause, become familiar with him, or become +subject to him. They attribute to this being the ill success of births, +and say that in order to harm them and cause their destruction, he +enters or hides in some tree or in any other place near the house +of the woman who is about to give birth, and there they sing like +those who wander about, etc. In order to prevent any harm from the +patianac, the men take their position naked and with their privies +exposed to the air; and arm themselves with shield, catan, lance, +and other arms. In this condition they stand on the ridgepole of +the roof, and also under the house, and in all places they slash and +cut right and left with the catan and make various gestures and set +movements for the same purpose. Others, in order to prevent said harm, +generally move the woman who is about to give birth to another house, +for they say that her house contains a patianac. + +No. 36. Among other things they also attribute to the patianac the +death of children, as well as to the usang. They refer to them in +the following manner. They assert that the bird called tictic is +the pander of the sorcerer called usang. Flying ahead of that being, +the bird shows it the houses where infants are to be born. That being +takes its position on the roof of the neighboring house and thence +extends its tongue in the form of a thread, which it inserts through +the anus of the child and by that means sucks out its entrails and +kills it. Sometimes they say that it appears in the form of a dog, +sometimes of a cat, sometimes of the cockroach which crawls under +the mat, and there accomplishes the abovesaid. In order to avoid that +harm they do certain of the above things. To the patianac travelers +also attribute their straying from or losing their road. In order to +keep the right path, they undress and expose their privies to the air, +and by that observance they say that they make sure of the right road; +for then the patianac is afraid of them and cannot lead them astray. + +No. 37. The bongsol they sometimes assert to be various durojones +which are caused by the sorcerer ganay, and which run all through the +body of the bewitched, who generally remains some moments as if dead +or in a faint, and at other times as though mad or raving from the +sight of the ganay who appears to them in various shapes. In order +to cure this sickness or enchantment, they summon another sorcerer, +and he after the incantations or efforts, which will be told later, +generally leaves the patient as he was before. Sometimes they say +that that sickness appears to be natural or a stomach ache caused by +the obstructions or durojones which grow in the stomach or in the +patient's side or by shivers which move from one place to another, +and from which the women of this country generally suffer. But when +they are unable to cure the pain with the promptness that they desire, +they generally say, especially the physicians, that the said sickness +is bongsol, that is enchantment, and that it can be cured only by the +one who is of the faculty, that is by one who is a sorcerer. They then +bring a sorcerer, who performs the things that pertain to his faculty, +and summons the first sorcerer who they say caused that sorcery. If +the sickness is not lessened, the sorcerer finishes his duty by saying +that the said first witch is very far away, and could not hear him; +and consequently, it has happened that he has not been able to cure +the said sickness. In such wise do they leave the sick person with +his pains. + +No. 38. The ceremony or superstition of bilao is ordered for the +discovery thereby of any thief. It is reduced to placing in a bilao, +sieve, or screen, some scissors fastened at the point in the shape +of the cross of St. Andrew, and in them they hang their rosary. Then +they repeat the name of each one of those who are present and who are +assembled for this. If, for example, when the name Pedro is mentioned, +the bilao shakes, they say that Pedro is the thief. They also are +accustomed to light candles to St. Anthony of Padua for the purpose +of discovering the thief of anything [that is stolen]. For this they +kneel down to pray (and perhaps to utter and perform indecent things) +and wait until the flame leans toward any of those about, for instance, +toward Juan, and then they declare that Juan is the thief. It is +very usual for the Indians to carry about them various things in +order that they might obtain marvelous effects: for example, written +formulas, prayers, vitiated or interspersed with words arranged for +their evil intent, herbs, roots, bark, hairs, skin, bones, stones, +etc., so that they may not be killed, or apprehended by justice, +or to obtain wealth, women, or other things. [29] They are also very +much inclined to believe in omens and in unlucky days, in regard to +which they are wont to keep various books of manuscripts which must +be burned for them. + +No. 39. The natives are accustomed to circumcise the boys; and +although they perform the circumcision by slitting the skin of the +penis lengthwise, instead of around, still it appears that that may +be accounted for by the fact that it is inferred that that ceremony +was introduced into Philipinas, by the Moros from Borneo, Mindanao, +or Holo, as was also the word binag, which is used for "baptize," +and to mean "Christian," and the word simba, which appears to mean +"adoration" among them. From this use they transfer it to their temples +and mosques, and the Tagalogs took it not to mean "adoration," but +"church," and afterward used it to mean "mass," which it never could +mean. Not only do they circumcise the males but also the women, girls, +or dalagas, [an operation] which they call sonad. It is reduced to +cutting the organ or opening it up somewhat. However, some of them, +and very reasonably, affirm that that ceremony in them in itself in +both males and females is rather the offspring of lust than that of +Judaism. They are also accustomed to measure or compare the weapons +that they make, for example, measuring the catan by spans and praying +at the same time the "Our Father." If the conclusion of the measuring +is reached at the same time or when they come to the word "forgive us" +they say that they cannot be punished, but that they may kill people, +etc. It appears that the custom has been introduced among women who +have recently brought forth of not going to church until the fortieth +or sixtieth day as they say of the purification of their bodies. In +that not only do they fail in the precept to hear mass but they also +perform a Mosaic ceremony. + +No. 40. The Indians are generally corrupted by many errors, and it +would take a long time to mention them. Consequently, the ministers +will be very careful to uproot them, for although it does not cause any +great harm in some because of their ignorance and lack of intelligence, +in others they do cause great harm; for example Angel catutubo, +which literally signifies "that my guardian angel was born with me +or at the same time as I." In order to avoid danger, one should say, +Angel taga tanor, and the same thing in other languages. + +No. 41. Finally, so many are the superstitions, omens, and errors, +that are found among the Indians that it would be very difficult +or impossible to mention them all. The above have been mentioned +so that the father ministers may examine others by them. It is to +be noted that there are sectarians and preachers of various false +sects among the Indians, especially in the distant provinces, either +because they had false sects formerly and have continued them, or +because they took them (and this is more likely) from the Joloans, +Mindanaos, Sangleys, and other heathen nations with whom they are +accustomed to have intercourse. + +No. 42. When the moon is eclipsed, the Indians of various districts +generally go out into the street or into the open fields, with bells, +panastanes, [30] etc. They strike them with great force and violence +in order that they might thereby protect the moon which they say is +being eaten or swallowed by the dragon, tiger, or crocodile. And the +worst thing is that if they wish to say "the eclipse of the moon" +it is very common in Philipinas to use this locution, saying "the +dragon, tiger, or crocodile is swallowing the moon." The Tagalogs +also make use of it and say, Linamon laho bovan. It appears that the +Indians learned all this from the Sangleys of China, where all the +abovesaid is performed and executed to the letter. It is not right to +allow them to retain these deceits of the Chinese, and not to teach +them our customs and truths. All the above contents of this section +is not universal in all parts. Consequently, although all ministers +ought to be careful to ascertain whether they are or are not contained +in their ministries, they ought not to go ahead to censure what they +are not sure of, for that very thing would perhaps teach them what +we are endeavoring to extirpate. + + + + + + +THE PEOPLE OF THE PHILIPPINES + + +[Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga, O. S. A., in his Historia (Sampaloc, +1803), [31] pp. 19-38, devotes one chapter to the inhabitants of the +Philippines. We translate from the copy belonging to the library of +E. E. Ayer.] + + + + +CHAPTER II + +Of the inhabitants whom the Spaniards found in the Philipinas, and +of their language, customs, and religion. + + +Our historians, always inclined to the marvelous, divide the peoples +whom the Spaniards found in the Philipinas into three classes. In their +histories there is not a lack of satyrs, men with tails, and mermen, +and whatever else can cause wonder in human nature. But truly, only two +classes of people are found, namely, those whom we know by the name of +Aetas or Negritos, [32] and the Indians. The Negritos are small, not +so black as those of Guinea, and have kinky hair and flat noses. They +live naked in the mountains, and only cover themselves in front with +the bark of a tree. They live on roots and the deer which they hunt +with arrows in which they are very skilful. They sleep where night +overtakes them. They have no idea of religion, so that they resemble +wild beasts rather than men. The effort has been made to domesticate +and christianize them, and they are not much opposed to it, provided +that they are given food to eat. But if they are ordered to work +to support their family, they return to the mountain although they +have just been baptized. For that reason they are not now baptized +although they agree to it, except some children whom the Indians +or Spaniards generally have in their houses. Even in this case, one +cannot be secure of them for when they grow up they generally return +to the mountains with their fellowcountrymen. Beyond all doubt those +Negritos are the first settlers of these islands, and retired to the +mountains when the Indians came hither. The latter inhabit the coasts, +and formerly the Negritos waged continual war with them, and would +not permit them to cut wood in the mountains unless they paid tribute +to them. Today they have but little power, and yet they are feared; +for whenever any Negrito is killed, or when any one dies suddenly, +another Negrito generally offers himself among his companions and +takes an oath not to return to his own people until he kills three +or four Indians. He does it by lying in ambush in their villages and +by treacherously killing in the mountains him who becomes separated +from his companions. + +Some believe the origin of these Negritos to be that they came from +the negros of Angola, [33] and the reason why they are not so black as +their ancestors consists, they say, in the climate of these Indias +which is more moderate. That might be so, for it is as easy for +him who changes his climate to decrease in blackness during a long +series of generations as it is for him to increase it by living in +an inclement climate. But the flat nose and the use of the dialect +of the same language which the Indians of these islands use, proves +sufficiently that their origin is one and the same with them. The +fact that they are blacker than the Indians, depends only on their +having lived many centuries in the water by night and day, in wind +and sun, and exposed to all the inclemencies of the weather. That +and their lack of government has transferred them to their almost +wild condition in which we see them. + +The Indians whom the Spaniards found here were of average stature, +olive color, or the color of boiled quinces, large eyes, flat noses, +and straight hair. All had some form of government more or less +civilized. They were distinguished by different names, but their +features and customs prove that the origin of all these people is +one and the same, and that they did not compose different races. They +had their own petty rulers, who were generally the most valiant, or +those who had inherited the kingdom from their fathers, if they could +conserve it. Their dominion extended over one or two rude settlements, +or at most was according to the valor of him who ruled. They were +continually at war with the neighboring settlements, and made one +another slaves. From those wars there resulted three classes of +people among them: namely, the chiefs who were the masters of the +settlement; the slaves; and the freemen, who consisted of slaves +or their descendants to whom their masters had given freedom. The +last class are called Timavas even yet, which properly signifies +"freed-man." In some districts Indians are found who are whiter than +others--descendants doubtless of some Chinese or Japanese, who were +shipwrecked on these coasts, and whom the Indians naturally hospitably +received and with whom they mingled. That is commonly believed in +regard to the Ygorrotes of Ylocos. [34] Their eyes, similar to those +of the Chinese, prove that they mingled with the companions of Limahon +who fled to those mountains when Juan de Salcedo had besieged them +in Pangasinan. + +It is not easy to prove the origin of these peoples but their language +might supply some light. Although the languages spoken by the Indians +are many and diverse, they resemble one another so closely that it +is recognized clearly that they are all dialects of one and the same +tongue, as the Spanish, French, and Italian are of the Latin. The +prepositions and pronouns are almost the same in all of them, the +numerals differ but slightly, many words are common to all, and they +have the same structure. This language, which is one single language, +with different dialects, is spoken from Madagascar to Philipinas +and no one can contradict this. [35] I add that it is spoken in +Nueva Guinea and in all the lands of the south, in the Marianas, +in the islands of San Duisk, in those of Otayti, [36] and in almost +all the islands of the South Sea. In a collection of voyages wherein +are found several dictionaries of the terms which the travelers could +learn in each one of these islands I have seen with wonder that the +pronouns are almost all the same; that in the Tagalogs the numerals +resemble those of any other language of these islands, and most of +the words are the same and have the same meaning as in the Tagalog +language. But the thing which made me believe more in the identity of +these languages was my examination of Don Juan Hovel, an Englishman, +who spoke the dialect of San Duisk with a servant of his who was a +native of those islands. I found that the construction was the same +as that of the languages which are spoken in Philipinas. Consequently, +I had no reason to doubt that all these languages are dialects of one +speech which is the most extensive in the world, and which is spoken +through many thousands of leguas from Madagascar to the islands of +San Duisk, Otayti, and the island of Pasquas [37] which is not six +hundred leguas distant from America; and the fact that the Indians +of Philipinas do not understand the peoples of those islands when +they pass through their lands does not offer any argument against +this supposition, for neither do the Spaniards understand the French, +nor in these islands do those of some provinces understand one another. + +In the same collection of voyages, I found a dictionary of only +five terms which the Spaniards were able to learn in the Patagonian +coast. One of those terms was Balay [38] which signifies "house" in +that language; and with that same word do the Pampangos and Visayans +designate house. It may be a mere coincidence which does not prove +that the languages of various people are identical. But, seeing that +in addition to this the names of South America sound like those of +Philipinas, I tried to find some dictionary of that land. Not finding +one I examined carefully the few words of the language of Chile which +Ercilla has in his Araucana, [39] and I found them sufficiently like +the Tagalog language. The name "Chile" is not strange to this language +where the cormorant is called "cachile." It is also a pronoun which +the Malays apply to the sons of kings. "Chilian," which is a village +of Chile, is a Tagalog composition, in which, adding an "an," we have +a word which signifies "place," and we get "cachilian" which signifies +"place where there are cormorants." Mapocho, the site of the city of +Santiago, is another Tagalog composition that signifies "place." Thus +from pocquiot, a kind of herb, we get mapocquiot, a place where that +plant abounds. Apo is the name given to him who governs, and that +name is applied by these Indians to him who has any authority in the +village. In Chile, words and phrases are reduplicated: as Ytayta, +Biobio, Lemolemo, Colocolo, etc. The same is done in the Tagalog and +thus we say: Ataata, Bilobilo, Lebomlebom, and Colocolo. The other +words are either Tagalog or very similar, and the connection that is +found in so few words in these two languages is [too] great to say +that it is accident, although it is not sufficient so that we can +say that they are dialects of one language. + +If on a comparison of the grammar and dictions of these two languages +it is found that they originate from one and the same tongue, I would +be so bold as to say that the Indians of Philipinas originate from +the Indians of South America, and that the language of the latter is +the parent language of which all the languages of these islands are +dialects. Many will consider this a paradox, for the Malays being +so near it would appear that the Filipinos must have originated from +them, as our authors have generally believed. I cannot deny that these +islands could have been easily settled by the Malays; but how shall +we account for the peopling of the islands of Palaos and Marianas +which are more than three hundred leguas distant? Where shall we get +at those who settled the islands of San Duisk and Otayti, which are +two thousand leguas from Philipinas? All these people have the same +language, the same features, the same customs, and consequently, the +same origin as our Indians. It is impossible that people should go +from Philipinas to people those lands, for the east wind dominates +constantly throughout the torrid zone, and that wind blowing head +on would not permit the ship to sail to those islands. Rather on the +contrary we must believe that the inhabitants of all the islands of +the South Sea came from the Orient with wind astern as we have seen +happen to the Indians of Palaos, [40] who have come to our Philipinas +several times driven by the wind, and the east winds have not allowed +them to return to their land. Let us suppose that if then these islands +were not peopled, those Indians would have been the first settlers. We +do not know whether our Indians by a like accident, have been carried +by the winds to the Oriental islands. On the contrary we believe the +opposite, since at times the best pilots cannot make that navigation, +and return without finding the islands whither they were sailing, +as it is necessary to take a high latitude for that voyage. On this +head we must seek the easiest solution, namely, that the settlers came +from the east from island to island. Consequently, the most eastern +land where the Tagalog language is found must be the country whence +our Indians originate. + +One could well hesitate to assent to this truth, moved by the fact +that the use of writing in the manner employed by the Malays was found +established among these Indians, but it could very well happen that +they might derive their origin from other nations and learn to write +from the Malays, who would learn that science from the continent of +India. The method of writing was by forming the lines from top to +bottom, and beginning at the left and finishing at the right as did +the Hebrews and Chinese. Their characters were quite different from +ours. They had no vowels, for since there are only three vowels in +those languages, namely, the a, e, and u, by placing a point above or +below the consonant, or by not placing any point, it is easily known +what the vowel is, which corresponds to the consonant letter, and it +is read very well without the necessity of vowels. Although they knew +how to write these people had no written laws, and governed themselves +according to their traditions, and by natural law corrupted by the +passions. The civil suits were sentenced by the petty rulers with the +assistance of some old men. In criminal matters the relatives generally +showed justice or it was settled with the aggressor on a gold basis in +particular unless death followed. But in that case they did not content +themselves except with the penalty of retaliation. If the murderer was +of another settlement common cause was made, and the entire village +fought against the settlement, from which resulted murders and wars +in which slaves were made mutually. When it was suspected that one +had robbed another, he was obliged to take a stone from a kettle +filled with boiling water. If he did not do it (which we called the +vulgar clearance from guilt), he was fined a certain sum of gold, the +greater part of which went to the petty ruler. Adultery was punished +by a pecuniary fine, as was also lack of respect for old people. But +trickery in contracts was not considered wrong and was not punished +by any penalty; and usury was common among them in all transactions. + +Their customs at marriage were very peculiar. They married only one +woman. The chiefs however, had several concubines, who were commonly +slaves. They generally married their nearest relative, provided +she were not a sister, for they could not contract marriage with +sisters. When they grew tired of their wife, they returned her to +her parents. It was unnecessary to give cause for the divorce, for it +was sufficient to give up the dowry which he himself had given when +he was married. That dowry was of two kinds and was always paid by +the bridegroom. One kind was called bigay suso, and was the payment +for the milk which the mother had given to the damsel, by which he +obtained her completely. The other was called bigay caya and was +the real dowry. It was given to those recently married for their +support. At times, however, the expense of the wedding was discounted +from it, as well as the clothes, so that very little or nothing at all +remained for the recently married couple. Besides the bridegroom giving +that dowry, he had to serve the parents of the bride for some years; +to feast them on certain days; to assist in the sowing of the rice +and the harvest, and to carry food to the laborers. All the relatives +of the bridegroom had to be obsequious to the bride, to her parents, +and to all her relatives, so long as those years of service lasted. If +they failed in any point, the marriage was dissolved, a thing which +was very agreeable to the parents of the woman, for then a new suitor +appeared, and they began to suck his blood again. In retaliation for +what the bridegroom suffered before marriage, he treated his wife like +a slave after marriage. She had to find the sustenance for the family, +while her husband was off enjoying himself, and she considered herself +fortunate if after that he did not beat her. The self-interest of +the parents in their daughters in which this pernicious custom is +observed, has been the reason why it has been impossible to uproot +this hitherto, notwithstanding the royal cedulas and the decrees +of the bishops which prohibit it. The ceremony of the marriage was +performed with the sacrifice of a hog, which a priestess killed after +going through a thousand gestures. She blessed the couple abundantly, +and afterward the old women gave them food in a dish and gave vent to +many obscenities, after which the couple were pronounced married. Then +followed dances according to their custom, and drunken revels for all +the days that the function lasted. The number of days were regulated +according to the wealth of the contracting parties. He who went to +the feast gave something to the couple, and note was made of it so +that they could do the same in a like case. + +In regard to religion, they had neither idols nor temples, but +they offered sacrifices in shady bowers that they had for that +purpose. There were priestesses whom they called babailanes or +catalonas. They attended to the sacrifices, and taking a lance in +the hand and foaming at the mouth with ridiculous and extraordinary +gestures, they prophesied on the point for which the sacrifice +was offered and killed a hog with the lance. Then they immediately +divided the hog among those present and the function was finished with +dances and drunken revelries. Those sacrifices were offered to the +demons or to the souls of their ancestors, which they thought lived +in the large trees, in the crags which they met in isolated places, +or in anything out of the common which was found in the fields. They +thought that the nono or their forbears lived in all those places, +and they never passed by them without asking permission of them--a +thing which some of them do even yet. When anyone was dangerously +sick they offered in those places rice, wine, and meat, and afterward +gave that to the sick man to eat, so that he might be cured, a custom +still observed by some of them. + +They had many other superstitions such as that of the patianac, +which they say hinders childbirth by its tongue which is very fine +and long, and which reaches even to the womb of the woman, where it +restrains and whence it does not allow the infant to issue. In order +that the patianac may have no effect, the husband tightly bars the +portal of the house, lights the fire, and completely naked holds a +sword and cuts the wind with it in a furious manner until his wife +brings forth. The tigbalang is another of the things of which they +are greatly afraid. It is a kind of ghost which they say appears to +them in the form of an animal or of some unknown monster and forces +them to do things contrary to the laws of our religion. These and +other superstitions, which they held in former times, they still +observe at times, when the charlatans who are maintained at the +cost of simpletons persuade them that they will get better from +some dangerous illness or will find the jewel that they have lost, +if they will practice them. And so powerful is self-interest or the +love of life that although they believe that it is evil to observe +those superstitions and not give entire assent to those deceits, +they carry them out, for they say that perhaps it will be so. That +is a proof that they have very little root in the faith. + +All their religion was rather a servile fear than true worship. They +had no external adoration or any formula of prayers to God or idols; +they believed in neither reward nor recompense for the good, nor +punishment for the wicked. For although they knew of the immortality +of the soul and believed that they could do wrong, that belief was +so filled with errors that they thought that the souls had need of +sustenance, and all other things that we mortals need. Consequently, +at their funerals they placed clothing, weapons, and food in the +coffins; and on the fourth day when they generally celebrated the +funeral honors, they left an unoccupied seat at table for the deceased, +and they believed that he really occupied it, although they could not +see him. In order to be sure of that they scattered ashes in the house, +in which they at times found the impress of the tracks of the deceased, +either through the deceit of the devil or of some other Indian, who +left the impress of his feet there to fool the others. Persuaded of +that they offered them food so that they should do no harm. Their +religion was always directed to that--a circumstance quite in keeping +with their natural cowardice and timorousness. + + + + + + +JOLO AND THE SULUS + + +[The following is taken from vol. v, pp. 343-390 (mainly verbatim) +of Charles Wilkes's [41] Narrative of the United States Exploring +Expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842 (Philadelphia, +1844). It is one of the earliest accounts written by an American of the +island of Jolo and its vicinity, and the Joloans. Although containing +considerable matter that is descriptive rather than ethnological in +character, it has been deemed advisable not to endeavor to separate the +matter, in view of its value. Wilkes writes mainly as an eyewitness.] + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +SOOLOO + +1842 + + +On the evening of the 21st of January, the Vincennes, with the tender +in company, left the bay of Manilla. I then sent for Mr. Knox, +who commanded the latter, and gave him directions to keep closely +in company with the Vincennes, and at the same time pointed out to +him places of rendezvous where the vessels might again meet in case +any unavoidable circumstance caused their separation. I was more +particular in giving him instructions to avoid losing sight of the +Vincennes, as I was aware that my proposed surveys might be impeded +or frustrated altogether, were I deprived of the assistance of the +vessel under his command. + +On the 22d, we passed the entrance of the Straits of San Bernadino. It +would have been my most direct route to follow these straits until I +had passed Mindoro, and it is I am satisfied the safest course, unless +the winds are fair, for the direct passage. My object, however, was +to examine the ground for the benefit of others, and the Apo Shoal, +which lies about mid-channel between Palawan and Mindoro, claimed +my first attention. The tender was despatched to survey it, while I +proceeded in the Vincennes to examine the more immediate entrance to +the Sooloo Sea, off the southwest end of Mindoro. + +Calavite Peak is the north point of Mindoro, and our observations +made it two thousand feet high. This peak is of the shape of a dome, +and appears remarkably regular when seen from its western side. On +approaching Mindoro, we, as usual, under high islands, lost the steady +breeze, and the wind became light for the rest of the day. Mindoro +is a beautiful island, and is evidently volcanic; it appears as if +thrown up in confused masses: it is not much settled, as the more +southern islands are preferred to it as a residence. + +On the 23d, we ascertained the elevation of the highest peak of the +island by triangulation to be three thousand one hundred and twenty-six +feet. The easternmost island of the Palawan Group, Busvagan, [42] +was at the time just in sight from the deck, to the southwest. + +It had been my intention to anchor at Ambolou Island; [43] but the +wind died away before we reached it, and I determined to stand off +and on all night. + +On the 24th, I began to experience the truth of what Captain Halcon had +asserted, namely, that the existing charts were entirely worthless, +and I also found that my native pilot was of no more value than +they were: he had evidently passed the place before; but whether +the size of the vessel, so much greater than any he had sailed in, +confused him, or whether it was from his inability to understand and +to make himself understood by us, he was of no use whatever, and we +had the misfortune of running into shoal water, barely escaping the +bottom. These dangers were usually quickly passed, and we soon found +ourselves again floating in thirty or forty fathoms water. + +We continued beating to windward, in hopes of being joined by the +Flying-Fish, and I resolved to finish the survey toward the island of +Semarrara. [44] We found every thing in a different position from that +assigned it by any of the charts [45] with which we were furnished. On +this subject, however, I shall not dwell, but refer those who desire +particular information to the charts and Hydrographical Memoir. + +Towards evening, I again ran down to the southwest point of the island +of Mindoro, and sent a letter on shore to the pueblo, with directions +to have it put on board the tender, when she should arrive. We then +began to beat round Semarara, in order to pass over towards Panay. + +The southern part of Mindoro is much higher than the northern, +but appears to be equally rough. It is, however, susceptible of +cultivation, and there are many villages along its shores. + +Semarara is moderately high, and about fifteen miles in circumference; +it is inhabited, and like Mindoro much wooded. According to the native +pilot, its shores are free from shoals. It was not until the next day +that we succeeded in reaching Panay. I determined to pass the night +off Point Potol, the north end of Panay, as I believed the sea in its +neighborhood to be free of shoals, and wished to resume our running +survey early in the morning. + +At daylight on the 27th we continued the survey down the coast of +Panay, and succeeded in correcting many errors in the existing charts +(both English and Spanish). The channel along this side is from twelve +to twenty miles wide, and suitable for beating in; little current is +believed to exist; and the tides, as far as our observations went, +seem to be regular and of little strength. + +The island of Panay is high and broken, particularly on the south +end; its shores are thickly settled and well cultivated. Indigo and +sugar-cane claim much of the attention of the inhabitants. The Indians +are the principal cultivators. They pay to the government a capitation +tax of seven rials. Its population is estimated at three hundred +thousand, which I think is rather short of the actual number. [46] + +On all the hills there are telegraphs of rude construction, to give +information of the approach of piratical prahus from Sooloo, which +formerly were in the habit of making attacks upon the defenceless +inhabitants and carrying them off into slavery. Of late years they have +ceased these depredations, for the Spaniards have resorted to a new +mode of warfare. Instead of pursuing and punishing the offenders, they +now intercept all their supplies, both of necessaries and luxuries; +and the fear of this has had the effect to deter the pirates from +their usual attacks. + +We remained off San Pedro for the night, in hopes of falling in with +the Flying-Fish in the morning. + +On the morning of the 28th, the Flying-Fish was discovered plainly in +sight. I immediately stood for her, fired a gun and made signal. At +seven o'clock another gun was fired, but the vessel still stood off, +and was seen to make sail to the westward without paying any regard +whatever to either, and being favoured by a breeze while the Vincennes +was becalmed, she stole off and was soon out of sight. [47] + +After breakfast we opened the bay of Antique, on which is situated +the town of San Jose. [48] As this bay apparently offered anchorage +for vessels bound up this coast, I determined to survey it; +and for this purpose the boats were hoisted out and prepared for +surveying. Lieutenant Budd was despatched to visit the pueblo called +San Jose. + +On reaching the bay, the boats were sent to different points of it, +and when they were in station, the ship fired guns to furnish bases +by the sound, and angles were simultaneously measured. The boats made +soundings on their return to the ship, and thus completed this duty, +so that in an hour or two afterwards the bay was correctly represented +on paper. It offers no more than a temporary anchorage for vessels, +and unless the shore is closely approached, the water is almost too +deep for the purpose. + +At San Jose a Spanish governor resides, who presides over the +two pueblos of San Pedro and San Jose, and does the duty also of +alcalde. Lieutenant Budd did not see him, as he was absent, but +his lady did the honours. Lieutenant Budd represented the pueblo as +cleanly and orderly. About fifteen soldiers were seen, who compose +the governor's guard, and more were said to be stationed at San +Pedro. A small fort of eight guns commands the roadstead. The beach +was found to be of fine volcanic sand, composed chiefly of oxide of +iron, and comminuted shells; there is also a narrow shore-reef of +coral. The plain bordering the sea is covered with a dense growth of +cocoa-nut trees. In the fine season the bay is secure, but we were +informed that in westerly and southwesterly gales heavy seas set in, +and vessels are not able to lie at anchor. Several small vessels were +lying in a small river about one and a half miles to the southward of +the point on which the fort is situated. The entrance to this river +is very narrow and tortuous. + +Panay is one of the largest islands of the group. We had an opportunity +of measuring the height of some of its western peaks or highlands, none +of which exceed three thousand feet. [49] The interior and eastern side +have many lofty summits, which are said to reach an altitude of seven +thousand five hundred feet; but these, as we passed, were enveloped +in clouds, or shut out from view by the nearer highlands. The general +features of the island are like those of Luzon and Mindoro. The few +specimens we obtained of its rocks consisted of the different varieties +of talcose formation, with quartz and jasper. The specimens were of +no great value, as they were much worn by lying on the beach. + +The higher land was bare of trees, and had it not been for the +numerous fertile valleys lying between the sharp and rugged spurs, +it would have had a sterile appearance. + +The bay of Antique is in latitude 10 deg. 40' N., longitude 121 deg. 59' +30'' E. + +It was my intention to remain for two or three days at a convenient +anchorage to enable us to make short excursions into the interior; but +the vexatious mismanagement of the tender now made it incumbent that I +should make every possible use of the time to complete the operations +connected with the hydrography of this sea; for I perceived that the +duties that I intended should be performed by her, would now devolve +upon the boats, and necessarily expose both officers and men to the +hazard of contracting disease. I regretted giving up this design, +not only on my own account and that of the Expedition, but because of +the gratification it would have afforded personally to the naturalists. + +The town of San Jose has about thirty bamboo houses, some of which +are filled in with clay or mortar, and plastered over, both inside +and out. Few of them are more than a single story in height. That +of the governor is of the same material, and overtops the rest; +it is whitewashed, and has a neat and cleanly appearance. In the +vicinity of the town are several beautiful valleys, which run into +the mountains from the plain that borders the bay. The landing is on +a bamboo bridge, which has been erected over an extensive mud-flat, +that is exposed at low water, and prevents any nearer approach of +boats. This bridge is about seven hundred feet in length; and a novel +plan has been adopted to preserve it from being carried away. The +stems of bamboo not being sufficiently large and heavy to maintain the +superstructure in the soft mud, a scaffold is constructed just under +the top, which is loaded with blocks of large stone, and the outer +piles are secured to anchors or rocks, with grass rope. The roadway +or top is ten feet wide, covered with split bamboo, woven together, +and has rails on each side, to assist the passenger. This is absolutely +necessary for safety; and even with this aid, one accustomed to it must +be possessed of no little bodily strength to pass over this smooth, +slippery, and springy bridge without accident. + +Two pirogues were at anchor in the bay, and on the shore was the +frame of a vessel which had evidently been a long while on the stocks, +for the weeds and bushes near the keel were six or eight feet high, +and a portion of the timbers were decayed. Carts and sleds drawn by +buffaloes were in use, and every thing gave it the appearance of a +thriving village. Although I have mentioned the presence of soldiers, +it was observed on landing that no guard was stationed about or even at +the fort; but shortly afterwards a soldier was seen hurrying towards +the latter, in the act of dressing himself in his regimentals, and +another running by his side, with his cartridge-box and musket. In +a little while one was passing up and down on his post, as though he +was as permanent there as the fort itself. + +After completing these duties, the light airs detained us the remainder +of the day under Panay, in sight of the bay. On the 29th, at noon, +we had been wafted by it far enough in the offing to obtain the +easterly breeze, which soon became strong, with an overcast sky, +and carried us rapidly on our course; my time would not permit my +heaving-to. We kept on our course for Mindanao during the whole night, +and were constantly engaged in sounding, with our patent lead, with +from thirty to forty fathoms cast, to prevent our passing over this +part of the sea entirely unexamined. + +At daybreak on the 31st, we had the island of Mindanao before us, +but did not reach its western peak until 5 P. M. This island is +high and broken, like those to the north of it, but, unlike them, +its mountains are covered with forests to their very tops, and there +were no distinct cones of minor dimensions, as we had observed on +the others. If they do exist, they were hidden by the dense forest. + +I had determined to anchor at Caldera, a small port on the southwest +side of Mindanao, about ten miles distant from Samboangan, where the +governor resides. The latter is a considerable place, but the anchorage +in its roadstead is said to be bad, and the currents that run through +the Straits of Basillan are represented to be strong. Caldera, on the +other hand, has a good, though small anchorage, which is free from the +currents of the straits. It is therefore an excellent stopping-place, +in case of the tide proving unfavourable. On one of its points stands +a small fort, which on our arrival hoisted Spanish colours. + +At six o'clock we came to anchor at Caldera, in seven fathoms +water. There were few indications of inhabitants, except at and +near the fort. An officer was despatched to the fort, to report the +ship. It was found to be occupied by a few soldiers under the command +of a lieutenant. + +The fort is about seventy feet square, and is built of large blocks +of red coral, which evidently have not been taken from the vicinity +of the place, as was stated by the officers of the fort; for, although +our parties wandered along the alluvial beach for two or three miles in +each direction, no signs of coral were observed. Many fragments of red, +gray, and purple basalt and porphyry were met with along the beach; +talcose rock and slate, syenite, hornblend, quartz, both compact and +slaty, with chalcedony, were found in pieces and large pebbles. Those +who were engaged in dredging reported the bottom as being of coral, +in from four to six or eight fathoms; but this was of a different +kind from that of which the fort was constructed. + +The fort was built in the year 1784, [50] principally for protection +against the Sooloo pirates, who were in the habit of visiting +the settlements, and carrying off the inhabitants as slaves, to +obtain ransom for them. This, and others of the same description, +were therefore constructed as places of refuge for the inhabitants, +as well as to afford protection to vessels. + +Depredations are still committed, which render it necessary to keep up +a small force. One or two huts which were seen in the neighbourhood +of the bay, are built on posts twenty feet from the ground, and into +them they ascend by ladders, which are hauled up after the occupants +have entered. + +These, it is said, are the sleeping-huts, and are so built for the +purpose of preventing surprise at night. Before our arrival we had +heard that the villages were all so constructed, but a visit to one +soon showed that this was untrue. The natives seen at the village +were thought to be of a decidedly lighter colour and a somewhat +different expression from the Malays. They were found to be very +civil, and more polished in manners than our gentlemen expected. On +asking for a drink of water, it was brought on a glass tumbler on a +china plate. An old woman to whom they had presented some trifles, +took the trouble to meet them in another path on their return, and +insisted on their accepting a basket of potatoes. Some of the houses +contained several families, and many of them had no other means of +entrance than a notched stick stuck on to the door. + +The forests of Mindanao contain a great variety of trees, some of which +are of large size, rising to the height of one hundred and one hundred +and fifty feet. Some of their trunks are shaped like buttresses, +similar to those before spoken of at Manilla, from which they obtain +broad slabs for the tops of tables. The trunks were observed to +shoot up remarkably straight. Our botanical gentlemen, though pleased +with the excursion, were disappointed at not being able to procure +specimens from the lofty trees; and the day was less productive in +this respect than they had anticipated. Large woody vines were common, +which enveloped the trunks of trees in their folds, and ascending to +their tops, prevented the collection of the most desirable specimens. + +The paths leading to the interior were narrow and much obstructed; +one fine stream was crossed. Many buffaloes were observed wallowing +in the mire, and the woods swarmed with monkeys and numbers of birds, +among them the horn-bills: these kept up a continued chatter, and made +a variety of loud noises. The forests here are entirely different from +any we had seen elsewhere; and the stories of their being the abodes +of large boas and poisonous snakes, make the effect still greater on +those who visit them for the first time. Our parties, however, saw +nothing of these reptiles, nor any thing to warrant a belief that +such exist. Yet the officer at the fort related to me many snake +stories that seemed to have some foundation; and by inquiries made +elsewhere, I learned that they were at least warranted by some facts, +though probably not to the extent that he represented. + +Traces of deer and wild hogs were seen, and many birds were obtained, +as well as land and sea shells. Among the latter was the Malleus +vulgaris, which is used as food by the natives. The soil on this +part of the island is a stiff clay, and the plants it produces +are mostly woody; those of an herbaceous character were scarce, +and only a few orchideous epiphytes and ferns were seen. Around the +dwellings in the villages were a variety of vegetables and fruits, +consisting of sugar-cane, sweet-potato, gourds, pumpkins, peppers, +rice, water and musk melons, all fine and of large size. + +The officer of the fort was a lieutenant of infantry: one of that rank +is stationed here for a month, after which he, with the garrison, +consisting of three soldiers, are relieved, from Samboangan, where +the Spaniards have three companies. + +Samboangan is a convict settlement, to which the native rogues, +principally thieves, are sent. The Spanish criminals, as I have before +stated in speaking of Manilla, are sent to Spain. + +The inhabitants of the island of Mindanao who are under the subjection +of Spain, are about ten thousand in number, of whom five or six +thousand are at or in the neighbourhood of Samboangan. The original +inhabitants, who dwell in the mountains and on the east coast, are +said to be quite black, and are represented to be a very cruel and +bad set; they have hitherto bid defiance to all attempts to subjugate +them. When the Spaniards make excursions into the interior, which is +seldom, they always go in large parties on account of the wild beasts, +serpents, and hostile natives; nevertheless, the latter frequently +attack and drive them back. + +The little fort is considered as a sufficient protection for the +fishermen and small vessels against the pirates, who inhabit the +island of Basillan, which is in sight from Mindanao, and forms the +southern side of the straits of the same name. It is said that about +seven hundred inhabit it. The name of Moor is given by the Spaniards +to all those who profess the Mohammedan religion, and by such all +the islands to the west of Mindanao, and known under the name of the +Sooloo Archipelago, are inhabited. + +The day we spent at Caldera was employed in surveying the bay, and +in obtaining observations for its geographical position, and for +magnetism. The flood tide sets to the northward and westward, through +the straits, and the ebb to the eastward. In the bay we found it to +run two miles an hour by the log, but it must be much more rapid in +the straits. + +At daylight on the 1st of February, we got under way to stand over for +the Sangboys, [51] a small island with two sharp hills on it. One and +a half miles from the bay we passed over a bank, the least water on +which was ten fathoms on a sandy bottom, and on which a vessel might +anchor. The wind shortly after failed us, and we drifted with the tide +for some hours, in full view of the island of Mindanao, which is bold +and picturesque. We had thus a good opportunity of measuring some of +its mountain ranges, which we made about three thousand feet high. + +In the afternoon, a light breeze came from the southwest, and before +sunset I found that we were again on soundings. As soon as we had +a cast of twenty fathoms, I anchored for the night, judging it much +better than to be drifting about without any knowledge of the locality +and currents to which we were subjected. + +On the morning of the 2d, we got under way to proceed to the +westward. As the bottom was unequal, I determined to pass through +the broadest channel, although it had the appearance of being the +shoalest, and sent two boats ahead to sound. In this way we passed +through, continuing our surveying operations, and at the same time +made an attempt to dredge; but the ground was too uneven for the +latter purpose, and little of value was obtained. + +Shortly after passing the Sangboys, we had the island of Sooloo in +sight, for which I now steered direct. At sunset we found ourselves +within five or six miles of Soung Harbour; but there was not sufficient +light to risk the dangers that might be in our course, nor wind enough +to command the ship; and having no bottom where we were, I determined +again to run out to sea, and anchor on the first bank I should meet. At +half past eight o'clock, we struck soundings in twenty-six fathoms, +and anchored. + +At daylight we continued our position by angles, and found it +to correspond with part of the route we had passed over the day +before, and that we were about fifteen miles from the large island +of Sooloo. Weighing anchor, we were shortly wafted by the westerly +tide and a light air toward that beautiful island, which lay in the +midst of its little archipelago; and as we were brought nearer and +nearer, we came to the conclusion that in our many wanderings we had +seen nothing to be compared to this enchanting spot. It appeared to +be well cultivated, with gentle slopes rising here and there into +eminences from one to two thousand feet high. One or two of these +might be dignified with the name of mountains, and were sufficiently +high to arrest the passing clouds; on the afternoon of our arrival +we had a singular example in the dissipation of a thunderstorm. + +Although much of the island was under cultivation, yet it had all the +freshness of a forest region. The many smokes on the hills, buildings +of large size, cottages, and cultivated spots, together with the +moving crowds on the land, the prahus, canoes, and fishing-boats on +the water, gave the whole a civilized appearance. Our own vessel lay, +almost without a ripple at her side, on the glassy surface of the +sea, carried onwards to our destined anchorage by the flowing tide, +and scarce a sound was heard except the splashing of the lead as +it sought the bottom. The effect of this was destroyed in part by +the knowledge that this beautiful archipelago was the abode of a +cruel and barbarous race of pirates. Towards sunset we had nearly +reached the bay of Soung, when we were met by the opposing tide, +which frustrated all our endeavors to reach it, and I was compelled +to anchor, lest we should again be swept to sea. + +As soon as the night set in, fishermen's lights were seen moving along +the beach in all directions, and gliding about in canoes, while the sea +was filled with myriads of phosphorescent animalculae. After watching +this scene for two or three hours in the calm and still night, a storm +that had been gathering reached us; but it lasted only for a short +time, and cleared off after a shower, which gave the air a freshness +that was delightful after the sultry heat we had experienced during +the day. + +The canoes of this archipelago were found to be different from any that +we had hitherto seen, not only in shape but in making use of a double +out-rigger, which consequently must give them additional security. The +paddle also is of a different shape, and has a blade at each end, +which are used alternately, thus enabling a single person to manage +them with ease. These canoes are built of a single log, though some +are built upon. They seldom carry more than two persons. The annexed +figure will give a correct figure of one of them. [52] + +We saw the fishermen engaged in trolling and using the line; but the +manner of taking fish which has been hitherto described is chiefly +practised. [53] In fishing, as well as in all their other employments, +the kris and spear were invariably by their side. + +The next morning at eight o'clock we got under way, and were towed +by our boats into the bay of Soung, [54] where we anchored off the +town in nine fathoms water. While in the act of doing so, and after +our intentions had become too evident to admit of a doubt, the Sultan +graciously sent off a message giving us permission to enter his port. + +Lieutenant Budd was immediately despatched with the interpreter to call +upon the Datu Mulu or governor, and to learn at what hour we could see +the Sultan. When that officer reached the town, all were found asleep; +and after remaining four hours waiting, the only answer he could get +out of the Datu Mulu was, that he supposed that the Sultan would be +awake at three o'clock, when he thought I could see him. + +During this time the boats had been preparing for surveying; and +after landing the naturalists, they began the work. + +At the appointed time, Captain Hudson and myself went on shore to wait +upon the Sultan. On our approach to the town, we found that a great +portion of it was built over the water on piles, and only connected +with the shore by narrow bridges of bamboo. The style of building in +Sooloo does not differ materially from that of the Malays. The houses +are rather larger, and they surpass the others in filth. [55] + +We passed for some distance between the bridges to the landing, and +on our way saw several piratical prahus apparently laid up. Twenty of +these were counted, of about thirty tons burden, evidently built for +sea-vessels, and capable of mounting one or two long guns. We landed +at a small streamlet, and walked a short distance to the Datu's house, +which is of large dimensions and rudely built on piles, which raise it +about six feet above the ground, and into which we were invited. The +house of the Datu contains one room, part of which is screened off to +form the apartment of his wife. Nearly in the center is a raised dais, +eight or ten feet square, under which are stowed all his valuables, +packed in chests and Chinese trunks. Upon this dais are placed mats +for sleeping, with cushions, pillows, &c.; and over it is a sort of +canopy, hung round with fine chintz or muslin. + +The dais was occupied by the Datu who is, next to the Sultan, the +greatest man of this island. He at once came from it to receive +us, and had chairs provided for us near his sanctum. After we +were seated, he again retired to his lounge. The Datu is small in +person, and emaciated in form, but has a quick eye and an intelligent +countenance. He lives, as he told me, with all his goods around him, +and they formed a collection such as I could scarcely imagine it +possible to bring together in such a place. The interior put me +in mind of a barn inhabited by a company of strolling players. On +one side were hung up a collection of various kinds of gay dresses, +here drums and gongs, there swords, lanterns, spears, muskets, and +small cannon; on another side were shields, bucklers, masks, saws, +and wheels, with belts, bands, and long robes. The whole was a strange +mixture of tragedy and farce; and the group of natives were not far +removed in appearance from the supernumeraries that a Turkish tragedy +might have brought together in the green-room of a theatre. + +A set of more cowardly-looking miscreants I never saw. They appeared +ready either to trade with us, pick our pockets, or cut our throats, +as an opportunity might offer. + +The wife's apartment was not remarkable for its comforts, although +the Datu spoke of it with much consideration, and evidently held his +better half in high estimation. He was also proud of his six children, +the youngest of whom he brought out in its nurse's arms, and exhibited +with much pride and satisfaction. He particularly drew my attention +to its little highly-wrought and splendidly-mounted kris, which was +stuck through its girdle, as an emblem of his rank. It was in reality a +fine-looking child. The kitchen was behind the house, and occupied but +a small space, for they have little in the way of food that requires +much preparation. The house of the Datu might justly be termed nasty. + +We now learned the reason why the Sultan could not be seen: it was +Friday, the Mahomedan Sabbath, and he had been at the mosque from an +early hour. [56] Lieutenant Budd had been detained, because it was +not known when he would finish his prayers; and the ceremonies of +the day were more important than usual, on account of its peculiar +sanctity in their calendar. + +Word had been sent off to the ship that the Sultan was ready to receive +me, but the messenger passed us while on our way to the shore. After +we had been seated for a while, the Datu asked if we were ready +to accompany him to see the Sultan; but intimated that no one but +Captain Hudson and myself could be permitted to lay eyes on him. Being +informed that we were, he at once, and in our presence, slipped on +his silken trousers, and a new jacket, covered with bell-buttons; +put on his slippers, strapped himself round with a long silken net +sash, into which he stuck his kris, and, with umbrella in hand, +said he was ready. He now led the way out of his house, leaving the +motley group behind, and we took the path to the interior of the +town, towards the Sultan's. The Datu and I walked hand in hand, on +a roadway about ten feet wide, with a small stream running on each +side. Captain Hudson and the interpreter came next, and a guard of +six trusty slaves brought up the rear. + +When we reached the outskirts of the town, about half a mile from +the Datu's, we came to the Sultan's residence, where he was prepared +to receive us in state. His house is constructed in the same manner +as that of the Datu, but is of larger dimensions, and the piles are +rather higher. Instead of steps, we found a ladder, rudely constructed +of bamboo, and very crazy. This was so steep that it was necessary to +use the hands in mounting it. I understood that the ladder was always +removed in the night, for the sake of security. We entered at once +into the presence-chamber, where the whole divan, if such it may be +called, sat in arm chairs, occupying the half of a large round table, +covered with a white cotton cloth. On the opposite side of the table, +seats were placed for us. On our approach, the Sultan and all his +council rose, and motioned us to our seats. When we had taken them, +the part of the room behind us was literally crammed with well-armed +men. A few minutes were passed in silence, during which time we +had an opportunity of looking at each other, and around the hall in +which we were seated. The latter was of very common workmanship, and +exhibited no signs of oriental magnificence. Overhead hung a printed +cotton cloth, forming a kind of tester, which covered about half of +the apartment. In other places the roof and rafters were visible. A +part of the house was roughly partitioned off, to the height of nine +or ten feet, enclosing, as I was afterwards told, the Sultan's sleeping +apartment, and that appropriated to his wife and her attendants. + +The Sultan is of the middle height, spare and thin; he was dressed in a +white cotton shirt, loose trousers of the same material, and slippers; +he had no stockings; the bottom of his trousers was worked in scollops +with blue silk, and this was the only ornament I saw about him. On his +head he wore a small coloured cotton handkerchief, wound into a turban, +that just covered the top of his head. His eyes were bloodshot, and had +an uneasy wild look, showing that he was under the effects of opium, +of which they all smoke large quantities. [57] His teeth were as black +as ebony, which, with his bright cherry-coloured lips, contrasted +with his swarthy skin, gave him anything but a pleasant look. + +On the left hand of the Sultan sat his two sons, while his right was +occupied by his councillors; just behind him, sat the carrier of his +betel-nut casket. The casket was of filigree silver, about the size +of a small tea-caddy, of oblong shape, and rounded at the top. It +had three divisions, one for the leaf, another for the nut, and a +third for the lime. [58] Next to this official was the pipe-bearer, +who did not appear to be held in such estimation as the former. + +I opened the conversation by desiring that the Datu would explain the +nature of our visit, and tell the Sultan that I had come to make the +treaty which he had some time before desired to form with the United +States. [59] + +The Sultan replied, that such was still his desire; upon which I +told him, I would draw one up for him, that same day. While I was +explaining to him the terms, a brass candlestick was brought in with +a lighted tallow candle, of a very dark colour and rude shape, that +showed but little art in the manufacture. This was placed in the +center of the table, with a plate of Manilla cigars. None of them, +however, were offered to us, nor any kind of refreshment. + +Our visit lasted nearly an hour. When we arose to take our leave, +the Sultan and his divan did the same, and we made our exit with low +bows on each side. + +I looked upon it as a matter of daily occurrence for all those who +came to the island to visit the Sultan; but the Datu Mulu took great +pains to make me believe that a great favour had been granted in +allowing us a sight of his ruler. On the other hand, I dwelt upon the +condescension it was on my part to visit him, and I refused to admit +that I was under any gratitude or obligation for the sight of His +Majesty the Sultan Mohammed Damaliel Kisand, but said that he might +feel grateful to me if he signed the treaty I would prepare for him. + +On our return from the Sultan's to the Datu Mulu's house, we found even +a greater crowd than before. The Datu, however, contrived to get us +seats. The attraction which drew it together was to look at Mr. Agate, +who was making a sketch of Mohammed Polalu, the Sultan's son, and next +heir to the throne. [60] I had hoped to procure one of the Sultan, +but this was declared to be impossible. The son, however, has all +the characteristics of the Sooloos, and the likeness was thought an +excellent one. Mohammed Polalu is about twenty-three years of age, of a +tall slender figure, with a long face, heavy and dull eyes, as though +he was constantly under the influence of opium. [61] So much, indeed, +was he addicted to the use of this drug, even according to the Datu +Mulu's accounts, that his strength and constitution were very much +impaired. As he is kept particularly under the guardianship of the +Datu, the latter has a strong interest in preserving this influence +over him, and seems on this account to afford him every opportunity +of indulging in this deplorable habit. + +During our visit, the effect of a pipe of this drug was seen upon +him; for but a short time after he had reclined himself on the Datu's +couch and cushion, and taken a few whiffs, he was entirely overcome, +stupid, and listless. I had never seen any one so young, bearing +such evident marks of the effects of this deleterious drug. When but +partially recovered from its effects he called for his betel-nut, +to revive him by its exciting effects. This was carefully chewed by +his attendant to a proper consistency, moulded in a ball about the +size of a walnut, and then slipped into the mouth of the heir apparent. + +One of the requests I had made of the Sultan was, that the officers +might have guides to pass over the island. This was at once said +to be too dangerous to be attempted, as the datus of the interior +and southern towns would in all probability attack the parties. I +understood what this meant, and replied that I was quite willing to +take the responsibility, and that the party should be well armed. To +this the Sultan replied, that he would not risk his own men. This I +saw was a mere evasion, but it was difficult and would be dangerous +for our gentlemen to proceed alone, and I therefore said no more. On +our return to the Datu's, I gave them permission to get as far from +the beach as they could, but I was afterwards informed by them that +in endeavoring to penetrate into the woods, they were always stopped +by armed men. This was also the case when they approached particular +parts of the town, but they were not molested as long as their rambles +were confined to the beach. At the Datu's we were treated to chocolate +and negus in gilt-edge tumblers, with small stale cakes, which had +been brought from Manilla. + +After we had sat some time I was informed that Mr. Dana missed his +bowie-knife pistol, which he had for a moment laid down on a chest. I +at once came to the conclusion that it had been stolen, and as the +theft had occurred in the Datu's house, I determined to hold him +responsible for it, and gave him at once to understand that I should +do so, informing him that the pistol must be returned before the next +morning, or he must take the consequences. This threw him into some +consternation, and by my manner he felt that I was serious. + +Captain Hudson and myself, previous to my return on board, visited +the principal parts of the town. The Chinese quarter is separated +by a body of water, and has a gateway that leads to a bridge. The +bridge is covered by a roof, and on each side of it are small shops, +which are open in front, and thus expose the goods they contain. In +the rear of the shops were the dwellings of the dealers. This sort +of bazaar contained but a very scanty assortment, and the goods were +of inferior quality. + +We visited some blacksmith-shops, where they were manufacturing krises +and spears. These shops were open sheds; the fire was made upon the +ground, and two wooden cylinders, whose valves were in the bottom, +served for bellows; when used, they had movable pistons which were +worked by a man on an elevated seat, and answered the purpose better +than could have been expected. + +The kris is a weapon in which this people take great pride; it is of +various shapes and sizes, and is invariably worn from infancy to old +age; they are generally wavy in their blades, and are worn in wooden +scabbards, which are neatly made and highly polished. This weapon is +represented in the tailpiece to this chapter. + +The market was well stocked with fruit and fish, Among the former the +durian seemed to predominate; this was the first time we had seen +it. It has a very disagreeable odour, as if decayed, and appears +to emit a sulphuretted hydrogen gas, which I observed blackened +silver. Some have described this fruit as delicious, but if the +smell is not enough, the taste in my opinion will convince any one +of the contrary. + +Mr. Brackenridge made the following list of their fruits: Durian, +Artocarpus integrifolia, Melons, water and musk, Oranges, mandarin +and bitter, Pine-apples, Carica papaya, Mangosteen, Breadfruit, +Cocoa and Betel-nut. The vegetables were capsicums, cucumbers, yams, +sweet-potatoes, garlic, onions, edible fern-roots, and radishes of +the salmon variety, but thicker and more acrid in flavour. + +In walking about the streets of the town we were permitted to enter, +large slabs of cut granite were seen, which were presumed to be +from China, where the walls of canals or streamlets are lined with +it. But Dr. Pickering in his rambles discovered pieces that had been +cut as if to form a monument, and remarked a difference between it +and the Chinese kind. On one or two pieces he saw the mark No. 1, +in black paint; the material resembled the Chelmsford granite, and +it occurred to him that the stone had been cut in Boston. [62] I did +not hear of this circumstance until after we had left Sooloo, and have +little doubt now that the interdiction against our gentlemen visiting +some parts of the town was owing to the fact of the discovery of this +plunder. This may have been the reason why they so readily complied +with my demands, in order to get rid of us as soon as possible, +feeling themselves guilty, and being unprepared for defence; for, +of the numerous guns mounted, few if any were serviceable. + +The theft of the pistol was so barefaced an affair, that I made up +my mind to insist on its restoration. At the setting of the watch +in the evening, it had been our practice on board the Vincennes to +fire a small brass howitzer. This frequently, in the calm evenings, +produced a great reverberation, and rolled along the water to the +surrounding islands with considerable noise. Instead of it, on this +evening, I ordered one of the long guns to be fired, believing that +the sound and reverberation alone would suffice to intimidate such +robbers. One was accordingly fired in the direction of the town, +which fairly shook the island, as they said, and it was not long +before we saw that the rogues were fully aroused, for the clatter of +gongs and voices that came over the water, and the motion of lights, +convinced me that the pistol would be forthcoming in the morning. In +this I was not mistaken, for at early daylight I was awakened by a +special messenger from the Datu to tell me that the pistol was found, +and would be brought off without delay; that he had been searching for +it all night, and had succeeded at last in finding it, as well as the +thief, on whom he intended to inflict the bastinado. Accordingly, in +a short time the pistol was delivered on board, and every expression +of friendship and good-will given, with the strongest assurances that +nothing of the kind should happen again. + +As our naturalists could have no opportunity of rambling over the +island of Sooloo, it was thought that one of the neighbouring islands +(although not so good a field) would afford them many of the same +results, and that they could examine it unmolested. Accordingly, at +an early hour, they were despatched in boats for that purpose, with +a sufficient guard to attend them in case of necessity. The island +on which they landed is called Marongas [63] on the map of the group +annexed to this chapter. On it are two hills of volcanic conglomerate +and vesicular lava, containing angular fragments embedded. The bottom +was covered with living coral, of every variety, and of different +colours; but there was nothing like a regular coral shelf, and the +beach was composed of bits of coral intermixed with dead shells, +both entire and comminuted. The centre of the island was covered +with mangrove-bushes; the hills were cones, but had no craters on +them. The mangroves had grown in clusters, giving the appearance +of a number of small islands. This, with the neighbouring islets, +were thought to be composed in a great part of coral, but it was +impossible for our gentlemen to determine the fact. + +The day was exceedingly hot, and the island was suffering to such +a degree from drought that the leaves in many cases were curled and +appeared dry. On the face of the rocky cliff they saw many swallows +(hirundo esculenta) flying in and out of the caverns facing the sea; +but they were not fortunate enough to find any of the edible nests, +so much esteemed by Chinese epicures. + +At another part of the island they heard the crowing of a cock, and +discovered a small village, almost hidden by the mangroves, and built +over the water. In the neighbourhood were several fish-baskets set +out to dry, as well as a quantity of fencing for weirs, all made of +rattan. Their shape was somewhat peculiar. After a little while the +native fishermen were seen approaching, who evidently had a knowledge +of their visit from the first. They came near with great caution +in their canoes; but after the first had spoken and reconnoitred, +several others landed, exhibiting no signs of embarrassment, and soon +motioned our party off. To indicate that force would be resorted to, +in case of refusal, at the same time they pointed to their arms, and +drew their krises. Our gentlemen took this all in good part, and after +dispensing a few trifling presents among them, began their retreat +with a convenient speed, without, however, compromising their dignity. + +The excursion had been profitable in the way of collections, having +yielded a number of specimens of shrubs and trees, both in flower +and fruit; but owing to the drought, the herbaceous plants were, +for the most part, dried up. Among the latter, however, they saw a +large and fine terrestrial species of Epidendrum, whose stem grew +to the height of several feet, and when surmounted by its flowers +reached twelve or fifteen feet high. Many of the salt-marsh plants +seen in the Feejees, were also observed here. Besides the plants, +some shells and a beautiful cream-coloured pigeon were obtained. + +During the day we were busily engaged in the survey of the harbour, +and in making astronomical and magnetical observations on the beach, +while some of the officers were employed purchasing curiosities, +on shore, at the town, and alongside the ship. These consisted of +krises, spears, shields, and shells; and the Sooloos were not slow +in comprehending the kind of articles we were in search of. + +Few if any of the Sooloos [64] can write or read, though many speak +Spanish. Their accounts are all kept by the slaves. Those who can read +and write are, in consequence, highly prized. All the accounts of the +Datu of Soung are kept in Dutch, by a young Malay from Ternate, who +writes a good hand, and speaks English, and whom we found exceedingly +useful to us. He is the slave of the Datu, who employs him for this +purpose only. He told us he was captured in a brig by the pirates of +Basillan, and sold here as a slave, where he is likely to remain for +life, although he says the Datu has promised to give him his freedom +after ten years. + +Horses, cows and buffaloes are the beasts of burden, and a Sooloo +may usually be seen riding either one or the other, armed cap-a-pie, +with kris, spear, and target, or shield. + +They use saddles cut out of solid wood, and many ride with their +stirrups so short that they bring the knees very high, and the +riders look more like well-grown monkeys than mounted men. The cows +and buffaloes are guided by a piece of thong, through the cartilage +of the nose. By law, no swine are allowed to be kept on the island, +and if any are brought, they are immediately killed. The Chinese are +obliged to raise and kill their pigs very secretly, when they desire +that species of food; for, notwithstanding the law and the prejudices +of the inhabitants, the former continue to keep swine. + +The inhabitants of Sooloo are a tall, thin, and effeminate-looking +race: I do not recollect to have seen one corpulent person among +them. Their faces are peculiar for length, particularly in the lower +jaw and chin, with high cheek-bones, sunken, lack-lustre eyes, and +narrow foreheads. Their heads are thinly covered with hair, which +appears to be kept closely cropped. I was told that they pluck out +their beards, and dye their teeth black with antimony. + +Their eyebrows appear to be shaven, forming a very regular and high +arch, which they esteem a great beauty. + +The dress of the common people is very much like that of the Chinese, +with loose and full sleeves, without buttons. The materials of which +it is made are grass-cloth, silks, satins, or white cotton, from +China. I should judge, from the appearance of their persons, that they +ought to be termed, so far as ablutions go, a cleanly people. There +is no outward respect or obeisance shown by the slave to his master, +nor is the presence of the Datu, or even of the Sultan himself, held +in any awe. All appear upon an equality, and there does not seem to +be any controlling power; yet it may be at once perceived that they +are suspicious and jealous of strangers. + +The Sooloos, although they are ready to do any thing for the sake of +plunder, even to the taking of life, yet are not disposed to hoard +their ill-gotten wealth, and, with all their faults, cannot be termed +avaricious. + +They have but few qualities to redeem their treachery, cruelty, +and revengeful dispositions; and one of the principal causes of +their being so predominant, or even of their existence, is their +inordinate lust for power. When they possess this, it is accompanied +by a haughty, consequential, and ostentatious bravery. No greater +affront can be offered to a Sooloo, than to underrate his dignity and +official consequence. Such an insult is seldom forgiven, and never +forgotten. From one who has made numerous voyages to these islands, I +have obtained many of the above facts, and my own observation assures +me that this view of their character is a correct one. I would, +however, add another trait, which is common among them, and that is +cowardice, which is obvious, in spite of their boasted prowess and +daring. This trait of character is universally ascribed to them among +the Spaniards in the Philippines, who ought to be well acquainted +with them. + +The dress of the women is not unlike that of the men in +appearance. They wear close jackets of various colours when they go +abroad, and the same loose breeches as the men, but over them they +usually have a large wrapper (sarong), not unlike the pareu of the +Polynesian islanders, which is put round them like a petticoat, or +thrown over the shoulders. Their hair is drawn to the back of the head, +and around the forehead it is shaven in the form of a regular arch +to correspond with the eyebrows. Those that I saw at the Sultan's +were like the Malays, and had light complexions with very black +teeth. The Datu thought them very handsome, and on our return he +asked me if I had seen the Sultan's beauties. The females of Sooloo +have the reputation of ruling their lords, and possess much weight +in the government by the influence they exert over their husbands. + +It may be owing to this that there is little jealousy of their wives, +who are said to hold their virtues in no very great estimation. In +their houses they are but scantily clothed, though women of rank have +always a large number of rings on their fingers, some of which are of +great value, as well as earrings of fine gold. They wear no stockings, +but have on Chinese slippers, or Spanish shoes. They are as capable +of governing as their husbands, and in many cases more so, as they +associate with the slaves, from whom they obtain some knowledge of +Christendom, and of the habits and customs of other nations, which +they study to imitate in every way. + +The mode in which the Sooloos employ their time may be exemplified by +giving that of the Datu; for all, whether free or slave, endeavor to +imitate the higher rank as far as is in their power. The datus seldom +rise before eleven o'clock, unless they have some particular business; +and the Datu Mulu complained of being sleepy in consequence of the +early hour at which we had disturbed him. + +On rising, they have chocolate served in gilt glass-ware, with some +light biscuit, and sweetmeats imported from China or Manilla, of +which they informed me they laid in large supplies. They then lounge +about their houses, transacting a little business, and playing at +various games, or, in the trading season, go to the meeting of the +Ruma Bechara. + +At sunset they take their principal meal, consisting of stews of fish, +poultry, beef, eggs, and rice, prepared somewhat after the Chinese +and Spanish modes, mixed up with that of the Malay. Although Moslems, +they do not forego the use of wine, and some are said to indulge in +it to a great extent. After sunset, when the air has become somewhat +cooled by the refreshing breezes, they sally forth attended by their +retainers to take a walk, or proceed to the bazaars to purchase goods, +or to sell or to barter away their articles of produce. They then pay +visits to their friends, when they are in the habit of having frequent +convivial parties, talking over their bargains, smoking cigars, +drinking wine and liquors, tea, coffee, and chocolate, and indulging +in their favorite pipe of opium. At times they are entertained with +music, both vocal and instrumental, by their dependants. Of this art +they appear to be very fond, and there are many musical instruments +among them. A datu, indeed, would be looked upon as uneducated if he +could not play on some instrument. + +It is considered polite that when refreshments are handed they should +be partaken of. Those offered us by the Datu were such as are usual, +but every thing was stale. Of fruit they are said to be very fond, +and can afford to indulge themselves in some kinds. With all these +articles to cloy the appetite, only one set meal a day is taken; +though the poorer classes, fishermen and labourers, partake of two. + +The government of the Sooloo Archipelago is a kind of oligarchy, and +the supreme authority is vested in the Sultan and the Ruma Bechara or +trading council. This consists of about twenty chiefs, either datus, +or their next in rank, called orangs, [65] who are governors of +towns or detached provinces. The influence of the individual chiefs +depends chiefly upon the number of their retainers or slaves, and the +force they can bring into their service when they require it. These +are purchased from the pirates, who bring them to Sooloo and its +dependencies for sale. The slaves are employed in a variety of ways, +as in trading prahus, in the pearl and biche de mar [66] fisheries, +and in the search after the edible birds'-nests. + +A few are engaged in agriculture, and those who are at all educated +are employed as clerks. These slaves are not denied the right of +holding property, which they enjoy during their lives, but at their +death it reverts to the master. Some of them are quite rich, and +what may appear strange, the slaves of Sooloo are invariably better +off than the untitled freemen, who are at all times the prey of the +hereditary datus, even of those who hold no official stations. By +all accounts these constitute a large proportion of the population, +and it being treason for any low-born freeman to injure or maltreat +a datu, the latter, who are of a haughty, overbearing, and tyrannical +disposition, seldom keep themselves within bounds in their treatment +of their inferiors. The consequence is, the lower class of freemen +are obliged to put themselves under the protection of some particular +datu, which guards them from the encroachment of others. The chief +to whom they thus attach themselves, is induced to treat them well, +in order to retain their services, and attach them to his person, +that he may, in case of need, be enabled to defend himself from +depredations, and the violence of his neighbours. + +Such is the absence of legal restraint, that all find it necessary to +go abroad armed, and accompanied by a trusty set of followers, who are +also armed. This is the case both by day and night, and according to +the Datu's account, frequent affrays take place in the open streets, +which not unfrequently end in bloodshed. + +Caution is never laid aside, the only law that exists being that of +force; but the weak contrive to balance the power of the strong by +uniting. They have not only contentions and strife among themselves, +but it was stated at Manilla that the mountaineers of Sooloo, who are +said to be Christians, occasionally make inroads upon them. At Sooloo, +however, it did not appear that they were much under apprehension of +these attacks. The only fear I heard expressed was by the Sultan, +in my interview with him; and the cause of this, as I have already +stated, was probably a desire to find an excuse for not affording us +facilities to go into the interior. Within twenty years, however, +the reigning Sultan has been obliged to retire within his forts, +in the town of Sooloo, which I have before adverted to. + +These people are hostile to the Sooloos of the coasts and towns, who +take every opportunity to rob them of their cattle and property, +for which the mountaineers seek retaliation when they have an +opportunity. From the manner in which the Datu spoke of them, +they are not much regarded. Through another source I learned that +the mountaineers were Papuans, and the original inhabitants of the +islands, who pay tribute to the Sultan, and have acknowledged his +authority ever since they were converted to Islamism. [67] Before +that time they were considered extremely ferocious, and whenever it +was practicable they were destroyed. Others speak of an original race +of Dyacks in the interior, but there is one circumstance to satisfy +me that there is no confidence to be placed in this account, namely, +that the island is not of sufficient extent to accommodate so numerous +a population as some ascribe to it. + +The forts consist of a double row of piles, filled in with coral +blocks. That situated on the east side of the small stream may be +said to mount a few guns, but these are altogether inefficient; and +in another, on the west side, which is rather a rude embankment than +a fort, there are some twelve or fifteen pieces of large calibre; +but I doubt very much if they had been fired off for years, and many +of the houses built upon the water would require to be pulled down +before these guns could be brought to bear upon any thing on the side +of the bay, supposing them to be in a good condition; a little farther +to the east of the town, I was informed they had a kind of stockade, +but none of us were permitted to see it. + +According to our estimates, and the information we received while at +Sooloo, the island itself does not contain more than thirty thousand +inhabitants, of which the town of Soung may have six or seven +thousand. The whole group may number about one hundred and thirty +thousand. I am aware, however, that it is difficult to estimate the +population of a half-civilized people, who invariably exaggerate +their own strength; and visiters are likewise prone to do the same +thing. The Chinese comprise about an eighth of the population of the +town, and are generally of the lower class. They are constantly busy +at their trades, and intent upon making money. + +At Soung, business seems active, and all, slaves as well as masters, +seem to engage in it. The absence of a strong government leaves all at +liberty to act for themselves, and the Ruma Bechara gives unlimited +freedom to trade. These circumstances promote the industry of the +community, and even that of the slave, for he too, as before observed, +has a life interest in what he earns. + +Soung being the residence of the Sultan, as well as the grand depot +for all piratical goods, is probably more of a mart than any of the +surrounding towns. In the months of March and April it is visited by +several Chinese junks, who remain trading until the beginning of the +month of August. If delayed after that time, they can scarcely return +in safety, being unable to contend with the boisterous weather and head +winds that then prevail in the Chinese seas. These junks are said to +come chiefly from Amoy, where the cottons, &c., best suited for the +Sooloos are made. Their cargoes consist of a variety of articles of +Chinese manufacture and produce, such as silk, satin goods, cottons, +red and checked, grass-cloth clothing, handkerchiefs, cutlery, guns, +ammunition, opium, lumber, china and glass-ware, rice, sugar, oil, +lard, and butter. In return for this merchandise they obtain camphor, +birds'-nests, rattans, biche de mar, pearls and pearl-shells, cocoa, +tortoise-shell, and wax; but there is no great quantity of these +articles to be obtained, perhaps not more than two or three cargoes +during the season. The trade requires great knowledge of the articles +purchased, for the Chinese and Sooloos are both such adepts in fraud, +that great caution and circumspection are necessary. + +The duties on importation are not fixed, but are changed and altered +from time to time by the Ruma Bechara. The following was stated to +me as the necessary payments before trade could be carried on. + + + A large ship, with Chinese on board, pays $2,000 + A large ship, without Chinese on board, pays 1,800 + Small ships, 1,500 + Large brig, 1,000 + Small brig, 500 + Schooners, from 150 to 400 + + +This supposes them all to have full cargoes. That a difference should +be made in a vessel with or without Chinamen, seems singular; but +this, I was told, arose from the circumstance that English vessels +take them on board, in order to detect and prevent the impositions +of the Sooloos. + +Vessels intending to trade at Soung should arrive before the Chinese +junks, and remain as long as they stay, or even a few days later. In +trading with the natives, all operations ought to be carried on for +cash, or if by barter, no delivery should be made until the articles +to be taken in exchange are received. In short, it is necessary to +deal with them as though they were undoubted rogues, and this pleases +them much more than to appear unsuspicious. Vessels that trade engage +a bazaar, which they hire of the Ruma Bechara, and it is advisable to +secure the good-will of the leading datus in that council by presents, +and paying them more for their goods than others. + +There are various other precautions necessary in dealing with +this people; for they will, if possible, so act as to give rise to +disputes, in which case an appeal is made to their fellows, who are +sure to decide against the strangers. Those who have been engaged +in this trade, advise that the prices of the goods should be fixed +upon before the Sultan, and the scales of the Datu of Soung employed; +for although these are quite faulty, the error is compensated by the +articles received being weighed in the same. This also secures the +Datu's good-will, by the fee (some fifty dollars) which he receives +for the use of them. Thus it will be perceived that those who desire +to trade with Sooloo, must make up their minds to encounter many +impositions, and to be continually watchful of their own interests. + +Every possible precaution ought to be taken; and it will be found, the +treatment will depend upon, or be according to the force or resolution +that is displayed. In justice to this people it must be stated, there +have been times when traders received every kindness and attention at +the island of Sooloo, and I heard it even said, that many vessels had +gone there to refit; but during the last thirty or forty years, the +reigning sultans and their subjects have become hostile to Europeans, +of whom they plunder and destroy as many as they can, and this they +have hitherto been allowed to do with impunity. + +Although I have described the trade with Sooloo as limited, yet +it is capable of greater extension; and had it not been for the +piratical habits of the people, the evil report of which has been +so widely spread, Sooloo would now have been one of the principal +marts of the East. The most fertile parts of Borneo are subject to +its authority. There all the richest productions of these Eastern +seas grow in immense quantities, but are now left ungarnered in +consequence of there being no buyers. The cost of their cultivation +would be exceedingly low, and I am disposed to believe that these +articles could be produced here at a lower cost than any where else. + +Besides the trade with China, there is a very considerable one with +Manilla in small articles, and I found one of our countrymen engaged +in this traffic, under the Spanish flag. To him I am indebted for +much information that his opportunities for observation had given him. + +The materials for the history of Sooloo are meagre, and great doubts +seem to exist in some periods of it. That which I have been able to +gather is as follows. + +The island of Sooloo is generally believed to have been originally +inhabited by Papuans, some of whom, as I have already stated, are still +supposed to inhabit the mountainous part. The first intercourse had +with them was by the Chinese, who went there in search of pearls. The +Orang Dampuwans were the first of the Malays to form settlements on the +islands; but after building towns, and making other improvements, they +abandoned the islands, in consequence, it is said, of the inhabitants +being a perfidious race, having previously to their departure destroyed +as many of the natives as they could. + +The fame of the submarine riches of this archipelago reached Banjur, +or Borneo, the people of which were induced to resort there, and +finding it to equal their expectation, they sent a large colony, +and made endeavours to win over the inhabitants, and obtain thereby +the possession of their rich isle. In order to confirm the alliance, +a female of Banjarmassing, [68] of great beauty, was sent, and married +to the principal chief; and from this alliance the sovereigns of Sooloo +claim their descent. The treaty of marriage made Sooloo tributary to +the Banjarmassing empire. + +After the Banjars had thus obtained possession of the archipelago, +the trade in its products attracted settlers from the surrounding +islands, who soon contrived to displace the aborigines, and drive +them to the inaccessible mountains for protection. + +When the Chinese took possession of the northern parts of Borneo, +under the Emperor Songtiping, about the year 1375, [69] the daughter +of that prince was married to a celebrated Arabian chief named Sherif +Alli, who visited the shores of Borneo in quest of commerce. The +descendants of this marriage extended their conquests not only over +the Sooloo Archipelago, but over the whole of the Philippines, and +rendered the former tributary to Borneo. In three reigns after this +event, the Sultan of Borneo proper married the daughter of a Sooloo +chief, and from this union came Mirhome Bongsu, who succeeding to +the throne while yet a minor, his uncle acted as regent. Sooloo now +wished to throw off the yoke of Borneo, and through the intrigues of +the regent succeeded in doing so, as well as in retaining possession +of the eastern side of Borneo, from Maludu Bay on the north to Tulusyan +on the south, which has ever since been a part of the Sooloo territory. + +This event took place before Islamism became the prevailing religion; +but which form of idolatry, the Sooloos pretend, is not now known. It +is, however, believed the people on the coast were Bud[d]hists, +while those of the interior were Pagans. + +The first Sultan of Sooloo was Kamaludin, and during his reign +one Sayed Alli, a merchant, arrived at Sooloo from Mecca. He was +a sherif, and soon converted one-half the islanders to his own +faith. He was elected sultan on the death of Kamaludin, and reigned +seven years, in the course of which he became celebrated throughout +the archipelago. Dying at Sooloo, a tomb was erected to him there, +and the island came to be looked upon by the faithful as the Mecca +of the East, and continued to be resorted to as a pilgrimage until +the arrival of the Spaniards. + +Sayed Alli left a son called Batua, who succeeded him. The latter +had two sons, named Sabudin and Nasarudin, who, on the death of +their father, made war upon each other. Nasarudin, the youngest, +being defeated, sought refuge on Tawi Tawi, where he established +himself, and built a fort for his protection. The difficulties +were finally compromised, and they agreed to reign together over +Sooloo. Nasarudin had two sons, called Amir and Bantilan, of whom the +former was named as successor to the two brothers, and on their deaths +ascended the throne. During his reign another sherif arrived from +Mecca, who succeeded in converting the remainder of the population +to Islamism. Bantilan and his brother Amir finally quarrelled, and +the latter was driven from Sooloo to seek refuge in the island of +Basillan, where he became sultan. [70] + +On the arrival of the Spaniards in 1566, a kind of desultory war was +waged by them upon the various islands, in the hope of conquering +them and extending their religion. In these wars they succeeded in +gaining temporary possession of a part of Sooloo, and destroyed the +tomb of Sayed Alli. The Spaniards always looked upon the conversion +of the Moslems to the true Catholic faith with great interest; but in +the year 1646, the sultan of Magindanao succeeded in making peace, +by the terms of which the Spaniards withdrew from Sooloo, and were +to receive from the sultan three cargoes of rice annually as a tribute. + +In 1608, the small-pox made fearful ravages, and most of the +inhabitants fled from the scourge. Among these was the heir apparent, +during whose absence the throne became vacant, and another was elected +in his stead. This produced contention for a short time, which ended +in the elected maintaining his place. + +This tribute continued to be paid until the flight of Amir to Basillan, +about the year 1752, where he entered into a secret correspondence +with the authorities at Samboangan, and after two years a vessel was +sent from Manilla, which carried him to that capital, where he was +treated as a prisoner of state. + +In June, 1759, an English ship, on board of which was Dalrymple, +then in the service of the East India Company, arrived at Sooloo on a +trading voyage. Dalrymple remained at Sooloo for three months, engaged +in making sales and purchases. The Sultan Bantilan treated him with +great kindness, and sought the interest of Dalrymple to obtain the +liberation of his brother, who was now held prisoner by the Spaniards +at Manilla, by telling him of his brother's wife, who had been left +behind when Amir quitted the island, and had been delivered of twins, +after he had been kidnapped by the Spaniards. Dalrymple entered into +a pledge to restore Amir, and at the same time effected a commercial +treaty between the East India Company and the Sooloo chiefs. By this +it was stipulated that an annual cargo should be sent to Sooloo, +and sold at one hundred per cent. profit, for which a return cargo +should be provided for the China market, which should realize an +equal profit there, after deducting all expenses. The overplus, if +any, was to be carried to the credit of the Sooloos. This appears to +have been the first attempt made by the English to secure a regular +commercial intercourse with this archipelago. + +In the year 1760, a large fleet of Spanish vessels sailed from Manilla, +with about two thousand men, having the Sultan Amir on board, to +carry on a war against Sooloo. + +On their arrival, they began active operations. They were repelled on +all sides, and after seven days' ineffectual attempts, they gave up +their design. They returned to Manilla, it is said, with a loss of half +their number, and without having done any injury to the Sooloos. Not +discouraged with this failure, the Spaniards, about two years after, +organized a still larger force, which is estimated by some accounts +as high as ten thousand men. Although this failed in its attempts +on the fort at Soung, the Spaniards obtained possession of Tanjong +Matonda, one of the small ports on the island, where they erected +a church and fort. Here they established a colony, and appointed +a governor. The inhabitants upon this deserted their habitations +in the neighbourhood, and fled to the mountains, which, it is said, +excited the mountaineers, a host of whom, with their chief, whose name +was Sri Kala, determined to rush upon the Spaniards, and annihilate +them. Having to contend against disciplined troops, it was not an +easy task to succeed. But Sri Kala had a follower, named Sigalo, +who offered to lead the host to battle against the Spaniards, and +to exterminate them, or to die in the attempt. The chief accepted +his offer, and Sigalo, with a chosen few, marched towards the fort, +leaving the rest of the mountaineers in readiness to join them at an +appointed signal, and rush into the fort en masse. + +Sri Kala and Sigalo, in order to lull the watchfulness of the +Spaniards, took with them a young woman, of exquisite beauty, named +Purmassuri. The lustful Spaniards were thus thrown off their guard, +the signal was given, and the host, rushing forward, entered the +fort, every Spaniard within which was slain. A few only, who were +on the outside, escaped to the vessels, which set sail, and after +encountering various mishaps, returned to Manilla + +Some time after this the Sultan Bantilan died, and his son Alimud-deen +was proclaimed sultan. Dalrymple did not return until 1762, with a part +of the appointed cargo; but the vessel in which the larger part had +been shipped, failed to arrive, from not being able to find Sooloo, +and went to China. Thence she proceeded to Manilla, and afterwards +to Sooloo. The captain of the latter vessel gave a new credit to the +Sooloos, before they had paid for their first cargo; and on the arrival +of Dalrymple the next time, he found that the small-pox had carried +off a large number of the inhabitants, from which circumstance all +his hopes of profit were frustrated. He then obtained for the use of +the East India Company, a grant of the island of Balambangan, which +lies off the north end of Borneo, forming one side of the Straits of +Balabac, the western entrance to the Sooloo Sea. Here he proposed to +establish a trading port, and after having visited Madras, he took +possession of this island in 1763. + +In October, 1763, the English took Manilla, [71] where the Sultan Amir +was found by Dalrymple, who engaged to reinstate him on his throne, +if he would cede to the English the north end of Borneo, as well +as the south end of Palawan. This he readily promised, and he was, +in consequence, carried back to Sooloo, and reinstated; his nephew, +Alim-ud-deen, readily giving place to him, and confirming the grant +to the East India Company, in which the Ruma Bechara joined. + +After various arrangements, the East India Company took possession of +Balambangan, in the year 1773, and formed a settlement there with a +view of making it an emporium of trade for Eastern commodities. Troops +and stores were sent from India, and the population began to increase +by settlers, both Chinese and Malays, who arrived in numbers. In the +year 1775, the fort, notwithstanding all the treaties and engagements +between Dalrymple and the Sultan, was surprised by the Sultan, and many +of the garrison put to death. This virtually put an end to the plans +of the English, although another attempt was made to re-establish +the settlement by Colonel Farquhar, in 1803; but it was thought to +be too expensive a post, and was accordingly abandoned in the next +year. This act of the Sooloos fairly established their character +for perfidy, and ever since that transaction they have been looked +upon as treacherous in the highest degree, and, what is singular, +have been allowed to carry on their piracies quite unmolested. The +taking of Balambangan has been generally imputed to the treacherous +disposition and innate love of plunder among the Sooloos, as well as to +their fear that it would destroy the trade of Sooloo by injuring all +that of the archipelago. But there are strong reasons for believing +that this dark deed owed its origin in part to the influence of the +Spaniards and Dutch, who looked with much distrust upon the growth of +the rival establishment. Such was the jealousy of the Spaniards, that +the governor of the Philippines peremptorily required that Balambangan +should be evacuated. The Sooloos boast of the deed, and admit that +they received assistance from both Samboangan and Ternate, the two +nearest Spanish and Dutch ports. These nations had great reasons to +fear, the establishment of a power like that of the East India Company, +in a spot so favorably situated to secure the trade of the surrounding +islands, possessing fine harbours, and in every way adapted to become +a great commercial depot. Had it been held by the East India Company +but for a few years, it must have become what Singapore is now. + +The original planner of this settlement is said to have been Lord +Pigot; but the merit of carrying it forward was undoubtedly due to +Dalrymple, whose enterprising mind saw the advantage of the situation, +and whose energy was capable of carrying the project successfully +forward. + +Since the capture of Balambangan, there has been no event in the +history of Sooloo that has made any of the reigns of the Sultans +memorable, although fifteen have since ascended the throne. + +Sooloo has from all the accounts very much changed in its character +as well as population since the arrival of the Spaniards, and the +establishment of their authority in the Philippines. Before that +event, some accounts state that the trade with the Chinese was +of great extent, and that from four to five hundred junks arrived +annually from Cambojia, with which Sooloo principally traded. At that +time the population is said to have equalled in density that of the +thickly-settled parts of China. + +The government has also undergone a change; for the sultan, who +among other Malay races is usually despotic, is here a mere cipher, +and the government has become an oligarchy. This change has probably +been brought about by the increase of the privileged class of datus, +all of whom are entitled to a seat in the Ruma Bechara until about +the year 1810, when the great inconvenience of so large a council +was felt, and it became impossible to control it without great +difficulty and trouble on the part of the sultan. The Ruma Bechara +was then reduced until it contained but six of the principal datus, +who assumed the power of controlling the state. The Ruma Bechara, +however, in consequence of the complaints of many powerful datus, +was enlarged; but the more powerful, and those who have the largest +numerical force of slaves, still rule over its deliberations. The whole +power, within the last thirty years, has been usurped by one or two +datus, who now have monopolized the little foreign trade that comes +to these islands. The sultan has the right to appoint his successor, +and generally names him while living. In default of this, the choice +devolves upon the Ruma Bechara, who elect by a majority. + +From a more frequent intercourse with Europeans and the discovery +of new routes through these seas, the opportunities of committing +depredations have become less frequent, and the fear of detection +greater. By this latter motive they are more swayed than by any thing +else, and if the Sooloos have ever been bold and daring robbers on +the high seas, they have very much changed. + +Many statements have been made and published relative to the piracies +committed in these seas, which in some cases exceed, and in others +fall short, of the reality. Most of the piratical establishments are +under the rule, or sail under the auspices of the Sultan or Ruma +Bechara of Sooloo, who are more or less intimately connected with +them. The share of the booty that belongs to the Sultan and Ruma +Bechara, is twenty-five per cent. on all captures, whilst the datus +receive a high price for the advance they make of guns and powder, +and for the services of their slaves. + +The following are the piratical establishments of Sooloo, obtained +from the most authentic sources, published as well as verbal. The +first among these is the port of Soung, at which we anchored, in +the island of Sooloo; not so much from the number of men available +here for this pursuit, as the facility of disposing of the goods. By +the Spaniards they are denominated Illanun or Lanuns pirates. [72] +There are other rendezvous on Pulo Toolyan, at Bohol, Tonho, Pilas, +Tawi Tawi, Sumlout, Pantutaran, Parodasan, Palawan, and Basillan, +and Tantoli on Celebes. [73] These are the most noted, but there are +many minor places, where half a dozen prahus are fitted out. Those of +Sooloo, and those who go under the name of the Lanuns, have prahus of +larger size, and better fitted. They are from twenty to thirty tons +burden and are propelled by both sails and oars. They draw but little +water, are fast sailers, and well adapted for navigating through these +dangerous seas. These pirates are supposed to possess in the whole +about two hundred prahus, which usually are manned with from forty to +fifty pirates; the number therefore engaged in this business, may be +estimated at ten thousand. They are armed with muskets, blunderbusses, +krises, hatchets, and spears, and at times the vessels have one or +two large guns mounted. They infest the Straits of Macassar, the Sea +of Celebes, and the Sooloo Sea. Soung is the only place where they +can dispose of their plunder to advantage, and obtain the necessary +outfits. It may be called the principal resort of these pirates, +where well directed measures would result in effectually suppressing +the crime. + +Besides the pirates of Sooloo, the commerce of the Eastern islands +is vexed with other piratical establishments. In the neighbouring +seas, there are the Malay pirates, who have of late years become +exceedingly troublesome. Their prahus are of much smaller size +than those of Sooloo, being from ten to twelve tons burden, but in +proportion they are much better manned, and thus are enabled to ply +with more efficiency their oars or paddles. These prahus frequent the +shores of the Straits of Malacca, Cape Romania, the Carimon Isles, +and the neighbouring straits, and at times they visit the Straits +of Rhio. Some of the most noted, I was informed, were fitted out +from Johore, in the very neighbourhood of the English authorities at +Singapore; they generally have their haunts on the small islands on +the coast, from which they make short cruises. + +They are noted for their arrangements for preventing themselves +from receiving injury, in the desperate defences that are sometimes +made against them. These small prahus have usually swivels mounted, +which, although not of great calibre, are capable of throwing a shot +beyond the range of small-arms. It is said that they seldom attempt an +attack unless the sea is calm, which enables them to approach their +victims with more assurance of success, on account of the facility +with which they are enabled to manage their boats. The frequent +calms which occur in these seas between the land and sea breezes, +afford them many opportunities of putting their villa[i]nous plans in +operation; and the many inlets and islets, with which they are well +acquainted, afford places of refuge and ambush, and for concealing +their booty. They are generally found in small flotillas of from six +to twenty prahus, and when they have succeeded in disabling a vessel +at long shot, the sound of the gong is the signal for boarding, +which if successful, results in a massacre more or less bloody, +according to the obstinacy of the resistance they have met with. + +In the winter months, the Straits of Malacca are most infected +with them; and during the summer, the neighbourhood of Singapore, +Point Romania, and the channels in the vicinity. In the spring, +from February to May, they are engaged in procuring their supplies, +in fishing, and refitting their prahus for the coming year. + +I have frequently heard plans for the suppression of these pirates, +particularly of those in the neighbourhood of the settlements under +British rule. The European authorities are much to blame for the +quiescent manner in which they have so long borne these depredations, +and many complaints are made that Englishmen, on being transplanted +to India, lose that feeling of horror for deeds of blood, such as are +constantly occurring at their very doors, which they would experience +in England. There are, however, many difficulties to overcome before +operations against the pirates can be effective. The greatest of +these is the desire of the English to secure the goodwill of the +chiefs of the tribes by whom they are surrounded. They thus wink at +their piracies on the vessels of other nations, or take no steps to +alleviate the evils of slavery. Indeed the language that one hears +from many intelligent men who have long resided in that part of the +world is, that in no country where civilization exists does slavery +exhibit so debasing a form as in her Indian possessions. Another +difficulty consists in the want of minute knowledge of the coasts, +inlets, and hiding-places of the pirates, and this must continue to +exist until proper surveys are made. This done, it would be necessary +to employ vessels that could pursue the pirates every where, for +which steamers naturally suggest themselves. [74] + +What will appear most extraordinary is, that the very princes who +are enjoying the stipend for the purchase of the site whereon the +English authority is established, are believed to be the most active +in equipping the prahus for these piratical expeditions; yet no notice +is taken of them, although it would be so easy to control them by +withholding payment until they had cleared themselves from suspicion, +or by establishing residents in their chief towns. + +Another, and a very different race of natives who frequent the Sooloo +Archipelago, must not be passed by without notice. These are the Bajow +[75] divers or fishermen, to whom Sooloo is indebted for procuring the +submarine treasures with which her seas are stored. They are also very +frequently employed in the biche de mar or tripang fisheries among +the islands to the south. The Bajows generally look upon Macassar as +their principal place of resort. They were at one time believed to +be derived from Johore, on the Malayan peninsula; at another to be +Buguese; but they speak the Sooloo dialect, and are certainly derived +from some of the neighbouring islands. The name of Bajows, in their +tongue, means fishermen. From all accounts, they are allowed to pursue +their avocations in peace, and are not unfrequently employed by the +piratical datus, and made to labour for them. They resort to their +fishing-grounds in fleets of between one and two hundred sail, having +their wives and children with them, and in consequence of the tyranny +of the Sooloos, endeavour to place themselves under the protection +of the flag of Holland, by which nation this useful class of people +is encouraged. The Sooloo seas are comparatively little frequented by +them, as they are unable to dispose of the produce of their fisheries +for want of a market, and fear the exactions of the datus. Their prahus +are about five tons each. The Bajows at some islands are stationary, +but are for the most part constantly changing their ground. The Spanish +authorities in the Philippines encourage them, it is said, to frequent +their islands, as without them they would derive little benefit from +the banks in the neighbouring seas, where quantities of pearl-oysters +are known to exist, which produce pearls of the finest kind. The +Bajows are inoffensive and very industrious, and in faith Mahomedans. + +The climate of Sooloo during our short stay, though warm, was +agreeable. The time of our visit was in the dry season, which lasts +from October to April, and alternates with the wet one from May till +September. June and July are the windy months, when strong breezes +blow from the westward. In the latter part of August and September, +strong gales are felt from the south, while in December and January +the winds are found to come from the northward; but light winds +usually prevail from the southwest during the wet season, and from the +opposite quarter, the dry, following closely the order of the monsoons +in the China seas. As to the temperature, the climate is very equable, +the thermometer seldom rising above 90 deg. or falling below 70 deg. + +Diseases are few, and those that prevail arise from the manner in +which the natives live. They are from that cause an unhealthy-looking +race. The smallpox has at various times raged with great violence +throughout the group, and they speak of it with great dread. Few of +the natives appear to be marked with it, which may have been owing, +perhaps, to their escaping this disorder for some years. Vaccination +has not yet been introduced among them, nor have they practised +inoculation. + +Notwithstanding Soung was once the Mecca of the East, its people +have but little zeal for the Mahomedan faith. It was thought at one +time that they had almost forgotten its tenets, in consequence of +the neglect of all their religious observances. The precepts which +they seem to regard most are that of abstaining from swine's flesh, +and that of being circumcised. Although polygamy is not interdicted, +few even of the datus have more than one wife. + +Soung Road offers good anchorage; and supplies of all kinds may be +had in abundance. Beef is cheap, and vegetables and fruit at all +seasons plenty. + +Our observations placed the town in latitude 6 deg. 10' N., longitude 120 deg. +55' 51'' E. + +On the 6th, having concluded the treaty (a copy of which will be found +in Appendix XIII) [76] and the other business that had taken me to +Sooloo, we took our departure for the Straits of Balabac, the western +entrance into this sea, with a fine breeze to the eastward. By noon +we had reached the group of Pangootaaraang, [77] consisting of five +small islands. All of these are low, covered with trees, and without +lagoons. They presented a great contrast to Sooloo, which was seen +behind us in the distance. The absence of the swell of the ocean in +sailing through this sea is striking, and gives the idea of navigating +an extensive bay, on whose luxuriant islands no surf breaks. There are, +however, sources of danger that incite the navigator to watchfulness +and constant anxiety; the hidden shoals and reefs, and the sweep of +the tide, which leave him no control over his vessel. + +Through the night, which was exceedingly dark, we sounded every +twenty minutes, but found no bottom; and at daylight on the 7th, +we made the islands of Cagayan Sooloo, [78] in latitude 7 deg. 03' +30'' N., longitude 118 deg. 37' E. The tide or current was passing the +islands to the west-southwest, three-quarters of a mile per hour; we +had soundings of seventy-five fathoms. Cagayan Sooloo has a pleasant +appearance from the sea, and may be termed a high island. It is less +covered with undergrowth and mangrove-bushes than the neighbouring +islands, and the reefs are comparatively small. It has fallen off in +importance, and by comparing former accounts with those I received, +and from its present aspect, it would seem that it has decreased +both in population and products. Its caves formerly supplied a large +quantity of edible birds'-nests; large numbers of cattle were to be +found upon it; and its cultivation was carried on to some extent. These +articles of commerce are not so much attended to at the present time, +and the biche de mar and tortoise-shell, formerly brought hither, +are now carried to other places. There is a small anchorage on the +west side, but we did not visit it. There are no dangers near these +small islands that may not be guarded against. Our survey extended +only to their size and situation, as I deemed it my duty to devote +all the remainder of the time I had to spare to the Straits of Balabac. + +[Proceeding, our author relates the stay of the vessel in, and +describes, the Mangsee Islands, Balabac, and Balambangan, about which +various scientific observations were carried on. "Lieutenant Perry, +... near a small beach on the island of Balambangan, encountered +some Sooloos, who were disposed to attack him. The natives, no +doubt, were under the impression that the boats were from some +shipwrecked vessel. They were all well-armed, and apparently prepared +to take advantage of the party if possible; but, by the prudence and +forbearance of this officer, collision was avoided, and his party saved +from an attack." The British colony established on this island in 1773, +dwindled steadily until 1775 when the pirates rushed the garrison +and massacred almost every man. The work of Rajah Brooke in Sarawak +is mentioned, and the Dyaks described. Continuing Mr. Wilkes says:] + +As the principal objects of my visit were to ascertain the disposition +and resources of the Sooloos for trade, and to examine the straits +leading into the Sooloo seas, in order to facilitate the communication +with China, by avoiding on the one hand the eastern route, and on +the other the dangers of the Palawan Passage, it may be as well to +give the result of the latter inquiry, referring those who may be +more particularly interested to the Hydrographical Atlas and Memoir. + +The difficulties in the Palawan Passage arising from heavy seas and +fresh gales do not exist in the Sooloo Sea, nor are the shoals so +numerous or so dangerous. In the place of storms and rough water, +smooth seas are found, and for most of the time moderate breezes, +which do not subject a vessel to the wear and tear experienced in +beating up against a monsoon. + +The Straits of Balabac may be easily reached, either from Singapore, +or by beating up along the western shore to Borneo. When the straits +are reached, a vessel by choosing her time, may easily pass through +them by daylight, even by beating when the wind is ahead. Once +through, the way is clear, with the exception of a few coral lumps; +the occasional occurrence of the north wind will enable a vessel to +pass directly to the shores of the island of Panay. A fair wind will +ordinarily prevail along that island, and, as I have already mentioned, +it may be approached closely. The passage through to the eastward of +Mindoro Island may be taken in preference to that on the west side +through the Mindoro Strait, and thus all the reefs and shoals will +be avoided. Thence, the western coast of Luzon will be followed to +the north, as in the old route. + +I do not think it necessary to point out any particular route through +the Sooloo Sea, as vessels must be guided chiefly as the winds blow, +but I would generally avoid approaching the Sooloo Islands, as the +currents are more rapid, and set rather to the southward. Wherever +there is anchorage, it would be advisable to anchor at night, as much +time might thus be saved, and a knowledge of the currents, or sets +of the tides obtained. Perhaps it would be as well to caution those +who are venturesome, that it is necessary to keep a good look-out, +and those who are timid, that there does not appear to be much danger +from the piratical prahus, unless a vessel gets on shore: in that +case it will not be long before they will be seen collecting in the +horizon in large numbers. + +The treaty that I made with the Sultan, if strictly enforced on +the first infraction, will soon put an end to all the dangers to +be apprehended from them. To conclude, I am satisfied that under +ordinary circumstances, to pass through the Sooloo Sea will shorten by +several days the passage to Manilla or Canton, and be a great saving +of expense in the wear and tear of a ship and her canvass. + +[On the eighteenth of February, the ship reaches the Straits of +Singapore, where they find the other three vessels of the fleet, +namely, the "Porpoise," the "Oregon," and "Flying-Fish."] + + + + + + +LETTER FROM FATHER QUIRICO MORE, TO THE FATHER SUPERIOR OF THE MISSION + + + Davao, January 20, 1885. + + Pax Christi. + My well beloved in Christ, the Father Superior: + + +Several times I have designed to address your Reverence in regard to +the Moros of this gulf, but after the observation of your Reverence +of the second of last December, I have been unwilling to postpone +longer to set about this matter. + +I have read some statistical works, both official and semi-official, +which treat of the population [79] of this gulf, and I have noticed +that in general more importance is given to the Moros of this district +than is theirs, and a greater number of people than in reality +exists. The reason for this general error lies in the fact that the +Moros quite regularly live along the coasts and at the mouths of the +large rivers, while the heathens of other races live as a general +rule in the interior of the island. Consequently, the Moros form, as +it were, a sort of barrier or screen which prevents the heathens from +being seen, and worse yet, hinders us from becoming acquainted with +them, and alluring and gaining them for God and the fatherland. That +would be easy of attainment, if once this phantom of the Moros were +laid. That can be easily attained if one remembers what the Moros of +Davao are, whom I shall endeavor to show forth in this letter. + +We are making a bit of history, as one commonly says. Shortly before +the conquest, which was concluded by Don Jose Oyanguren [80] in the +year 1848, the pontin [81] "San Rufo," which had been equipped by one +of the commercial houses of Manila, had come to Davao. The captain and +second officer of the said boat were Spaniards, and in addition they +were accompanied by an Italian who was a private trader. They had a +letter of recommendation from the sultan of Mindanao, for the datos +of the sea of Davao, which charged those datos to receive those of the +"San Rufo" as friends. The Moros of this place pretended to respect the +letter of the sultan, and engaged in trade with the men of the boat, +offering them friendship and a considerable quantity of wax in exchange +for their effects. But taking advantage of the opportunity, when the +majority of the crew were some distance from the boat fishing with +the ship's skiff, the Moros presented themselves armed with krises, +spears, and balaraos, bringing with them, in order to conceal their +mischievous intentions, considerable wax for barter. The interpreter +informed the captain that so many Moros, so well armed on an occasion +when there were scarcely any men in the boat gave rise to suspicions +regarding their intentions. The captain replied that he did not fear +the Moros. The pilot remonstrated, saying that it would not do any harm +to take a few precautions. To this the captain replied: "Are you afraid +of the Moros?" "Although we do not fear them," added the pilot, "that +is no reason why we should scorn the advice of the interpreter." "Well, +if you wish it," said the captain, "have a sentinel posted with musket +ready." Accordingly the sentinel was posted, and in addition one of +the Europeans and the interpreter prepared their arms also. All this +time more and more Moros were continually arriving. They contrived +to isolate the Europeans and separate them from one another. When +they were most busily engaged in examining and weighing the wax, +those assassins drew their krises at a given signal. Two reports rang +out and two Moros fell dead, but in a few moments, the heads of the +Christians rolled on the ground. The only ones left alive were two +servants, that of the captain and that of the Italian, whom the Moros +retained as slaves. These men after a few days, seized a baroto and +escaped in it, made the crossing to Pundaguitan, whence they went +to Surigao to give notice of what had occurred in the "San Rufo," +believing that the seamen who were fishing at the time of the attack, +had also been assassinated. Those seamen on seeing what was occurring +on the "San Rufo" escaped in a small boat to the Hijo River, whence +they went overland to Linao (now Bunauan). All of the above was told me +by one of the two servants, who had been captured and had escaped. That +servant returned later with Oyanguren, and acted on several occasions +as my helmsman, and finally died in the shipwreck of Father Vivero. + +When that crime was reported in Manila, satisfaction was demanded of +the sultan of Mindanao. The latter answered that he had no subjects +in Davao, and that he did not consider the Moros of this bay as such, +since they had disobeyed his orders; and accordingly that the Spanish +government was to deal with them directly. By virtue of that, from +that moment the Moros of Davao must be considered as independent and +separate from the rest of the Moros. Consequently, if the Spanish +government has complete liberty of action anywhere in regard to the +Moros, it is doubtless in this gulf of Davao. + +Thereupon the expedition of Oyanguren came, and had made the conquest +of this gulf in a very short time, those Moros who had remained here +after a great part of them had emigrated to the bay of Sarangani and +the lake of Buluan surrendering at discretion. + +When Oyanguren came, the Moros were complete masters of the island of +Samal, [82] whose inhabitants had risen en masse to unite with the +Spanish against their oppressors the Moros. They also dominated the +Mandayas, and collected tribute from all of them even from those of +the ilaya [83] of Caraga, and were engaged in continual war with the +Bilanes, Manobos, and Atas. [84] At present the Mandayas, who are in +some manner subject to the Moros, number, according to my calculation, +some seven thousand. One cannot estimate or approximate to the number +of the Atas who pay tribute to them. The other races are not at all +subject to the Moros and do not pay any tribute to them. + +It is difficult to fix exactly the number of the Moros who live on +this gulf at present. Their nomadic customs and the ease with which +they change their habitation, sometimes moving to a great distance, +make a little less than impossible an exact list of them. However, +I believe that their approximate number is 4,000. If they exceed that +number, I do not believe that they reach 5,000, and as well I do not +believe that they are less than 3,000. The place that they generally +choose for their home, as I have before suggested, is the coast or +the mouth of rivers navigable for their small boats. + +When any governor of this district urges them with instance to +make a village, they make, as it were, an excuse for a settlement, +carrying out the plan which the governor himself, or some Spaniard +in the name of the governor, or some other intelligent person, gives +them. They will construct, if it is desired, their so-called houses +at the distances which are marked out for them, but they will never +reconcile themselves with any kind of cultivation, or with cleanliness, +or the repair of what gets out of order. In reality, in the short +time that their villages have form, the filth, the nakedness, and the +general wretchedness, cause them to present so repugnant an aspect, +that no one can show a desire for their preservation; and as soon +as the governor ceases to investigate them, those villages melt away +like salt in water. + +To the right of Davao, several attempts have been made to form the +Moro village of Daron by bringing together the small Moro rancherias +of Taumo, Baludo, and Obango, which are the only rancherias between +Davao and the point of Culaman in sight of Sarangani. That village, +in the days of its greatest apogee, would lodge at most one hundred +Moro families, who always tend to be split up into small rancherias. + +On the other side of Point Banus, from which one can begin to descry +the islands of Sarangani there was another rancheria of Sanguil. [85] +Moros of about one hundred families. That rancheria was settled +there under the protection of an Indian, who had served his time +in the navy, who fixed his residence there in the quality of agent +or abonado [i.e., representative] of the traders of Davao. At the +present time that petty trader has moved his residence to Nuin +opposite the islands of Sarangani, and it appears that those Moros +have followed him. But wherever they have fixed their residence, +left to themselves, they are threatened with destruction. For that +swarm of Bilanes, Manobos, and Tagacaolos [86] which surrounds them, +warlike races who have never been subdued by the Moros, will always +consider them as enemies, and will always reckon them in the first +line to give an end to their personal and racial vengeance. + +In support of my assertion, I shall tell your Reverence an episode +just as it was told to me a long while ago. Some years before +the conquest of Davao, the Moros, pursuing the piratical habits +peculiar to their race, knifed the crew of a banca which was on +its way from Pundaguitan, a Christian village at Cape San Agustin, +to the tortoise-shell fisheries at the island of Olaniban, the third +and smallest island of the Sarangani. It was a coincidence that the +said banca was manned by members of the most influential families +of both shores of this gulf from San Agustin and Culaman. Vengeance +in the Manobo style was not long delayed. The members of the latter +race beheaded as many of the Moros as they could find alone. But later +some sort of a settlement was made among them. The Moros paid the fine +imposed on them by the other races, but the latter did not cease to be +hostile for all that. They have reduced the few Mahometans remaining +between Malalag and Sarangani to so precarious a situation that, +according to my mode of thinking, their greatest and only guaranty +is in the respect that those heathens profess for the Spanish banner. + +It is not my design to discuss now the islands and bay, or harbor +of Sarangani, places which formed my gilded dream for many years. I +shall not be many months in writing to your Reverence a letter with +the data which I have gathered, and other data which I am acquiring +in regard to those islands and that bay. [87] In that letter I will +relate my opinion of those kindly heathens who left so pleasing an +impression on the minds of us five missionaries who have visited them, +namely Fathers Lluch, Bove, Puntas, Vivero, and the writer. + +Just a few words now concerning the Moros to the left of Davao. One +legua from this capital, and along the beach, lies the Moro village +of Lanang, which has passed through the same sudden changes as has +the village of Daron. The said village is formed by the malcontents +of the various datarias [88] of this gulf, beginning with the ilayas +of Davao. Their progress and setbacks have been proportioned to the +tact and vigilance of the governors. Some cultivation of cocoas +is seen on that coast, in part by the Moros and in part by the +Christians of the vicinity. At the present time there are no more +than twenty-five houses (if their huts can be so called), of which +very few are finished. The greater part of them remain since a long +time ago in process of construction. + +Following the same coast toward the north of the gulf, and some three +leguas distant, one encounters the rancheria of the river Lasan. The +most remarkable thing about that rancheria is that it shelters one +of the most famous of the directors of Moro politics in this gulf, +namely, one Lasad. Some Christians from Cagayan in Misamis have come +to their ilaya, according to report. The Moros have never even formed +an excuse for a village there, but live scattered in tiny hamlets, +or in miserable huts more or less contiguous to one another over a +territory spread out over two or three leguas up stream. + +Some two leguas farther, and following the coast, and near the +Tuganay River is situated the Moro rancheria of Tagum, a name which +is derived from the largest river of this bay which empties near +the Tuganay. That rancheria is the most ungovernable and the most +famous for the gloomy tragedies that have happened there from time +immemorial even to our days. When the murders of four Christians in +July of last year happened, the Moros of that rancheria had a village +of about forty houses in process of construction, but it is now almost +entirely abandoned. + +Some two leguas farther following the same coast are found the river +and rancheria of Madaum, which contains, it is reported, about one +hundred families. + +A very short distance from the preceding lies the rancheria of +the Hijo River, which is famous for having been the last bulwark +of the Moros at the time of the conquest of Davao. Senor Oyanguren +and a distinguished chief of our militia went there in the steamboat +"Elcano." It is said that after the Moros had surrendered, and while +Oyanguren and the datos were arranging the conditions of submission, +a young Mahometan snatched the sword from the hands of the leader +alluded to, and took to his heels without the balls of the sentinels +being able to reach him. That was a boldness that gave the Christians +much to think over. A few years ago I was told that they still +preserved the hilt of the said sword. At present that rancheria is +governed by Dato Nonong, one of the most highly-considered Moros of +this gulf. It has scarcely one hundred families, and the attempt has +been made several times to make that dato form a village. + +The small rancherias of Cupiat and Laji which may be considered +as small suburbs or barrios of Hijo and Matiao respectively have +absolutely no importance. + +Matiao, famed during these last few years for the frequent sacrifices +of heathen Mandayas, is the landing-place for the small boats that ply +from Liboac in the northern part of Samal to the eastern shore of the +gulf. There are about one hundred Moro families there, who have never +formed a village, but live scattered along both sides of the Matiao +River, and in the neighboring places of Quinquin and Canipa. Dato +Lasad, of whom I have already made mention, is, as it were, lord of +the lives and possessions, not only of his Moro subjects, but as well +of those unfortunate Mandayas who live in the vicinity of Matiao. + +On the other side of the mountains called Linao, whose spurs reach +the sea, is found a large plain, extending from the salt-water river +called Piso to Cuabu. Scattered through that plain and especially on +the banks of the rivers there, live also about one hundred and twenty +Moro families, who are under the datos Tumarus, Compao, and Patarandan. + +On the beach and near the mouth of the Sumlug River, lies an excuse +for a Moro village, which consists of about twenty houses which were +built by order, and under the general conditions of the Moro villages +of this gulf. + +Your Reverence knows already that there is not a single Moro family +in all the peninsula of San Agustin. It remains for me, then, to tell +your Reverence of the last and most numerous Moro rancheria of this +district of Davao. It is the rancheria of Mayo, so called because it +took its name from the bay of Mayo, the point where its most principal +datos live. However, in appearance all those Moros owe homage to Dato +Tumarus of Sumlug. Including all the Moros of the harbor of Mati, +the bay of Mayo, and the Baguan River to the other side of Point +Tagobon, there are about one hundred and fifty families. They have +never formed a village. Some years back a governor ordered all those +Moros to form a village in Sumlug, but they had sufficient cunning to +frustrate that just and wise order, in order that they might continue +to live in the manner in which they had lived thitherto. + +The Moros who live about this large gulf, Father, are the remains of +those powerful and warlike Moros who in the not distant past collected +tribute from the Mandayas and other heathens as far as those living +on the Caraga River, and who extended their piratical raids to the +villages of the Pacific. But they were completely conquered by worthy +Don Jose Oyanguren in the year 1848. + +Two classes in the manner of two races must be distinguished among +these Moros: that of the datos which is, as it were, the aristocracy; +and that of the plebeians who obey the datos. The panditas (for so +do they call the priests of their false religion) are included among +both classes, although it is more general for them to belong to the +first. They form, as it were, an hereditary priesthood. + +In general, the datos and their families do not work. At the most they +fish and hunt for sport, and to stifle the pangs of hunger. Their +chief and most honorable receipts are from the tributes which they +collect from their subjects and from the heathens whom they have +subdued. That tribute is called the pagdato. Although that source of +wealth is the chief, it is not the only source. Although the Moros of +this gulf are conquered and subdued, they have not completely forgotten +their former customs of piracy. Slavery and captivity with their awful +accompaniment of murders, thefts, poisons, and violence of every sort, +and further, the human sacrifices which accompany them at times, form +a very productive source of wealth for the ever exhausted chests of +their treasuries. I could write a very thick volume of the deeds of +this particular people which are very well known to me. + +All the heathens dominated by the Moros, and even many of the Moros +themselves, on approaching me, through the little confidence that +my person inspires, molest me by the relation of the Moro misdeeds, +telling me of the troubles and injustice which they suffer from the +Moros, and the acts of inhumanity of which they are the victims; +for they hope that I will protect them by causing that the guilty +ones will be given their deserts. + +As a proof of what I have said, and of the many things which I could +add, I give below the relation of what happened to me about one +year ago. I was on my way from Cuaba to Mati, and was accompanied +by a young man of about twenty years of age of the Mandaya race. He +together with his mother and two younger sisters had formerly been +captured by the Moro datos of the bay of Mayo. When we reached +Valete, pointing to a gagatpat tree, [89] he said to me: "Father, +they bound my mother by the hands and neck to that branch, and left +her half hanging there while they ate and rested." "And what was +their reason for binding your mother there in so inhuman a manner," +I asked. "In order that, since she would be tired out," he replied, +"by the forced position in which they kept her, she might not have +the strength to escape on the journey from this place to Sumlug." I +believe that that unfortunate woman is no longer living. The Moros +took her to Daron and no more has been heard of her, in spite of the +repeated efforts which her son has made to find her. The latter having +escaped from that bondage and having become a Christian, has not ceased +to employ all the resources that his filial love has roused in him in +order to see whether he can discover the abiding-place of his dear +mother. He thinks that the Moros of Daron sold her to the Bagabos, +and that the latter sacrificed her according to their custom. + +That slave trade, sa pag sucad, as it is graphically expressed by +Moros and heathen, or something to cover their necessities, is not +yet the worst thing of the Moro race. More mischievous to my way of +thinking is it for the progress and stability of this district, both in +religious matters and in civil and political matters, that the Moros +of this part have not yet lost their hope of being able to recover +their ancient power. They show this openly whenever any opportunity +arises. On that account they endeavor by all their efforts to maintain +their own organization in the very face of our government. They call +the dato of their choice Principal [i.e., Chief] and the captain or +gobernadorcillo and the other agents of justice appointed among them by +the governor of the district, they call Saliling, which is equivalent +to our Interino [i.e., incumbent of an office ad interim]. At times +they simply call the members of justice appointed by the governor +for them interinos, and consider them as secondary or entrusted +authorities. For as they say of themselves in their manner of speech, +"We are friendly to the Castilians, through force." Consequently, +they endure our rule for the present, but do not accept it. + +One of the recent occurrences which place in relief this desire of the +Moros in opposing our domination and recovering their lost prestige, +is found in the island of Samal. Those islanders who on seeing the +boats of Oyanguren remove the Mahometan yoke, and had passed over en +masse to the Spanish camp, gradually allowed their affection toward +us to cool, and again took the advice of their ancient masters, and +have opposed all the attempts that have been made for their formal +and real reduction. Taupan, who was, as it were, the dato or petty +king of the Samals, and who during the last year of his life, had +kept at a certain distance from the Spaniards, although he did not +for all that return entirely to the Moros, whom he had considered as a +very bad lot, died. His eldest son, named Severo, although a heathen, +showed us affection and respect, and had expressed to a Visayan in +his confidence his desire to have one of his children baptized. The +conversion of Severo would have been a great defeat for the party +of the Moros in Samal. Consequently, the eminent men among the Moro +faction took alarm before the thought of Severo converted. No less +than fourteen Moro datos of this gulf went to Samal, and when they +were all assembled, they elected as dato or chief of the Samals not +Severo to whom it belonged by hereditary right to succeed his father, +according to the custom of the Samals, but one who was thoroughly +trusted by the Moros. That was one Captain Batunun, that old man whom +your Reverence saw in Samal, and who talking as a Moro with Father +Juanmarti, held that long spear in front of the governor of the +district. Now then, there are two gobernadorcillos in Samal: Severo, +who besides being the legitimate successor of his father, was appointed +captain or gobernadorcillo by Governor Don Joaquin Rajal; and Batunun, +elected by the Moro datos, as I have related, and that later than the +official appointment of Severo. That means that they are resisting the +orders of our government directly, in order to oppose our domination, +and in order to recover the Moro practice of intermeddling in the +matters of the interior of the island of Samal. It is to be noted +that throughout the island of Samal, and along its coasts, there does +not exist any rancheria or group of Moros. Those who exercise that +baleful influence over the Samals are the Moros from other points, +of which I have already made mention. + +In regard to the Mandayas, whom the Moros will by no means recognize +as freed [from their rule], they will neither recognize them as +independent authorities, even with official titles which are sent by +the governor of the district, and are stamped with the seal of the +government, if the latter when appointed, do not communicate with them +by means of the Moro datos. If the Mandayas show a decided desire to +break that secular slavery, the Moros tell them without circumlocutions +that they will disappear without knowing how; and they cause them to +know underhandedly that the means which they will use to finish them, +will be by the poisons which they possess--some of them feigned and +named only to terrify the Mandayas, but others only too real and true. + +As the crown to what I have related, and in order that your Reverence +may be convinced of the resolute will of these Moros of opposing +by all means the reduction of the heathens and the gathering of +themselves together into formal villages, I will mention the most +transcendent deed that has happened in this district since the +coming of Oyanguren. This is the unfortunate killing and awful murder +committed by the Moros of Tagum on the person of Governor Don Jose +Pinzon y Purga and those who were with him. + +By certain ill-informed persons, that tragic event has been ascribed +to the urgency with which Pinzon, it is said, begged to wife the +daughter of a dato of Tagum. But being well informed by trustworthy +persons contemporaneous with the event, who accompanied the governor +on that sad journey, I am able to state that that idea is a calumny +and destitute of every foundation of truth. The deed as is related +by those persons, happened in the following manner. Senor Pinzon had +proposed to establish a numerous reduction of Mandayas at the mouth +of the Tagum River; and worked at it with great enthusiasm and good +success. Everything was ready and the heathens were summoned for a +given day, on which the said governor intended to go to inaugurate the +said reduction. The Moros, seeing that the project was succeeding, and +that all their plots in order to frustrate it were in vain, called in +the rest of their malice, and resolved to kill the governor. In effect, +they feigned that they were friendly to and desired the reduction. On +the appointed day they assembled at the place where the Mandayas +were to await the governor in order to plan the village. The first +chief of the village arrived and the datos received him with great and +feigned demonstrations of joy, and consented in all things to what the +governor proposed. Then they invited him to one of their rancherias, +where they said that they had prepared feasts in order to serve him +and to solemnize the inauguration of the new village, with another +unworthy offering, but one very suitable to the degrading customs +of the Moros. There were not lacking those so bold as to advise the +governor not to trust the Moros, for they were plotting some trick +against him. But they say that he laughed at everything, and replied "I +want to see whether what they tell me is true." Therefore he took eight +companions and went with the datos to their rancheria. A feast was held +there, and there was playing on culintangan, dances, etc., but not a +woman, large or small, was to be seen in the whole rancheria. At the +end of the ceremony, a dato invited the governor to enter an apartment, +and when the latter was about to lift the curtain, at that moment the +dato stabbed him violently in the back with his kris. Pinzon turned, +and wounded as he was, advanced toward the murderer. Already did he +have the latter at his mercy and unarmed, but before he could rise, +another dato ran in, and cut off Pinzon's head with a two-handed +blow. Meanwhile the other Moros were murdering the eight companions +of the unfortunate Pinzon in the lower part of the house. + +Such is the blackest event registered by the annals of this gulf, +which paralyzed for many years the reduction of the heathens. + +In my opinion the means that will resist the evil influence of the +Moros are: 1. To eliminate the offices of dato and pandita, implanting +in their stead in the Moro villages the legislation in force in the +Christian villages by naming municipalities with which the government +will deal directly. 2. The exclusion of holding public offices to +those who have been datos or panditas and their children. 3. Absolute +prohibition to the datos to continue the collection of tribute from +their own people and the heathens of other races. 4. The stipulation +and publication of the autonomy of the heathens in regard to the Moros, +prohibiting the latter absolutely from meddling in the affairs of the +heathens. 5. The intimation to all the heathens and Moros of their +obligation as men and as subjects of the crown of Espana, to live +in villages in a civilized manner. 6, and last. To reduce the Moros +into the least possible number of groups and away from the mouths of +the Tagum and Hijo rivers, where the members of the Mandaya race must +construct their villages, that being the nearest location. + +In my opinion the above are the means which, if faithfully followed +out, will reduce the pernicious influence of the Moros to a cipher, +and in a few years would cause an infinite number of villages to +flourish, which could be formed from the great multitude of heathens +of the various races who are scattered about the extensive gulf of +Davao. With that system, I also shelter the hope that very many Moros, +who do not belong to the class of the datos and panditas, will enter, +if it is not delayed, the net of Jesus Christ. + +With the half company which is on duty here, together with the +cuadrilleros and the marine forces who guard these waters, there is +more than sufficient for the accomplishment of all that I have stated +in the present letter. + +I commend myself many times to the holy prayers of your Reverence. + + + Your Reverence's servant in Christ, + + Quirico More, S. J. + + + + + + +LETTER FROM FATHER PEDRO ROSELL [90] TO THE FATHER SUPERIOR OF THE +MISSION [91] + + + Caraga, April 17, 1885. + + My dearly beloved Father Superior in Christ: + + +Although it is scarcely three weeks since my arrival from the visit +which Father Pastells and I made to the villages of the southern +part of this mission, I received your Reverence's both affectionate +and short letter of December 30 of last year, together with the +authorizations which you were pleased to send me under separate +covers. Ex intimo corde [92] I acknowledge to your Reverence both +letter and authorizations, and give you a thousand thanks for +them. And now desiring to pay so pleasing a favor with something +more [than thanks], I am going to write you a minute relation of the +last two excursions that we two fathers made together, for I know +the great consolation that your Reverence receives by the reading of +such relations, for besides the fact that you learn from them of the +condition and progress of your dear missions and of the fathers and +brothers who work in them, whom your Reverence loves with the true love +of a father, there is also seen in the same relations the not small +fruit that is obtained in souls by the mercy of God. Almost never is +there lacking the relation of some remarkable event or edifying deed +in the conquest of the heathens to our holy faith, which recreates the +spirit and invites one to praise the goodness of our sweet Jesus. Some +events of such a nature have occurred during the last two excursions +which I have carefully noted in order to relate them to your Reverence. + +We made our first excursion in December of last year, after the +feast of the Immaculate Conception of the most holy Virgin to the +visita of Santa Fe, which is distant two hours' journey from this +capital, and which is located at the end of the small bay which is the +terminal of Points Alisud de Caraga, and Sancol de Manurigao. About +five hundred and sixty-nine Christians who have been reduced from +the beliefs of the Mandayas in the space of the eight years since +it was founded by our fathers, form its population. This village is +one of the three which have been for a considerable time the aim of +the repeated attacks of the Baganis or assassins of the mountains of +Bungadon and Manlubuan. During the same days that we stayed there, +the murder of three Mandayas, sacopes of Captain Ciriaco Lanquibo, +who was recently converted to Christianity, happened in the fields +which are located between that village and that of Manurigao. A week +after we had returned to Caraga, we were informed that another like +murder had been committed on another unfortunate friendly Mandaya +near the said village of San Luis. So bold do those barbarians show +themselves, because there is no force with which to pursue them, +and they feel so secure in the places where they reside! + +At the date on which we went to Santa Fe, it had been quite a long +time since the said village had experienced any aggression from the +baganis. Consequently, the people were living somewhat free from +their past misery, and relieved of the frequent alarms and consequent +frights. However, they were suffering great famine on account of +the said aggressions, and because they had lost almost all the crops +of maize and sweet potatoes (the only things which they cultivate), +during that time because of the great and prolonged heat and the lack +of rain. They were supporting themselves on the few sweet potatoes +that had been saved, thanks to the humidity of the ground, and the +shade of the trees, and on the soft parts of convolvulus and palms +which grow along the shores of the rivers. In spite of so many and so +severe troubles, thanks be to God, there has not been hitherto, but two +families of San Luis who have become fugitives. That action has not at +all been because they repent of having become Christians, but for other +very different reasons. Those families have, however, now established +relations with the father and promised him to abandon the Dacungbanua +or lands of Magdagasang, where they are living at present, as soon as +they shall have harvested the palay of their fields, and settle in a +village other than the one in which they lived formerly. What a fine +example, then, Father Superior, of Christian fidelity and resignation +have those newly-reduced people given us in general, and how evident a +proof of their true conversion to Christianity! In my opinion, these +are results that ought to be attributed, after divine Grace (without +which no good thing can be done), especially to the plan which Father +Pastells has always followed in so far as it has been allowed him, in +the reduction of heathens. It is exclusively a system of attraction +by means of great charity, great mildness, continual patience, and +solid foundations upon which the village recently established rests; +namely, the foundations of a good inspector who continues to form +gradually in the village the good customs of the Christians, of +good authorities who rule and govern the people without exactions +and injustice, or excessive rigor, of good masters who instruct +and educate the children, with the visit of the father, as often +as possible in order further to exercise his spiritual ministries, +and to ascertain how they all observe their important obligations. + +Coming back, now, from this long digression, your Reverence, Father +Superior, could not imagine with what pleasure and blessings the +Christians of those three visitas above mentioned, of Santa Fe, +Manurigao, and San Luis, received the palay which your Reverence +gave as an alms for the relief of those places because of that great +scarcity of food of which I have spoken above. The heads of the +families could not restrain their joy when they found themselves with +palay which could be distributed to each one, although it was, it is +true, very little compared to their great necessity. "How troublesome +we are to you, Fathers," they said, "and how much patience you must +have with us. But God will be able to repay you superabundantly for +the good that you are doing us. Had we not received help, of a truth, +our sick and stricken would have died of hunger and poor food. But +now with this palay, we shall have enough to put new life into us, +and we shall keep some of it for a small field, which will give +us hopes of enduring the famine better later on." So did the poor +wretches express themselves. They really planted their fields with +the little palay which they could set aside for it; and at the date +of the writing of this letter, some fields are seen so luxuriant +and with so fine a heading of grain that within one month they are +promised a moderate harvest. May God in His goodness preserve those +fields and cause them to bear one hundred per cent. + +The day following our arrival at Santa Fe, and the succeeding days, +we managed to assemble in the convent all the Mandayas who appeared +in the village. Father Pastells exhorted them to receive the faith of +our Lord Jesus Christ, and many of them were baptized. Some of them +obstinately refused, giving no other reason for their refusal, if +reason it can be called, than Ualay gusto co, "I do not wish it." And +they could not be changed from that decision, notwithstanding all +our arguments and eloquence. That happens to us at various times so +that we missionaries may learn that the faith and baptism are gifts +of his divine generosity, and that if God do not illumine and impel +them with His powerful grace, in vanum laboravimus. [93] But if some +of them resisted divine Grace, others, God be thanked, yielded to it, +and gladly received holy baptism. All together, adults and children, +we baptized forty. Among that number three women whom we call bailanas +are worthy of special mention. Those women were clad in their baro or +doublet, of a deep-red color throughout, a dress which is peculiar to +their profession, and which differentiates them from other women. Since +I have mentioned these important persons of Mandaya society, it will +not be outside of my design, nor will it be without interest for your +Reverence, to say something about the same. The bailanas are, as it +were, the priestesses of the Mandayas. They exercise the functions of +priestesses, for they offer sacrifices and other offerings to their +false gods, invoke them for the cure of their sick, consult them in +cases of necessity, etc., etc. Consequently, they possess considerable +authority and influence among the Mandayas, since the latter look +upon them as mediators between them and their gods, the instruments +through whom is transmitted the will and mysterious orders of the gods, +and, finally, as persons superior to themselves, although they may be +baganis or petty kings, inasmuch as they believe them to be in direct +communication with their gods or invisible spirits. This class of +sharpers are not few among the Mandayas, both because those people +are very superstitious and believe that their persons and whatever +surrounds them are under the influence of good and evil spirits, +and because the profession of bailan is a lucrative trade. For, +for every religious act that the bailanas perform at the request +of another, they receive their fee or at least they have a share +of the sacrifice or offering that is made to the gods. Hence those +women are the most difficult to attract to our holy faith, and even +to enter the presence of the father missionary. For they fear that +they will lose their influence, their repute, and their easy living, +if they become Christians. Poor creatures, how mistaken they are! + +And now your Reverence may behold one of their pagdiuatas or +sacrifices which they perform in honor of their gods, Mansilatan and +Badla. Several bailanas assemble in the place assigned for the purpose, +together with those persons interested and invited to take part in +it. They erect a sort of small altar on which they place the manaugs +or images of the said gods which are made of the special wood of the +bayog tree, [94] which they destine exclusively for this use. When the +unfortunate hog which is to serve for the sacrifice is placed above +the said altar, the chief bailana approaches with balarao or dagger +in hand, which she brandishes and drives into the poor animal, which +will surely be grunting in spite of the gods and of the religious +solemnity, as it is fearful of what is going to happen to it; and +leaves the victim sweltering in its blood. Then immediately all the +bailanas drink of the blood in order to attract the prophetic spirit +to themselves and to give their auguries or the supposed inspirations +of their gods. Scarcely have they drunk the blood, when they become as +though possessed by an infernal spirit which agitates them and makes +them tremble as does the body of a person with the ague or like one +who shivers with the cold. They seize in their hands a gong to which +they give repeated blows with the third finger, snapping it with the +thumb, thus making a kind of toccata with it. While they are doing +this, after having belched forth a few dozen of times, they invoke +the above-mentioned gods Mansilatan and Badla, to whom they chant +the following Mandayan song: + + + Miminsad, miminsad si Mansilatan + Opod si Badla nga magadayao nang dunia. + Bailan, managunsayao, + Bailan, managunliguit. [95] + + +This means in Spanish: "Mansilatan has come down, has come down. Later +[will come] Badla, who will preserve the earth. Bailanas, dance; +bailanas, turn ye round about." As soon as the invocation has concluded +bailanas and non-bailanas, that is to say, all the people who have +gathered, dance and cry out like disorderly persons, devour the hog, +and end by getting drunk. Such is the conclusion and end of the +demoniacal bucolic feast to the gods Mansilatan and Badla. + +And although these things are so, the Catholic apologist will +not fail to comprehend the most important teachings which he could +utilize as a confirmation of the most transcendental questions of our +true religion. For leaving aside the action of the sacrifice and the +ceremonies that accompany it, is there not some glimpse in that song, +Miminsad, miminsad si Mansilatan, etc., although an imperfect one, of +the dogmas of the plurality of persons in God, and of the creation and +redemption of the world? Indeed, it is so, and more if one keep in mind +the signification in which the Mandayas understand it, according to the +ancient and constant oral tradition received from their ancestors. That +tradition which gives the true meaning to those verses has been taken +down by Father Pastells from the mouth of many tigulang or old men who +have been converted to Christianity. It is as follows. Mansilatan, +the principal god and father of Badla, descended from the heavens +where he dwells in order to create the world. Afterward his only +son Badla came down also to preserve and protect the world--that is +men and things--against the power and trickery of the evil spirits, +Pudaugnon and Malimbung, the latter a woman and the former a man, +who are trying by continual artifices to harm and injure them. Those +evil spirits did not obtain nor will they ever obtain their most evil +intents to destroy the earth and mankind, for they are under the power +and protection of the powerful and invisible god Badla. Consequently, +and in view of so great love and mercy on the part of the latter and +because of so much goodness on the part of his father Mansilatan, +the bailanas who are the priestesses of the same, can never do less +than be joyful, and in the transports of their joy invite one another +to dance and circle about their revered images as an act of reverence +to so great benefactors. Also there is not wanting among the beliefs +of the Mandayas one which gives, although in a confused and corrupted +manner, the idea of the Holy Spirit, thereby completing the mystery of +the holy Trinity. For they say that, from Mansilatan, the father of +Badla his only son, also proceeds the god Busao, who is nothing else +than the omnipotent virtue of the former. This last is communicated +to some men preeminent in valor and skill for their combats, so that +it makes them strong and valiant above other men. Those privileged +men who are animated by the spirit of Busao are called in the Mandaya +language baganis, which means valiant. + +And now I desire to call your Reverence's attention to those two +spirits, Pudaugnon and Malimbung, of whom I made mention above. Does +it not seem to you, Father Superior, that they are an image, although +disfigured, of that malign spirit and chief of all tempters, Lucifer, +who caused Eve to fall by his lies and deceit, and by means of the +latter, conquered and overthrew Adam, from which originated the ruin of +all the human race and the innumerable ills that inundate the earth? It +is quite apparent that there is something in that, and that opinion +does not seem ill founded if we consider the etymology of the words +Pudaugnon and Malimbung, and the explanation which the Mandayas give +of the said spirits. For, first, the word Pudaugnon is derived from the +root daug, which means "to conquer," "to tempt," and from the particles +pu or pa, and non or on, which make the root a substantive adjective, +and the resultant meaning is, if the person is a man, as in this case, +"he who tempts" or "the tempter." So also Malimbung is composed of +the root limbung, which means "to deceive," and the particle ma which +makes it a substantive adjective. Thus it means, the subject being +a woman, "she who deceives" or "the deceiver." The Mandayas say, +then, of those evil spirits that Pudaugnon, the wicked and mortal +enemy of mankind, strong as a man (which he is) and powerful as a +spirit, pursues, attacks, and injures poor mortals as much as he is +allowed; and that Malimbung, cunning and artful as a wicked woman, +and endowed with an irresistible force of seduction like a spirit +(which she is also) seduces by her deceits, and causes the strongest +men, who do not guard against her wiles, to fall. In this woman, is +there not a picture of Eve, the unhappy Eve, possessed for her sin, +by the spirit of her tempter Lucifer, seduced and seductive, with +whose golden cords, Adam, the most lofty cedar of Lebanon in this +world, was bound and was dashed into the deepest depths of evil? [96] + +But let us return to those three bailanas of whom I spoke above, +and who have given rise to this digression. One of them, an old +woman, indeed very old, since she was about seventy years old, at +the exhortation of Father Pastells to become a Christian and abandon +the foolishness of the Mandayas, which are no other than the deceits +of the devil, became possessed or rather seemed to become possessed +with that bailan spirit of which I spoke above, and began to tremble +from head to foot. Did that knavish bailan divinity know beforehand +what was about to happen to him, and that he had to leave the house +in which he had lived for so long a time? But his apparent possession +of the foolish old woman, and the trembling of her body did not last +long, when he saw and heard the derisive guffaws of laughter from +all the Christians who were present. Ah! this was without doubt the +reason which made that invisible spirit, in shame at having been so +illtreated by the fathers and by the Christians present, hasten to +issue forth, and escape with all speed toward hell, or to the body of +another bailana of the mountain who would treat him better. Finally +the poor old woman, like her associates in the profession, surrendered +to the exhortations of the father, or rather, to the grace of the Holy +Spirit, and they consented to receive holy baptism. How beautiful and +how consoling it was to hear from those lips which had invoked more +than a thousand times perhaps, the infernal spirits hidden under +the names of Mansilatan, Badla, Busao, Tagabanua, etc., respond +affirmatively and with deep conviction of spirit to the following +questions of Father Pastells. "Do you believe," he asked each one, +"all that God has revealed and what the holy Catholic Church teaches +us?" "Yes, I believe." "Do you renounce the beliefs of the Mandayas, +and all their lies and works of iniquity?" "Yes, I renounce." "Do +you give your heart wholly and without reserve to God, the Creator of +heaven and earth, and to Jesus Christ his only son, the Redeemer of +the world?" "Yes, in truth, I do give it entirely." "Do you desire in +good faith to receive holy baptism?" "I wish it right gladly." After +that so express profession of faith, the three bailanas, together +with the other baptized adults, were fittingly instructed in the +mysteries of our holy religion and in their duties as Christians. Then, +according to the custom introduced by our fathers, they were stript +of the garments of their heathenism, and they were clothed in the +garments of the Christians, which were lent for the occasion, as the +new clothes which were given to them as a present were not yet made; +and holy baptism was conferred on them to the great joy of all. + +On the thirteenth of the same month of December, when we had concluded +our occupation in the holy faith, we returned to Caraga, postponing +for a later time, although we regretted it keenly, the visit to the +small villages near Manurigao and San Luis; for we were compelled +to return as I had not yet performed the holy exercises of the year, +and it was near the feast of the nativity of our Lord Jesus Christ. + +That fine feast came, and I saw for the first time how the good +inhabitants of Caraga celebrated it. I noted no rich jewels and +refined music in the church. All was simplicity and poverty, like a +new parish recently separated from its metropolitan, and given over to +its own life with few resources, in a most wretched country. Neither +did I observe in the village anything of that excessive luxury, and +the annoying diversions with which in other parts, the Christians +of divided heart try falsely to honor God. Caraga, in spite of +its antiquity of two centuries, with its excellent lands, and its +established reputation of producing excellent cacao, coffee, [97] and +tobacco, is a small, poor, and simple village. The chief causes of +that are that it has been deserted by several old families who have +settled in the small villages recently established, and although +it has increased somewhat with the new Christians, who have been +converted from the beliefs of the Mandayas, the latter are as a rule, +both simple and indolent and but little accustomed to work, and they +need rather to be aided, instead of being able to give aid to the +others. But the reason which has had, and has, most influence in the +above is their isolation which is caused by the very poor sea and land +communication which make that region the most remote and forgotten one +of these islands and (if I may use the word), as it were, the finis +terrae. [98] Hence, it receives but little life from without, and is +forced to live on its narrow resources and few means of subsistence. + +Consequently, wholly and precisely for the above reasons, its method +of existence and of celebrating its feasts has, I know not what, +which attracts and satisfies. This is born of the characteristic +simplicity and open and jovial nature of these people of Caraga, from +the fraternal union with which all, both great and small, those who +have something and those who have nothing, unite to take part in the +feasts and common joy, and finally from the expansive communication, +without an admixture of any sort of fear, which they have with the +father missionaries whom they regard and love as their dear fathers. + +And now you shall see, Father Superior, the religious ceremonies +with which we managed to honor the birth of our Blessing, Jesus. As +a preparation for the feast [of Christmas] the [feast of the] +expectation of the delivery of our Lady was celebrated one week +beforehand, and a daily mass of the Queen [i.e., of the Virgin] +which a moderate number of persons attended. On the last day or the +vigil of the feast, a pleasing, although simple Belen [99] was made +at one side of the presbytery in which were placed the images of the +Child, Mary, and Joseph. Christmas eve came, and at eleven o'clock +the bells were rung loudly, and from half past eleven until twelve, +a continual ringing of bells two at a time announced to the people +that the mass called Gallo [100] was to be celebrated in memory of +that holy hour in which the eternal Son of God the Father, made man +in the most pure entrails of the Virgin Mary willed to be born on +that poor and abandoned manger threshold [portal de Belen]. Hence when +twelve o'clock had struck, the missa-cantata [101] was said, which was +followed by the adoration of the holy Child. That was made enjoyable +by the singing of some fine Christmas carols. The twenty-fifth dawned +bright and joyful. At eight o'clock in the morning solemn mass [102] +was celebrated, which was chanted according to custom by the choir +of singers of the church, with the accompaniment of two flutes and +a tambourine. About one hundred persons took communion at it. There +was a sermon, and at the end of the mass, there was another adoration +of the Child Jesus. At the end of the function, the authorities and +chiefs of the village came to visit us as they are wont to do during +all the great feasts of the year. After that the musicians and singers +congratulated us for the good Christmas from the hall of the convent, +with toccatas according to the custom of this country, and Christmas +carols. After them followed a crowd of people of all classes. What +arrested my attention most was the liberty with which they went up and +down stairs, hither and thither, and addressed the fathers and begged +for what they needed. I will say it: the convent appeared nothing +more nor less than a Casa-Pairal. [103] Since the ceremonies of the +morning were so long, nothing was done in the afternoon except to +have the adoration of the holy Child, a thing which those excellent +and simple people enjoy greatly and never tire of doing. With that +the feast of the nativity of our Lord ended. + +Father Pastells and I passed that feast excellently, as also those of +the new year and twelfth night. So far as I am concerned, the three +days exercise for the renewal of the holy vows which I made on the +last named day, according to the custom of the Society, contributed +much to it. One thing only was lacking to us in order to complete in +some manner the joy of Christmas, namely, the traditional nougat which +had not reached us from Surigao. But the good Jesus did not neglect +to have it reach us, although late, in order that we might be regaled +with it on His glorious day of the feast of the Resurrection. May He +be forever blessed and may He give us His holy grace in order that +we may love and serve Him until death, et ultra. [104] + +We two fathers stayed here in Caraga until Ash Wednesday. After that +we undertook the second journey of which I spoke at the beginning +of my letter. But, since I see that this letter is growing too long, +I shall keep the relation of the events of that journey for another +letter, which I shall endeavor to send by next post. + +I commend myself to the holy prayers and sacrifices of your Reverence. + +Your servant in Christ, + + + Pedro Rosell, S. J. + + + + + + +LETTERS FROM FATHER MATEO GISBERT TO THE REVEREND FATHERS AND BROTHERS +OF VERUELA + + + Davao, January 4, 1886. + + Pax Christi. + + My most beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ: + + +Now I have to answer your fine letter, by telling you something of +these missions, which I do not doubt will interest you greatly. In +this and in the other letters which I plan to write you, I shall limit +myself to mentioning things which I have either seen myself or have +heard from eyewitnesses. + +The matter of the Carolinas [105] has alarmed us a trifle hereabout; +for as those islands are so near these coasts, and these peoples are +so fearful, Christians and heathens have more than once believed +themselves enslaved by the Germans. Even yet they do not have all +the confidence that would be advisable to make them settle down +and quietly build their villages; for any evil information although +without foundation and improbable is enough to make them take to the +mountains. The reverend father superior of the mission sent us some +Spanish banners from Manila for the reductions of these coasts, and +we told them all that if they flung the Spanish banners, although a +foreign boat should approach, they ought not to fear anything. + +You must already have had news of the numerous races of heathens that +people the mission of Davao. The heathens nearest to this capital +are the Guiangas, who are scattered among the rivers and rancherias +of Dulian; Guimalan, Tamugan, Ceril, and Biao, and number in all +six thousand four hundred souls. They talk a language difficult +to understand, for it does not resemble the languages of other +races. Those heathens sow rice, maize, sweet potatoes, bananas, and +sugarcane. In addition they gather a considerable quantity of wax in +their forests. There are some excellent smiths among them, and in +general they reveal a sufficient amount of intelligence. But since +they are still in a savage state, they commit many acts of barbarism, +among which are human sacrifices. As yet they have not heard a father +missionary who can talk to them in their language, and only a few of +those who come to Davao have been baptized. I have had something to +do at times with the nearest who understand and talk the language of +the Bagobos, their neighbors. This very week I am to visit those of +the Mala River where there are some Christians and catechumens who +are constructing a chapel for me when I go. + +The Bagobos are another race of heathens, who, occupying the folds of +the volcano of Apo, [106] extend along the southwest part of Davao +between the Taomo and Bolotucan rivers. They number approximately +ten or twelve thousand souls. About eight hundred have as yet been +reduced, and only about four hundred have been baptized in the new +reductions of Santa Cruz, Astorga, Daliao, Bago, and Taomo. The +Bagobos differ scarcely from the Guiangas, except in the language +that is peculiar to the latter. They are reported, nevertheless, to +be great sacrificers [of human flesh], and are very much set in the +customs of their ancestors. They have two feasts annually: one before +the sowing of the rice, and the other after its harvest. This last is +of an innocent enough character and is called the feast of women. At +that feast all the people gather at the house of their chief or the +master of the feast, at the decline of the afternoon. That day they +feast like nobles, and drink until it is finished the sugarcane +wine which has been prepared for that purpose. There is music, +singing, and dancing almost all the night, and the party breaks up +at dawn of the following day. The feast which they hold before the +sowing is a criminal and repugnant trago-comedy. The tragical part +is the first thing that is done. When they have assembled in the +middle of the woods, after taking all the precautions necessary, +so that the matter may not reach the ears of the authority of the +district or of the father missionary, they tightly bind the slave +whom they are going to sacrifice. When once assured that they will +not be discovered, all armed with sharp knives, they leap and jump +about the victim striking him one after the other, or several at one +time amid infernal cries and shouts, until the body of the victim +sacrificed has been cut into bits. From the place of the sacrifice +they then go to the house of their chief or the master of the feast, +holding branches in their hands which they place in a large bamboo, +which is not only the chief adornment but the altar of the house in +which they meet. Here comes the comical part, for like one who has +done nothing, they all eat and drink, and some of the most joyful play +on musical instruments, and dance. The principal part is reserved for +the old man or master of the feast. He standing near the bamboo which +I have mentioned above, holding the vessel of wine in his hand, and +talking with his comrades, addresses the great demon called Darago, +whose feast they are celebrating, in the following words: "Darago, +we are making you this feast, with great good will and gladness, +offering you the blood of the sacrifice which we have made and this +wine which we drink so that you may be our friend, accompany us, +and be propitious in our wars." Afterward and as a continuation of +what I have said, he begins a kind of litany in which all the most +celebrated Daragos whom they know or believe that they know, and +whose names are repeated by all at the same time, enter. + +The Bagobos recognize two beginnings: and say that they have each +two souls. God, or Tiquiama is very good they say and has created all +things, although he has been aided by other small gods who are under +his orders: such as Mamale, who made the earth; Macacoret, the air; +Domacolen, the mountains; and Macaponguis, the water. Of the two +souls, one goes to heaven and the other to hell. For they believe +that both in this life and in the other, they belong to the devil, +to whom they concede the same rights and almost the same power as to +God, only with the difference that the devil is very bad, and fond of +blood, and the beginning of all evil and confusion. On that account, +quite neglectful of God, the being whom they serve and adore in all +things is the devil. When they marry, if the lovers think that it +will be of any use, they make a human sacrifice so that they may +have a good marriage, so that the weather may be good, so that they +may have no storm, sickness, etc.: all, things which they attribute +to the devil. In the same way also when they learn that there is +any contagious disease, or fear death, several of them assemble and +make a human sacrifice, asking the devil to let them live, since they +generously offer him that victim. They also believe that the disease +can be conjured. But the time that it appears that it is necessary +to make a sacrifice according to the law of the Bagobos is at the +death of any one of the family, before they can remove the lalaoan +or mourning. In that case the sacrifice announced among them as a +feria or a pilgrimage is usually announced among the Christians. At +the point and on the day assigned, all the sacrificers assemble, or +possibly one member of each of the families who are in mourning, at +times fifty or more. The value of the slave sacrificed is paid among +them all, and he who pays most has the right to sacrifice first. The +victims cry out at such times as long as they can and ask pity of all; +but instead of pitying them, they drown the pitiful cries with the +most horrible and terrifying shouts that can be imagined. If they +perform the sacrifice near the Christians, then they strike without +any shouts, and even gag the mouth of the victim. + +But let us leave for another letter the relation of not less horrible +barbarities. O Fathers and Brothers of my soul, pray for the conversion +of these wretched beings, and do not be forgetful of me in your holy +sacrifices and prayers. + +The servant in Christ of you all, + + + Mateo Gisbert, S. J. + + + + + Davao, February 8, 1886. + + My dearly beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ: + + +On reading the horrible sacrifices that I described in my last +letter, you will have asked: "How has the father been able to learn +so minutely the inhuman customs which the savages conceal so carefully +in the midst of their forests?" Your Reverences will understand indeed +that I have not been able to be present at those sacrifices, but they +have been explained to me by the Bagobos, who, having been baptized, +recount those and other barbarities of heathenism. I have learned it +also from the mouth of some victims who, being at the very point of +being sacrificed, managed to escape by the aid and management of the +father missionary. + +I am going to mention some of the customs of the Bagobos to you which +must, I believe, arrest the attention because of their ridiculousness +and superstition. When the Bagobos have an evil presentiment, for +which it is enough for them to see a snake in the house, or that +the jar breaks in the fire, etc., they hasten to their matanom, +in order to have him conjure the misfortune by means of his great +wisdom. The matanom, who preserves the customs and religions of +their ancestors, makes a doll with his knife, giving it the face of +a man, and then addressing God, says the following words: "O God, +Thou Who hast created men and trees, and all things, do not deprive +us of life, and receive in exchange this bit of wood, which has our +face." After that ceremony with or without the doll, they set in the +water a small bag containing a little morisqueta or rice, to which +they at times add a cock. By this means they think that they have +rid themselves of the disease. When they are sick, they perform the +diuata in their tambaro. That consists in a dish on top of a bamboo +which is fixed in the ground, on which they place buyo, bonga, lime, +and tobacco, while they say to their god: "We offer thee this. Give +us health." When they visit a sick person, they have the custom of +placing copper rings on their wrists or on their legs, in order that +the soul which they call limocod may not leave. When anyone dies, +they never bury him without placing for him his share of rice to be +eaten on the journey. When they harvest their rice or maize, they give +the first fruits to the diuata, and do not eat them, or sell a grain +without first having made their hatchets, bolos, and other tools which +they use in clearing their fields eat first. The song of the limocon is +for them the message from God. It is of good or evil augury according +to circumstances. Accordingly, when the limocon sings, every Bagobo +stops and looks about him. If he sees for instance, a fallen tree, +the limocon advises him not to advance farther for the fate of that +tree awaits him, and he turns back. If he sees no particular thing +which indicates or prognosticates any ill, he continues, for then the +song of the limocon is good. Sneezing is always a bad omen for them, +and accordingly if anyone sneezes by chance when they are about to +set out on a journey, the departure is deferred until next day. + +There are not as a rule many thefts among the Bagobos, for they +believe that the thief can be discovered easily by means of their +famous bongat. That consists of two small joints of bamboo, which +contain certain mysterious powders. He who has been robbed and +wishes to determine the robber, takes a hen's egg, makes a hole in +it, puts a pinch of the abovesaid powder in it, and leaves it in the +fire. If he wish the robber to die he has nothing else to do than to +break the egg; but since the thief may sometimes be a relative or a +beloved person the egg is not usually broken, so that there may be or +may be able to be a remedy. For under all circumstances, when this +operation is performed, if the robber lives, wherever he may be, +he himself must inform on himself by crying out, "I am the thief; +I am the thief;" as he is compelled to do (they say) by the sharp +pain which he feels all through his body. When he is discovered, he +may be cured by putting powder from the other joint into the water +and bathing his body with it. This practice is very common here among +heathens and Moros. A Bagobo, named Anas, who was converted, gave me +the bongat, with which he had frightened many people when a heathen. + +This would be the place to write you some very interesting Bagobo +stories and legends; but in order to be understood, I should have to +precede it by a long preamble, for which I have no time at present; +and hence I shall leave it for another time. I should like to tell +you something about the other races of heathens whom we have in this +mission. The Bilanes, [107] are beyond doubt, the most industrious +of all the heathens that inhabit these mountains. This race numbers +approximately about twenty thousand souls, who are divided among a +considerable number of rancherias between the Bulatucan River and +the bay of Sarangani, and occupying the beautiful plains of the +interior where they grow considerable rice. They have some of the +customs of the Bagobos their neighbors, but their language which is +very different separates them as does also the natural hostility that +always arms the heathen savage against the savage, and one race against +the other. The Bilanes are very intelligent, and some who have been +baptized, give good proof of themselves. But although it causes me +the greatest pain to say it, as they are a race which deserves that +we all interest ourselves in them, as they are very numerous, and +capable of receiving the evangelical light and civilization, I must +tell you that there is no reduction as yet among that race of heathens. + +Enough for today. Another time I shall speak of the Tagacaolos, +Manobos, and Atas. Meanwhile, will you pray the sacred heart of +Jesus for them all and for your most affectionate brother and servant +in Christ. + + + Mateo Gisbert, S. J. + + + + + Davao, February 20, 1886. + + My dearly beloved Fathers and Brothers in Christ: + + +In order that you may all be encouraged more and more to aid us with +your prayers in the great undertaking that we are engaged upon, I +am going to mention, as I promised, a few of the customs of several +races of this mission. The Tagacaolos belong to a numerous race +of heathens, who inhabit the mountains of Culaman from Sarangani +to Malalag. The whole mission contains approximately about twelve +or fourteen thousand. Their language is easy to understand to him +who knows Visayan. They are much divided among themselves and are +continually at war, the weak being the slave of the stronger, and +being frequently sold to the Moros. The Bagobos almost always supply +themselves from this race for their human sacrifices. Do not believe, +however, that they are a people inferior to those of other races. The +Tagacaolos are lighter complexioned and more docile than the other +known heathens. They also have human sacrifices at times, but they +easily abandon their barbarous customs. + +The Manobos [108] are another numerous and savage race of heathens, +who live along various points of the coast, from Malalag to +Sarangani. These Manobos have little liking for work, and are warlike +and valiant, being usually on the hunt for slaves. They possess +firearms, which the Moros sell them in exchange for slaves. This is +a misfortune which we regret, but which has no remedy, until with +the progress of the reduction the action of authority may be more +effectual. The Moros hereabout are a race of thieves, the most shameful +that are known. They do not work and live ordinarily on the slave +trade which they are always able to procure. I know some Moros in this +mission who pass themselves off as friends, but are very evil. There +is a pandita named Gubat, who asserts that he likes me and respects me +more than he does his own father, and comes into my presence as if he +were the most friendly and obedient person in all the reductions of +the coast, telling me always that he is going to collect what they +owe him. As it will not take long, I shall recount one of his evil +deeds. Two years ago he went to Tubalan, where, uniting with Basino, +Alivao, Minquil, Batuga, Joac, and Agbay, he went to a rancheria of +Tagacaolos and enslaved them to the number of seven, namely, Bayo, +Eloy, Salio, Arac, Agueda, Caoy, and Dila, and brought them to the +coast. There they were apportioned as slaves, after the one called Eloy +had been knifed, because they feared that they would be exposed by him +if opportunity offered. Along the Culaman coast, when they knife one +or many, they generally set the head on a pole and keep them for days +and months. With that object in view they cut off the head of Eloy, +which Batuga carried, while the pandita Gubat, my friend, carried an +arm. But a short time ago, I have been able to rescue and baptize Bayo +and Dila, and the latter's wife and two daughters. From the last named, +I learned the history which I have briefly recounted. It is a sample of +many others which I could relate to you. Consequently, they are wont to +make slaves here treacherously and by violence. Although these Manobos, +as I have said, are savage and warlike, there are some rancherias +of them, which, having been reduced by the father missionary, have +abandoned their evil customs. In Piapi we have already one hundred +and ninety baptized persons, almost all Manobos. Their language is +somewhat difficult to understand, but one can conquer that difficulty +by living among them for a short time. The number of Manobos in this +mission is not less than one thousand two hundred. + +The Atas are another race of wild and savage heathens who live in the +interior. Only the rancheria of Dato Lasia, which is the nearest, +has been visited as yet. It is the least known race, but it is +believed with foundation, to be the most numerous, aggregating not +less than twenty-five thousand souls. They speak their own tongue. I +have baptized a few Atas, by making myself understood in Visayan +or Bagobo. On that day that the Atas hear a father missionary speak +their language, I have no doubt of their conversion. The difficulty, +even supposing that there were father missionaries who could give +their work to the mission, will always be very great, because it is +in the interior, through mountains, rivers, and woods remote from +the coast, where there are no roads or any human aid. Nevertheless, +one must pray for them, confident that God will open the way through +His infinite mercy. + +In the island of Samal I have also a Christian village, where the +heathen Samals are gradually becoming reduced and baptized. There +are now some hundred and thirty-seven baptized. + +The other reductions in my care are all on the southern part of this +coast, extending from Davao to Malalag, inclusive. They are Malalag, +Piapi, Digos, Santa Cruz, Astorga, Daliao, Bago, and Taumo. Among them +all there are nine hundred who have been baptized. In general they +follow the instructions of the father missionary docilely. Almost all +of them possess their little homes on the suitable street, and many +of them are beginning to cultivate cacao and other plants which are +given to them here, and are highly esteemed. The majority of those +baptized as yet in these reductions belong to the Tagacaolo and Bagobo +races. Then follow successively the Manobos, Samals, and Calagars. I +shall also endeavor to open the door quite soon to the Guiangas, +Bilanes, and Atas. In order to begin, nevertheless, as is fitting, +and to carry on this work, some father missionaries are needed, not +only because of the great number of the heathens to be administered, +but also because they talk several languages, and have habits and +customs that differ considerably among themselves. + +I conclude this letter by commending myself to the holy prayers and +sacrifices of all the Fathers and Brothers of that holy house. From +your most affectionate servant in Christ, + + + Mateo Gisbert, S. J. + + + + + Davao, July 26, 1886. + + Pax Christi. + My dearly beloved Father Superior in Christ: [109] + + +I have just received your favor of the fourteenth inst. I am very +glad that you have returned from your long journey without having +experienced any misfortune. Welcome to the Fathers and Brothers of +the new mission! A fraternal embrace to them all! + +I desired to write your Reverence a long letter, but since the post +has found me alone, in Davao, for Fathers Perello and More have not +returned from their excursion to Libuac, I shall not be able to write +at great length, as I must attend to the other duties necessary here +during the days for the steamboat. May God repay your Reverence for the +charity which you extend me in the good news that you give me. What +shall I tell you on this occasion? The circumstances of this mission +offer me some material, especially the consideration of the condition +of the various races of heathens who inhabit it, and especially the +race of the Bagobos. To what extremities do their ignorance and the +malice of the common enemy reduce them! This latter, being the prince +of darkness, rules them thoroughly, no longer by insinuating himself +and presenting himself under the forms of apparent goodness, in order +to take possession of their hearts and souls without intimidating them, +acting as a seductive deceiver, but in the midst of the shadows of +this heathenism, he does not fear to appear so frightfully horrible +and cruel as he is in reality. + +I have considered, at times, as did our holy Father, Ignacio, Satan +on his throne of smoke and fire, with horrible and frightful face, +in the great field of Babilonia, and this formula, which is feigned +by means of the imagination to aid the understanding in consideration +of the truth that it claims, is here a reality. What is it but that +large field inhabited by so many heathen races, whose confusion of +tongues forms the labyrinth of the mission in which we work! What +signifies this volcanic mountain Apo, in which the great Mandarangan +lives as in his throne of smoke and fire, as is believed and related +by the Bagobos, who bathe themselves in the blood of thousands +upon thousands of human victims! Is not this truly the field of +Babilonia, where the prince of darkness reigns? And who can tell +the years of his dominion here? The Bagobos of Sibulan usually show +their antiquity by the following genealogies. Manip, the present +dato, had for father Panguilan; Panguilan was the son of Taopan; +Taopan, son of Maliadi; Maliadi, son of Banga; Banga, son of Lumbay; +Lumbay, son of Basian; Basian, son of Boas; Boas, son of Bato; Bato, +son of Salingolop. They say that of all their ancestors, Salingolop +was the most powerful, and his name was always preserved among all +his descendants. Before him there were already Bagobos with the same +customs as those of today, that is, they were heathens and slaves of +the great Mandarangan or Satan, to whom it appears that they always +sacrificed human victims. The father of Manip was the dato of Sibulan, +who died a few months ago at a very old age (perhaps he was as much as +a hundred), and whom they say had already attained to the condition +of immortality, which was due to the matuga guinaua, or good heart +of Mandarangan, because of the many victims that he had offered that +being. It is said that when he was yet a youth, he sought a wife, +but did not obtain her until he had cut off fifty human heads, as +was attested by the hundred ears which he carried in a sack from the +river Libaganon to Sibulan. How many victims must that single Bagobo +have offered up! Even after his death it was necessary to seal his +sepulcher with the blood of human victims. For his son Manip and +his other relatives did not remove the mourning or lalaoan, as they +call it, until after they had barbarously sacrificed seven slaves, +according to the relation of Itang. That man fearing to be one of +the victims, presented himself to the father missionary in order to +place his temporal and eternal life in safety, and that was quickly +done for he was baptized a while ago under the name of Juan. + +Quite patent is the barbarity of these people and the complete dominion +of the prince of darkness in the field of the Bagobo heathenism. But +perhaps one will ask: "How can so paradoxical a barbarity exist, +since by sacrificing their slaves, [110] those people lose slave +and money? Leaving to one side even the inhumanity revealed by so +barbarous a custom, only by not attacking so directly their own +interests by depriving themselves of arms for their work, etc., +it appears that they would have to refrain from sacrificing their +slaves; but necessarily they are very much given to human sacrifices, +not only in order to preserve a custom of their ancestors, but also +in order not to lose a kind of trade that is sufficiently lucrative, +and of which I made mention in one of my former letters. + +Nevertheless, it will not be too much to relate the following case +in support of my assertion. Maglandao, a good lad, and yet single, +was the name of the victim. His master was not a Bagobo, but he was +married to a Bagobo woman, and far from following the customs of his +country which are more humane and civilized, he immediately committed +so evil a deed that he could well have been graduated as master +from the Bagobo school. Maglandao was the son of Apat, a Bagobo, +and from childhood had never been the slave of any person. But in +order to obtain some pamaran or pendents of ivory which were worth +eight or ten pesos, he gave his word to work for a certain length +of time for the owner of the pamaran. The latter, considering him as +his slave, or rather, as if he were a wild boar of the woods, having +grown angry at him one day because he did not do as he was ordered, +fired his gun point blank at him so that the ball entered his back +and came out in front just below the right breast, also going through +his arm. The wound was mortal, especially as he was left, just as +his master left him, totally abandoned. But, since in spite of all, +two days had passed, and Maglandao had not died, his master bethought +him that he could make use of him for the sacrifice which the Bagobos +of Cauit were about to make on the occasion of the death of the old +Balolo. The sacrificers, in number about twenty heathens, agreed +to kill or sacrifice the wounded youth, giving his master seventy +paves, [111] or about fourteen cavans of palay. That was a stroke +of business that was considered as profitable by both parties to the +contract. The sacrifices believed that they were the gainers in it, +for since the victim was nearly dead when he came into their hands, +they obtained him ipso facto at a lower price, and thus saved money +and stabbing. He who sold the victim also thought himself the gainer, +because by handing him over for the sacrifice, he saved the labor and +expenses of burial, and had enough palay to eat throughout the year. + +I have been able to ascertain the facts about this and other horrible +sacrifices through the sacrificers themselves who have been converted +to the Catholic faith, who have not hesitated to relate them to me with +the above details and others which I omit. The above will suffice for +your Reverence to understand that human sacrifices are a real business +here, and are maintained not only by Bagobos, but also by Moros and +other heathen races. It is an infamous traffic which can only be wiped +out by means of the civilizing action which Espana is exercising over +Mindanao. Some heathens having been reprimanded on a certain occasion +by the governor of this district in regard to so barbarous a custom, +had the audacity to reply to him in the following manner: "Sir, is +not every one allowed to spend his money as he pleases? Slaves answer +the purposes of money among us, and we spend that money according to +our pleasure and custom." + +Much more barbarous are they than the Ammonites, who sacrificed their +sons to Moloch, and those other idolaters who sacrificed to Saturn, +for both of them did it only several times a year, for the Bagobos +sacrifice very frequently. There is no rancheria in which they do not +annually make their feasts to the demon--Busao, Mandarangan, or Darago, +for they are wont to give him these and many other names. On the day of +the great assembly at the house of the dato or chief of the rancheria, +they only eat and drink, sing and dance with joy, and there is no +appearance of anything evil, except the scandals which reveling and the +worship of Darago generally occasion. There with cup of wine in hand, +they mutually pledge one another, and yielding the word to the old man +or chief of the feast, they drink toasts with him in honor of the great +Darago, whom they promise to follow and honor forever, offering to him, +as did their ancestors, the blood of many human victims, so that he +may be their friend and aid them in their wars. Curious persons who +are present at those feasts, do not understand the language of the +old men nor see anything that hints of a human sacrifice, but those +who are fully initiated in the Bagabo customs, will note immediately +the token of the human sacrifice which was made in the woods on the +preceding day among the branches placed in the bamboo or drum, before +which the old men above mentioned make their invocation to Darago. + +When any contagious disease appears, or whenever any of their relatives +die, the Bagobos believe that the demon is asking them for victims, and +they immediately hasten to offer them to him so that he may not kill +them. They are accustomed generally to show their goodwill in the act +of sacrifice in the following words: Aoaton no ian dipanoc ini manobo, +timbac dipanoc co, so canac man sapi, [that is] "Receive the blood of +this slave, as if it were my blood, for I have paid for it to offer it +to thee." These words which they address to Busao, when they wound and +slash the victim, show clearly that they believe in and expect to have +the demon as their friend by killing people for him. For they hope to +assure their life in proportion to the number of their neighbors they +deliver to death, which they believe is always inflicted by Busao or +the demon who is devoured continually by hunger for human victims. + +Now it is seen, your Reverence, my Father, whether I said with reason +that this place appears the kingdom of the prince of darkness as +horrible and cruel as it is in reality. His subjects, or better, +his slaves, although they easily comprehend the existence of a god, +creator and omnipotent, since they believe as they do, that sickness +and death come from Busao, and that the latter is only fond of +blood and revolution, dedicate their altars and sacrifices to him, +consenting to the impious and iniquitous pact of eternal servitude, +which their ancestors, deceived and reduced by the great Mandarangan, +made at the foot of the Apo Volcano. Let us beseech the intercession +of the angels and the saints, and especially that of the Queen and +Lady, our Mother, the most holy Virgin, before God our Lord, so that +by His grace, He may unite the hearts of all those who can aid us in +the material and spiritual conquest of these peoples. + +Here I take leave of your Reverence, saluting all the Fathers and +Brothers of those colleges, to whose holy prayers and sacrifices I +commend myself. + +Your Reverence's servant in Christ, + + + Mateo Gisbert, S. J. + + + + + Davao, December 24, 1886. + + Pax Christi. + My dearly beloved Father Superior in Christ: + + +[Once] since the seven months in which I have been able to visit San +Jose of Samal, I went there lately to say mass and preach to those poor +people, at that time solemnizing eight baptisms and one marriage. It +is fitting for the Samals who were always visited and cared for by +the father missionaries of Davao, to be specially visited and cared +for now when some of those who formerly showed most opposition, offer +themselves for baptism. During this last visit I baptized Mal-luyan, +the headman, a son-in-law of Captain Baguisan. The latter has become +a fury, and refuses to allow any of those whom he calls his sacopes +to be baptized, and he threatens with his gun the one who does not +conform to him, and commits real outrages. He is a madman of a bad +kind, worse than Busao himself. For if the demon looses the chains +of heathenism on anyone and that person becomes baptized through the +mercy of God, Baguisan hastens to fasten them on again. That happened +lately to Cabais, who, one day going to get his wife in order that +they two might be baptized and live in San Jose with two daughters +already Christians, has been detained and rigorously forbidden to +present himself before the father. + +On account of this war against baptism by Baguisan, which is both +obligatory and of long standing in Samal, it is advisable to pay heed +to that field of Christendom, so that it may increase, although that +increase be but gradual, and so that the entire island may finally +be converted. The appointment, by the governor, of the Christians +of San Jose as captain, lieutenant, etc., has produced an excellent +result. It might be said that those Christians are the real datos of +the island, and the only ones who obey the orders that they receive, +who cultivate cacao, and form a true village. + +The village which your Reverence saw in the old Casalucan has remained +talis qualis. [112] These people if they are not baptized, live in +the manner of Baguisan. "A village--and on the beach--in order to live +under guard and subject--bah!" they say. "We don't want it! We don't +want it!" There is a race, however, or to speak more accurately, the +remnant of what was the Moro race, which was formerly predominant on +these coasts, whose datos and captains, for fear of being abandoned by +the few sacopes whom they still have, are the first ones to present +themselves and beg for a village. And since they know that that +petition is generally heeded by all the governors who succeed to +the district, they easily obtain the support that they ask, and form +something that resembles a village, if it be looked at especially from +the sea. Thus do they oblige the scattered sacopes to reunite under +their datos and panditas, and that is the very thing that they desire, +in order that they might maintain their customs and mode of living. + +Since the Moros do not agree in any part, and much less here, where we +have so many other good and numerous races, it would be very politic, +in my opinion, to encourage the spirit of the Moros who are attempting +to separate from their datos and panditas, so that the latter may +become isolated and without any authority. If it is thought advisable +to assemble them into a settlement, since, counting all the Moros +of the gulf, their number does not reach five thousand, it would be +an excellent thing to assemble them in one village, at a point where +they can be better watched and governed. But if they were ordered to +assemble in one single village, it would always be necessary to permit +those Moros who wished, to separate from their datos and panditas +in order that they might take root in the villages and reductions as +do the other heathens. Being baptized like them, if they wish, they +may do it freely without the obstacle of datos and panditas. As they +are now, although there are but few here, they fill and dirty the +whole thing; for scarcely is there a river or a valley whose mouth +has not its dato and pandita, who, together with their sacopes, the +latter of whom do not number ten at times, say that they are making a +village by order of the governor. But what they are really doing is +to prevent other heathens from being reduced and making a village, +which would actually be of real advantage for the future. + +I will close by asking your Reverence to commend me to God in your +holy prayers and sacrifices. + + + Mateo Gisbert, S. J. + + + + + + +LETTER FROM FATHER PABLO CAVALLERIA TO FATHER FRANCISCO SANCHEZ + + + Isabela de Basilan, December 31, 1886. + + Pax Christi. + + My very dearly beloved in Christ, Father Sanchez: + + +Replying to your favor, in which your Reverence asks for information +concerning the inhabitants of this island of Basilan, I have deemed +it best to write the following. + + + +Races + +The races of this island are the indigenous race and the Moros. The +indigenous is Christian and there is little or nothing to say of them, +since they are well known to your Reverence. + +The Moro [113] race is infidel, and lives on the coast and in the +interior. + +The indigenous race forms the settlement of Isabela de Basilan, +consisting of some eight hundred souls. + +Further sixteen families of Christian Indians reside in the visita +called San Pedro de Guibauan distant six leguas from Isabela. Their +absolute lieutenant in chief is Pedro Cuevas. + +The Moro race is now greatly degenerated, for many are coming down +from the Bisayas who were formerly captives. + +The Moros of the interior of the island are called Yacanes, [114] +and are employed, although but little, in the cultivation of palay, +sweet-potatoes, cacao, etc. + +The Moros of the coast are called Samales Laut. They are employed, +although little, in fishing. They are pirates, and whenever they +can do so with impunity, they capture the Christians, or the Moros +of the interior themselves, or those of distant Samal rancherias, or +those of other islands. On that account there is a certain hostility +between the Samales and the Yacanes. At present, Pedro Cuevas, so far +as he is able, executes justice upon those who exercise such boldness, +and applies the law to them. + +Among the Samales Laut, there are Joloan Moros, and Malays. + +The total number of the Moros of this island is ten or twelve +thousand. [115] Their skin is of a deep bronze color, and they have +black eyes, rather meager eyebrows, thin beard and their cranium is +flattened on the occipital part. + + + +Religion + +They are not very observant in their ceremonies. + +They omit many of the rules of their false prophet Mahomet, add +others which are not prescribed, and observe some, but in the time +and manner that appears best to them. For example, they do not pray +even at least once a day, almost never observe Friday, and it is +never seen that any of them has gone to Meca. [116] + +They practice baptism or gunting, which they have learned, although +badly, from the Christian captives. + +For the administration of baptism, they prepare cocoanut oil, rice +flour, water from the cocoanut and natural water. When the child is +four or six months old, on that day that they think best, the imam +takes a little of each of those ingredients abovesaid, and places them +on the forehead of the child, at the same time uttering certain words +from the Koran. At the end of the ceremony the feast follows, and +the imam is the first to whom the large tray of food must be presented. + + + +Marriage + +The fathers or owners of the young girls rather sell than give them +for wives. Fees are assigned for the petitions made by the young men +to the fathers or masters of their sweethearts. Consequently, it is +seldom that the young woman is given to the suitor at his first or +second petition. The young woman is granted to the suitor, who pays +greater or less fees, according as the family is more or less principal +and as the young woman is more or less good-looking. Consequently, +thirty, fifty, or more pesos are demanded for her delivery, besides +the marriage feast. + +The ceremonies observed by them, as I have seen them, are as +follows. The groom chews his buyo as he is required, then goes into +the midst of the guests, makes some wry faces, and passes his hands +along his face. By that means they say that he is asking pardon of +God by confessing his sins. This is called magtanbat. Then if the +groom has not paid because of poverty, for a suitable banquet, some +of the chiefs present strike him several blows on the back with a +rattan formed like a hand, more or less numerous, according to what +he has neglected to prepare for the banquet. + +Then the groom goes to wash his feet and clothe himself in white +garments. On coming out he seats himself on a mat, and places his right +hand between the two hands of one chief, and his left upon the right +hands of the other chiefs. Then the imam covers his right hand and +that of the groom with a white handkerchief, and thus being united, +they utter some words from the Koran. The imam lifts his hands, and +extends them so that his palms are turned outwards and at a distance +of two cuartas, [117] and lifts them to his head. The groom does the +same, but the palms of his hands are turned toward his face. They +clasp hands again with the chiefs in the manner abovesaid, and then +the feast immediately follows. At the end of the feast, they go to +the home of the bride, and the same ceremonies are there repeated +with her as with the groom. + +At intervals they play the culintingan, and if the groom is an +influential person, there is a discharge of musketry, and a cow or +carabao is killed, and innumerable Moros invited in. The richer one +is the more guests there are; and at intervals there is generally a +war dance. + + + +Burial + +When the sickness is severe, the imam performs the magtaual, by +sprinkling a little water on the sick person, and reciting some +prayers to their false prophet. They clothe the deceased in a white +garment which covers them from top to toe. Those who are present or +who visit the deceased, are invited to a feast. The grave that is made +is deep or shallow according to the rank of the person who is to be +buried, but it is always one and one-half or two varas deep, and in +the shape of a crescent. In one side of it they open a kind of cave, +where the body is to be buried. Once the body is deposited there, +they set upright stakes in the cave and then make a platform over +the hole while two persons scare away the flies with a white cloth +so that they may not come near. At the ends of the grave they place a +tabo [118] of water and food. The imam comes, recites some Mahometan +prayers, approaches the dish of food which they have placed there for +him, and there at the very grave, he stuffs himself with dexterity, +and retires. At the termination of that gastronomic operation, the +death-guards (or tunguquibul) who watch the dead for the space of a +few days and nights, enter. This is done by various families in turn, +according to the wealth or property of the family of the deceased, +for they are paid in food and cloth whenever they stand guard. When +the deceased, or rather his relatives have nothing more with which +to recompense them, the guards cease to watch the dead. + +If any of the family of the deceased do not wish that guard to be +made, the imams and some others circulate the rumor that the dead +person has escaped and is running through the hills terrifying the +passers-by. That ghost they call panata, and until the guard has been +made, that rumor does not cease to be circulated. + + + +Religious feasts + +When they unite for public worship, which is when it pleases them, the +people are summoned by loud sounds produced by the blows of a stick +upon a sort of drum. The imam begins an invocation in a sad tone to +their impostor and reads a bit of the Koran. In the meantime the people +chew buyo, talk, lie down, laugh, scream, and then they retire without +either the imam or the people having understood what has been read. + +The principal feast, and almost the only one that they celebrate is +the maulut or birth of Mahomet. Each rancheria, and at times each +family even, celebrates it on whatever day they choose. They ought +to hold it on the tenth night of the month called Rabie aual, which +corresponds to the month of September. But they generally celebrate it +after the harvest. This year the Moros of this place have celebrated +it in December. I asked them once why they did not celebrate it on a +fixed day. They replied that they celebrated it when they had food for +a good feast. On the said occasions several chiefs are accustomed to +meet with the imam and sing in so doleful a voice that the song appears +to come from a cavern, the while the women prepare the feast. This +year I have noted that the imam of Panigayan has gone on separate +days to celebrate the feast at different rancherias. + +They are very superstitious, and greatly fear Saitan (the devil) +whom they endeavor to placate. When the epidemic of 1882 was here, +the Moros of Panigayan, among whom the cholera made especially severe +ravages (for one-half of them died), threw boatloads of food into the +sea, so that on encountering them, the devil might be satisfied with +the food and leave them in peace. They also hung food to the trees +with the same end in view. + +On that occasion, the sherif reaped a fine harvest by selling clear +water, which had curative properties, as he asserted. In return for +the cure they had to recite some Moro prayers. If they were cured, +it was by the water; but if they were not cured, it was because they +had not recited well the prayers of Mahomet. The affair did not result +ill for him. + +In January 1883, I had occasion to observe another superstition in +Lucbutun, a Moro rancheria one legua distant from this place by sea. A +sailing fragata, which they called an enchantress, because they did not +descry at a distance more than its sails passed not far from the said +rancheria. Then because they did not salute it, they believed that they +had irritated the devil, and in order to repair the fault they made two +closets, and placed in the midst of them burning brasiers and lamps. + +Some Moros believe also that the sherif can by his mere will send a +sickness on whom he pleases. All is for the purpose of terrifying them +and so that the sherif can get whatever he wishes from them. Whenever +I have opposed this error, I have asked them why, if the sherif had +this power, he did not send diseases upon the Christian village, +since he is hostile to the Christians, but they do not reply to the +question, but remain in their obstinacy. + +Once when there was an eclipse of the moon, the Moros of Pasanjan began +to make a great racket with their culintingans and other things. When +they were asked why they made so much noise, they answered that it +was in order to scare the serpent which was eating the moon. [119] + +For their long voyages they look at the cuticaan, which is a book +containing certain figures. By means of that they try to discover +whether they have fortunate voyages or not. + + + +Follies + +He who knows most among them is the sherif yet his learning does not +go beyond the ability to write a few words in Arabian characters. In +regard to heaven and hell they know nothing more than their +existence. In regard to the soul they know almost nothing. + +The following is what a sherif asserted regarding heaven and +hell. There are seven heavens and seven hells to express the various +rewards or punishments: + +1. A heaven called Yattu Atuan. Here there is only rest. + +2. A heaven, [called] Firdeos. Here there are good things to eat. + +3. A heaven [called] Naim. If one wishes to eat, there is plenty of +food [here]. + +4. A heaven [called] Naua. The water [here] has the taste that one +desires. + +5. Ainum naim. Here [there is] great wealth. + +6. Salsabila. Here [there are] golden vessels from which to drink. + +7. Jatard al Cots. Here [there are] pearls and diamonds. + + + +Hells + +1. Naruk Yahanna. Here [there is] confusion. + +2. Naruk Sacar. [Here there are] contrivances and animals for +inflicting torture. + +3. Naruk Sigmilti. [Here there are] tortures in language. + +4. Naruk abus. [Here there are] most ugly things. + +5. Naruk Jauya. Here one is run through with spears. + +6. Naruk Zaalt. Here one suffers thirst. + +7. Naruk Jamia. Here one is tortured with fire. + +So did one Tuan Sarib describe heaven and hell. On a certain occasion +several chiefs and imams gathered together; and when speaking of Adam +and Eve, they did not succeed in telling who were their parents, and +they had recourse to the missionary in order that he might instruct +them on that point. They do not know either, the day on which their +Mahomet was born, or much less any of his history. + +They scarcely know their era, nor do they know how old they are. Once +a man asked me to tell him how old he was. They count by moons, saying +"Only two moons have passed;" "Three moons from now we shall do this;" +etc., etc. + +Much more might be said of their errors and foolishness, but I consider +this sufficient, and it would be a prolixity to adduce more facts to +prove those errors and follies. + + + +Dress + +The dress consists of pantaloons narrow at the bottom and wide at the +top and a tight shirt. The women dress like the men except that they +cover themselves with a loosely sewed mantle (jabul) which covers them +from top to toe and is fastened under the armpit thus forming folds. + +They cut their hair to a little fringe on the forehead, and shave +themselves. Their teeth are dyed black in order to distinguish them +from the Christians. + +The Samal Moros dress in pantaloons that are tight from top to bottom. + +The Moro will not eat flesh, [120] unless the imam sacrifices the +animal, and performs the Sumbalig. + +The Moros are dirty, lazy, fickle, importunate, stingy in giving, +and fond of conversation and amusements. + +They fight without giving quarter, and in the attack, advance, stop, +give ground, leap, creep among the cogon, [121] cover themselves with +their shields, etc. + +In their wars against the Spaniards or Christians, they build forts +defended by ditches, and invested with thick earthen walls. They are +fierce and bold, and when dripping with blood they fight until death +on the field of battle, impelled by their hatred toward the Christian +or Spaniard. + +Below are some verses of a song of theirs which was dictated to me +by a Moro chief, so that your Reverence may better see the hatred +with which they fight. [122] + + + Pagcalanta aco isa Un canto entonare + Saliban Sauan da sa Que es del Saliban Sauan + Sabab aun sucut dasa. Para tener suerte + Tumulak aco salasa. Al embarcarme el martes. + + Maluag can sanchata Busca las lantacas + Bacucus in sacay in sa Las armas en la embarcacion + Bisan uay bantata Y aunque no haya enemigos + Marayao panab quita. Bueno es estar prevenidos. + + Yari Saliban Sauan Este Saliban Sauan + Mallo pa Zamboangan Va para Zamboanga + Bisan uay dangat Aunque no haya comercio + Midda pa subangan. Volvera pronto. + + Castila piangayu Al castila pidio + Simacat na tinuyo Subio con traicion + Catacus niangayu Sus armas pidio + Ynacujan sa nag buno. Se las cogio con la muerte. + + Aco catcal magbuno na Yo siempre peleare + Ampa lasa aun co na Y hasta gusto tendre si caigo + Bauk aco dumungu na Arrostrare el peligro + Sagui na Bismil-la. En nombre de Dios. + + Jida manung lasap Tengo gusto en hablar + Magcalis samsil dasak Esgrimire con valor el cris afilado + Minsan co dugu nasak Y aunque mi sangre corra por el suelo + Limagut parran lisak. Tajeare al oir tocar. + + + A song I will chant, + Which is that of the Saliban [123] Sauan, + In order that I may have luck + At my sailing on Tuesday. + + Look after the lantacas, + The weapons at embarking; + And though there are no enemies + It is wise to be prepared. + + This Saliban Sauan + Is going to Zamboanga; + Although there is no trade, + He will return quickly. + + He begged from the Castilian; + He mounted treacherously; + The Castilian demanded his arms; + He got them with his death. + + Ever will I fight, + And even glad will I be if I fall; + I will encounter danger + In the name of God. + + I take pleasure in talking; + I will fight valiantly with my keen kris; + And although my blood is poured on the ground, + I will slash on hearing it fall. + + +The language that they speak consists of Tagalog, Visayan, and +Malayan words. But they make no difficulty about changing, omitting, +and adding letters and syllables. + +This is as much as I have to tell your Reverence. Pray excuse me for +not having written before, for I have already stated the reason. I +beg you to overlook the faults of this document. + +I have no time to copy it, for I have to go to Jolo. + +Your Reverence's most affectionate servant in Christ, + + + Pablo Cavalleria, S. J. + + + + + + +EXTRACT FROM A LETTER WRITTEN BY FATHER PABLO PASTELLS TO THE FATHER +PROVINCIAL, JUAN CAPELL, S. J. [124] + + + Manila, April 20, 1887. + + +... Now considering Mindanao under its social and political aspect, +its population is divided into Christians, heathens, and Moros, all +of whom proceed in general from the Malay, Indonesian races, [125] +and the indigenous or Negrito race, and from crosses of the same +races among themselves and with other superior races, especially +the Chinese and Spaniards. The Christians are divided into old +and new. The old Christians number about 186,000, and occupy in the +ethnographical map accompanying our letters, the place represented by +color no. 1. Their customs smell of the greater or less familiarity +that they have or have had with the heathens from whose races they +proceed. Without the powerful and efficacious influence of religion +one would note in them a marked tendency to idleness, drunkenness, +gambling, and lust. On the other side they are naturally hospitable, +docile, and generous. They are pious in the performance of their +religion. In their family and married life considerable morality is +observed when there exist no rocks of scandal in the villages. I have +observed in certain parish books which register more than two hundred +baptisms per year, that two or three years pass without the notice of a +single natural child. [126] They are given to the cultivation of rice, +abaca, sugar-cane, coffee, tobacco, bananas, lumbias, cocoa-palms, +and other fruit trees, and to that of tubers such as sweet potatoes, +gabe, and aroru, which are an article of prime necessity for them in +times of famine. They extract mastic and other resins, as for example +piao and guisog, and refine the oil of cocoanuts, biao, and balao, +but do not extract castor or peanut oil as they are ignorant of their +use. [127] Wax and honey are very abundant. From the latter, and from +sugar-cane, nipa, cocoanuts, rice and cabo negro they prepare their +drinks, and their vinegars from the last named and from camagon. [128] +They also get salt from sea-water by means of rapid evaporation. [129] +In general, the men are farmers, but among them there are carpenters, +smiths, metal workers, masons, tailors, and even some who devote +themselves to the making of weapons. The women weave the filaments +of pina, tindog, [130] abaca, cotton, and silk. They embroider and +sew most delicately and tastefully. In certain seasons of the year, +many Indians of the coasts, travel and fish especially for sea-turtles, +whether they have any shell or not. [131] + +They live in humble houses of nipa, bamboo, and even of wood, which +are quite luxurious among the most powerful. The animals that they +use for their work, conveyance, and travel are the carabao, the +ox, and the horse. Their implements for farming are reduced to the +plow and the bolo. Their domestic animals are the dog, cat, cock, +and swine. Their games are cockfighting, cards, and sipa, a hollow +ball of split bamboo, which they move with the feet. They also use +dancing as a means of diversion, especially the moro-moro dance and the +tapairon. During their principal feasts, they adorn their houses with +hangings and hold modest banquets. They are very fond of excitement +and noise, especially that caused by fireworks. Their usual cutting +weapons are the hatchet, sundan, ligdao, kris, campilan, tabas, and the +badi for the women. The missile weapons are the spear which may be of +four kinds, namely, puyus, budiac, linayas, and pinuipui; arrows of +bamboo, palma brava, [132] iron, and steel. Those weapons used both +for cutting and thrusting are balaraos or two edged daggers, whose +hilts and scabbards are usually adorned with various designs in silver +engraved by themselves. The boats used by them are vintas, barotos, +bancas, bilus, pancos, faluas, paraos, and lancanes. For fishing +they make use of the harpoon, arrows, bolos, corrals, and nets. For +the same object they also use the bark of the tree called tuble and +the fruits of the tuba-tuba, and lagtan. [133] There trade is, as +a rule, reduced to the articles of prime necessity in food, drink, +clothing, and work utensils. Among the old Christians of Mindanao, +tulisanes by profession are not known, and if there are any in the +south, they are deported. + +The new Christians, from 1876 to the present time, reach some +25,000. In their general characteristics and customs, they +are not distinguished from the races to which they owe their +origin. Nevertheless, after they receive holy baptism, and while +they live as Christians under the civil and religious organization +to which they are subjected by the father missionaries, a very marked +difference is noted, for by the habit of subjection to law which they +acquire by means of the mild means of Christian education which the +missionary who has been able to merit their confidence, strikes, the +change of their customs is facilitated in a remarkable manner, and in +a short time the moral condition of their families and individuals +is changed. I mean [that the above is true] when they persevere [in +the Christian life] for in regard to this, there are some tribes who +are more fickle than others. Thus for example, the converted Mandaya +is much less inconstant than the Manobo, for the importance of being +subject to a beginning of authority is more impressed on his mind. + +The heathen to the number of about 300,000, are divided into different +nations or families of three races properly so called: the Malay, +the Indonesian, and the Negrito. They have many crosses with other +superior races, as the Chinese, Japanese, and even according to some, +the European. [134] + +The Mamanuas (man-banua, "inhabitant of the country") are the true +indigenous aborigines of the country. [135] Their color is dark, +and their hair is oily, woolly, and curly. They are nomadic and go +naked. They pass the night where it overtakes them, taking shelter +under an improvised hut of palasan [136] or of any tree branch. Their +food is the fruit and the roots of the forest and the flesh of +deer, boars, monkeys, snakes, and reptiles. Their weapons are the +bow and arrow, spear, and knife. They have an idea of God and of +a worship, as well as some maxims of natural law. They are timid, +and miserable creatures, moved by necessity, and loving of ease. They +inhabit the small peninsula of Surigao and extend to Tago through the +mountains. Their chiefs generally contract marriage with the Manobo +women. This race is almost extinct in consequence of the privations +incident to their wandering life. Four small villages of Mamanuas exist +in the parish of Mainit and another in that of Gigaquit. The total +number of this tribe does not exceed two or three thousand. Those +baptized number about five hundred. In the map they occupy color +number 2. + +The Manobos or Manuba (man-suba, [137] "river dweller") as is indicated +by their name itself live near the rivers. They inhabit the valley +of the Agusan, which extends from Butuan to Oloagusan. They live +besides on the point of San Agustin on the southern shore of the bay +of Malalag, and in the district of Cottabato, as may be seen in the +ethnographical map, accompanying these letters, color no. 3. + +This tribe is numerous, wild, fickle, easy to reduce, [138] +somewhat difficult to preserve, and suspicious and treacherous in +their attacks. They build their houses near the rivers and often +in the forks of trees. Their religion is very like that of the +Mandayas. They annually change their abode in order to make new +fields, being compelled to do so because of the grass and briars +which spring up. As they have no means for the deep working of the +soil, consequently permanent possession has no charm for them. They +abandon their houses as soon as anyone dies in them, and if the +deceased is an outsider, they demand the worth of the abandoned house +from his relatives. Their system of life is the patriarchal, under +the protection of their respective bagani. The Manobo, according +to Dr. Montano, [139] presents two extreme types: one athletic, +and of much slighter build than the other. Those two types combined +in the majority of the individuals constitute another medium type +whose characters are more plainly marked in the Manobos of Davao, +than in those of the Agusan. Their clothing, weapons, and ornaments +closely resemble those of the Mandayas, with the exception of the +strings of glass beads, which are black rather than red among the +Manobos. Tattooing is practiced among the Manobos, and is done by means +of a needle and powdered charcoal. The number of the Manobos in the +valley of Agusan is about 20,000, half of whom are now reduced. The +number of those of the district of Davao and Cottabato is unknown. + +The Mandayas (man-daya, "people of the upland"--ilaya) is a tribe +extending from Tago to Mati, and from Gandia to the source of the +Agusan, and in the district below the Salug, as may be seen at color +no. 34, of the adjoined ethnographical map. The manners and customs +of the Mandayas are described in a letter written by Father Heras, +June 8, 1878. The Mandayas number about 30,000 of whom 8,000 are +already reduced and baptized. + +The Manguangas [140] (man-gulangas, "people of the woods") live on the +upper part of the Salug. They are warlike and have continual quarrels +with the Manobos and Mandayas of the Agusan, the Moros of the Hijo, +and the Atas. They are easy to reduce. In the map, they occupy the +place corresponding to color no. 5. + +The Monteses (Buquid-non) [141] of the second district of Mindanao +are divided into two groups: those adjacent to the Manobos of the +Agusan between Gingoog and Nasipit, who approach to the habits, and +the social and religious life of the latter; and those who people +the mountains and valleys of the Tagaloan River. Comprehended in the +parish of Balingasag, there are several reductions of them. Their +number is about 4,000. They are shown in the map at color no. 6. + +The Atas (from itaas, ataas, atas, "those who live on the heights") are +the indigenous natives who generally live about the western districts +of Mount Apo. [142] They are warlike and fight against the Moros and +the Bagobos. The Atas extend to the northwest of Davao, and in their +ramifications finally reach to the borders of the Bagobos, Guiangas, +Mandayas, and even to the Subanos and the Monteses of Cagayan and +Maguindanao. The number of this tribe is unknown, even approximately, +but it is conjectured with foundation that it must be very numerous. In +the map they occupy the place corresponding to color no. 7. + +The Guiangas [143] (guanga, gulanga "inhabitant of the woods") +live, according to Father Gisbert, scattered between the rivers and +rancherias of Dulian, Guimalan, Tamugan, Ceril, and Biao near Davao, +and they number about 6,400. Their dialect is entirely different +from those of the others, and they show sufficient intelligence, +but they are very barbarous, and human sacrifices are still held +among them. In the map they occupy color no. 8. + +The Bagobos [144] inhabit the eastern slopes of the Apo. They are +of moderate stature, and well built, for the deformed children +are smothered at birth. They are fond of work. They perform human +sacrifices in order to placate Darago (Da-dago, Du-dugo, Mu-dugo, +"he who sheds blood," or "the shedder of blood") or Mandarangan. They +believe in two beginnings, are difficult to reduce, and easy to keep +after reduction. They are warlike and cruel, excellent horsemen, and +daring fishermen. They dress luxuriantly, and at times wear shirts +which cost them two or three slaves. They drink intus (the sap of +the fermented sugar-cane) and offer it when they make visits to all +those in the assembly beginning with the most worthy. The number of the +Bagobos, according to Father Gisbert, is about 12,000, of whom 800 have +been reduced and baptized. In the map they are found at color no. 9. + +The Calaganes [145] are not Moros. Their captain and all his family +have been baptized, and, in consequence of that, a new reduction +has been formed from the individuals of this tribe in Digos, between +Piapi and Santa Cruz. They are fine fellows and very tractable. In +the map they occupy the color corresponding to no. 10. + +The Tagacaolos [146] (taga-ca-olo, "inhabitant of the head," or +"source of rivers") are as capable as the Bagobos, without being +as cruel and superstitious as they. In their contests they are +generally very valiant especially those who are widowed; for to +become a murderer is a good recommendation for the contraction of +second nuptials. The Tagacaolos are of good figure and of a somewhat +clearer complexion than those of the other tribes with the exception +of the Mandayas. The Tagacaolos occupy the mountains of Haguimitan +in the small peninsula or the cape of San Agustin. Between Malalag, +Malita, and Lais, are found 7,000 and about 2,000 in the peninsula +of San Agustin. There is a small village of this tribe in Malalag of +those newly reduced, which has already 186 Christians. The Loac are +wild Tagacaolos still more degraded than the Mamanuas who live on the +heights of Haguimitan. In the map they will be found at color no. 11. + +The Dulanganes (Gulanganes) called also Bangal-bangal, like the +Manguangas, are people of the woods, and live in the mountains, about +fifteen leguas from the Rio Grande, toward the southern coast. They +are savage and fierce, and the Moros themselves who do not dare +to meddle with them call them a bad race. It could be that the so +cried-up ferocity of the Dulanganes bugaboo was invented by the +Moros for their own ends, according to a note in one of the letters +of Father More. Their number is unknown. They go completely naked, +and for the most indispensable covering they use a kind of small apron +made of bark or the leaves of trees. Their food is the same as that +of the Mamanuas. They do not have houses either, and live in caves +or inside the trunks of trees, or like the Mamanuas. Their weapons +are usually arrows poisoned as I have heard with the curare. Is this +perchance the same curare that is discussed by Father Gumilla in his +Orinoco ilustrado? [147] They will be found at color no. 12 in the map. + +The Tedurayes or Tirurayes [148] live on the slopes at the left +of the lower Pulangui. They number from 8,000 to 10,000 at the +most. They occupy on the map the place corresponding to color +no. 13. They are amiable, friendly to the Spaniards, but oppressed +by the Moros. Their fear of molestation from the Moros together +with their nomadic tendencies, due to the lack of carabaos and farm +implements, make their complete reduction difficult at present. Their +system of government is patriarchal, and the chief of the tribe is +called bandarra. They pay their tributes to the Moro datos as an +annual rent for the lands which they cultivate. The women adorn +their hands and legs in an insupportable manner, with huge brass +rings; and they pierce their ears in which they place pendants more +than one centimeter in diameter. The men allow their hair to grow +like the heathens of other tribes, but do not tie it up like those +tribes. Their weapons and industry show the influence that they have +received from the Moros. They gird the body with belts interwoven from +brass wire a decimeter or so in width. Their religion is a shapeless +aggregation of superstitious ideas. It is not accurate to say that the +Tirurayes have so low an idea of their self respect that they believe +themselves to be honored in prostituting their wives and daughters +with the Spaniards. Given the supposition of some isolated deed which +might seem to prove the abovesaid, a general rule could not be deduced +therefrom against the integrity of the customs of the Tirurayes in +this matter, against which the nature itself, not only of man but +also of the brute animals themselves, cries out with a loud voice. + +The Tagabili or Taga-bulu are, together with the Bilanes, the owners of +the lake of Bulu-an, and live on the southern shore of that lake. This +tribe is warlike and friendly to the Moros, Tirurayes, and Manobos, +who live near them. The Moros of Sarangani are wont to ally themselves +with the Bilanes of Balud and Tumanao in order to fight against the +Tagabilies. I believe that their reduction will be as easy as is +that of the Bilanes. In the map they occupy the place corresponding +to no. 14. + +The Samales [149] of the island of Samal near Davao are Moro +and Mandaya mestizos. They are brave and well inclined to the +Spaniards. Their population reaches about 2,000. There is a new +reduction of Christians in Samal. They are not so difficult to reduce +as are the Moros. They occupy color no. 15 in the map. + +The Bilanes or Buluanes (Bil-an, Bul-u-an, Bulu-an) [150] reside in +the vicinity about the lake of Buluan and in the mountains between +the said lake and the bay of Sarangani. They are the most exploited +tribe and the most degraded physically except the Mamanuas. They are +fugitive, timid, docile, amiable, and easy to reduce. In two of the +islands of Sarangani, Balud and Tumanao, live also about 1,500 Bilanes +who maintain good relations with those of their race in Mindanao, +and with the Manobos of Culaman. They occupy color no. 16 on the map. + +The Subanon ("people of the river") [151] are a tribe that has +become degenerate because of the persecutions which they have had to +endure from the Moros who collect large tributes from them. They are +husbandmen, but the Moros gain the benefit of their sweat. They are +long-suffering and pacific for they are not accustomed to the handling +of arms; and they are superstitious and ignorant. Their docility would +render their complete reduction very easy. They occupy almost all the +peninsula of Sibuguey, and are contiguous to the Moros of Lanao and of +the bay of Illana. The latter make use of them, for they enslave them +in order to make them work their fields. The military road from Tucuran +to Maranding which has been ordered to be built by his Excellency, +Captain-general Terrero, [152] will destroy the dominion exercised by +the Illanos Moros and those of Lanao over the Subanos, for it will +destroy the piracy and captivity because of the impossibility of +communication. At the same time it will facilitate the action of the +missionaries in the reduction of the said heathens. At the present time +there are five reductions of Subanos in the Dapitan district, which +have about 2,000 new Christians; another in the Zamboanga district in +the jurisdiction of Ayala; while three reductions have already been +begun successfully on the bay of Sibuguey, namely, Tupilak, Buluan, +and Bancalan. The Subanos are designated on the map at color no. 17. + +The Lutangos Moros are Calibuganes. They are of a timid and peaceful +nature and live in Silanga de la Olutanga. They engage in fishing, +and have no other dwelling, according to Figueroa, than their vintas in +which they live. Each family carries with it its miserable possessions, +and they pass years without setting foot on the land for even the +fuel that they need is furnished by the mangrove trees. They generally +go naked. Their number does not exceed three or four hundred. On the +map they occupy color no. 20. + +The Calibuganes are Moro and Subano mestizos, who are peaceful and +but little warlike. They share in the religion of the Moros which +is altered by the superstitions of the Subanos. They are considered +by the Moros as a free people, and hence the latter only exact from +them personal service with their vintas. That runs at the account of +the datos, on whom depend the maintenance of the same people. They +live in small groups on the coasts of the peninsula of Sibuguey and +occupy color number 21 on the map. + +Moros. The Moros compared to the Christians of Filipinas, are what +the Jebusites are to the village of God. Consecrated to piracy and +the taking of captives since the beginning of their installation in +Jolo and Mindanao that profession has always been for them the most +solid support of their formidable power. Until 1860 when eighteen +steamboats came to this archipelago it was impossible to break +their indomitable pride, and assure communication with the sea of +Mindoro. Later with the increase of the navy and the installation of +the steamship post it has become impossible for those people to leave +their lurking places in order to practice their infamous raids. The +expeditions of General Claveria against the Moros of Balanguingui; +those of Urbistondo and Malcampo, against the Moros of Jolo; [153] +and the definitive establishment of our forts in Davao, Rio Grande, +and Jolo, have given the deathblow to Mahometanism in the archipelago, +[154] and it is now become shrunken to the reducible circle of the +territory that they overlook, and in that of the heathen rancherias +which surround them, where the beneficent influence of the Spanish +domination has not yet been able to penetrate in an efficacious +and immediate manner. Nevertheless the Moros will be from today and +forever under the vigilant eye of the victorious Lion of Castilla, +so that they may not commit any offenses outside. The day on which +the missionaries shall have succeeded in planting the cross among +the heathens who surround the Moros, then the latter deprived of the +slaves who cultivate the earth for them and clothe them, erect their +houses, and serve them as an object of luxury and trade, will on that +day see their necessity to change the campilan and the kris for the +ploughshare and the plough, the fierce arrogance of the warrior or +pirate, for the pacific gentleness of the man who is forced to gain +his bread by the sweat of his brow. + +The worst Moros are those of Jolo and some rancherias of the coasts +of Basilan called Samal Laut (see color no. 23); the Illanos (no. 18), +who occupy the bay of Illana which gives them their name, and who form +a few groups on the coasts of Sibuguey; those of the lake of Lanao; +those of the valley of the Rio Grande; and those of the coast between +Cottabato and the gulf of Sarangani. + +The most pacific are the Yacanes Moros (no. 22) of the interior of +Basilan; the Sanguiles (number 19); and those of Sarangani, except +some who have come from the Rio Grande. The Moros of the gulf of +Davao and Mayo are not feared both because of their isolation and +their small number. + +[Continuing Father Pastells speaks of the ethnographical map that +accompanies this volume of the Letters. He mentions the fact that +Blumentritt published a map of like character in 1884. The present +map is made from information obtained directly by the Jesuit +missionaries. Concrete information as to the various dialects is +still in so incipient a condition that nothing can as yet be written +definitely on the subject, but Father Pastells holds out the hope +that such information may be given in the near future.] + + + + + + +LETTER FROM FATHER JOSE MARIA CLOTET TO THE REVEREND FATHER RECTOR +OF THE ATENEO MUNICIPAL + + + Talisayan, May 11, 1889. + + Pax Christi. + + My dearly beloved Father Rector in Christ: + + +In my last letter to your Reverence, I indicated to you that I was +gathering some data in regard to the religion, manners, and customs +of the mountain race. Now during the days of our stay in Talisayan, +I shall make use of my spare moments to write your Reverence what +I have been able to learn in the various reductions and visitas of +said heathens. In the present letter, however, I shall only give +information of some interesting matters which are worth knowing, +and are not unsuitable for a familiar letter. + +In order to give the fullest information of the mountain race, I shall +take in general the water farthest up, beginning with their name and +with the territory which they occupy. I shall tell something of their +religion, false beliefs, and peculiar customs, and, not forgetting +their progress and their industries, I shall end by setting down, +although in passing, the fruit which our missionaries have gathered in +a short time among those heathens. I shall not bind myself, however, +to tell everything, but only some of the most remarkable things which +have come to my notice. + +The Monteses, recognized in Mindanao under the name of Buquidnons +(inhabitants of the thicket), are found in the district of Misamis, +and can be considered as divided into three main groups. The first +embraces those who extend through the mountains and fertile plains +bathed by the Tagoloan, Cagayan, and Iponan rivers. The second +comprises the Colindantes with the Manobos of the Agusan between +Gingoog and Nasipit. Those living on the right bank of the Pulangui +River and along some of its affluents form the third group. They are +shown at number 6 on the ethnographical map. [155] From what I have +just explained, it can be easily seen that, although the Buquidnons +have some peculiarities which distinguish them from the other races, +as is natural, yet they approach in the manner of their habitual +social and religious existence, to the other races of this territory, +as I shall note in the course of this brief relation. Their exact +number is not known, but it can be calculated that they at present +exceed 13,000. They are of good stature and graceful build, and even +handsome. Their character is affable and frank, and some of them seem +to me so clever and polished that they are not one whit behind the +most civilized Visayans, and to judge by the frankness with which they +speak to the father missionary, and by the naturalness with which they +handle their affairs with the old Christians, no one would say that +they were heathens. By the capacity of their minds (as Father Urios +very well remarked) they would be elevated as the kings of all the +Manobos, since they surpass the latter so greatly. However, to tell +the truth, one always recognized in heathens, whoever they may be, +that their understanding is obscured and confused by false ideas which +penetrate into all the acts of their life. In the race of which I am +treating they are shown to be heathens by certain vices of egoism, +their self-interest, and the satisfaction that they take. Blessed +forever be the light of our holy faith which enlightens us with +the true knowledge of God and of ourselves, and infuses us with +self-abnegation and supernatural love for God and our neighbors! + +From what I have seen and heard I can assert that the dress of +the Monteses is better than that of all the rest of the races of +Mindanao in point of decorum and modesty, and in affirming this, +I refer, not only to the men but also to the women. The skirts which +the latter wear down to the ankles fasten securely at the waist their +white shirt. Above this they wear another very short and well-fitting +shirt on which they sew little bits of cloth of many different colors +in the manner of fine patchwork. The sleeves are short and full and +are ornamented in the same manner. They take pleasure in choosing +the colors and designs with which to adorn their dress. On the left +side of the girdle they hang rings and bundles of sweet-scented herbs +mixed with glass beads and hawk's-bells. Fine rings of copper, brass +or silver on their legs hanging quite loosely, produce a certain sound +when they walk, which invites the attention of him who is ignorant of +such a custom. Their manner of dressing the hair is also peculiar and +characteristic, for they twist and knot the chief lock of the hair, +without braiding it, in the form of a large high crown. All about the +head hang very short locks of hair of equal length, which take the +form of a small circle on the forehead, and sometimes almost cover +the eyebrows. They allow the forelocks to grow to a great length, +although that gives them an especial grace. A beautiful comb very well +made from metal, more or less precious, according to the wealth of the +one who wears it, crowns the said headdress. Many are the women who are +materially laden with bracelets from the wrists almost to the elbows, +some of metal, others of tortoise-shell, others of taclobo, [156] +etc., etc. As an ornament for their ears they generally wear some wide +eardrops (balaring) formed by a cylinder of wood, generally soft, at +the bases of which are fixed two round and unequal plates of engraved +brass, silver, gold, or copper. In order to insert these eardrops, +they make very large holes in the lobes of the ears until the smaller +sheet of metal can pass through the said orifice, so that the cylinder +may rest on the inner edges of the said orifice. They have necklaces +and rings of several kinds, some of them of great value. They are often +made of strings of beads interwoven in different colors. Not seldom do +they have clusters of hawk's-bells and shells, or bundles of blue or +red silk hanging from the necklaces. They have other necklaces which +they call balucag, which are made from the hairs of the wild boar, +and which they weave in the manner of small hoops and unite in the +manner of a net, which are ornamented bits of shells, glass beads, +and other trifles of the same kind. My attention was peculiarly +struck by a necklace made of silver coins which were quite old, +and which diminished in size successively from the center to the +ends. The center was a duro of Carlos III, somewhat flattened out, +which formed as it were the medallion of the necklace. The latter, +besides being original, was quite valuable, for the thirty odd +pesos which it must have been worth are a capital for a mountaineer +of that small rancheria. Such jewels are seldom parted with however +much necessity presses them, and thus it is explained how they pass +from father to son for many generations. The rings that I saw among +the individuals of that race were all of brass; but I am assured +that those of gold and silver are not scarce. It is to be noted that +not only do they adorn the fingers with them but also their toes. Of +all these vain ornaments of eardrops, necklaces, and rings, they are +despoiled when they receive the health-giving waters of baptism, like +one who renounces the world and its pomp and vanity. Those objects +are taken from them for they are wont to use them as amulets against +this or that sickness, against such or such an injury which they fear, +or, to obtain more easily their desires, etc., etc. In exchange, the +father missionary gives them medals, rosaries, and scapularies, which +they take great pleasure in showing, and wear hanging from the neck. + +The dress of the men is simple and usually like that of the +Indians. But they are very valuable when they have on their court +apparel, for then they wear long breeches of European cloth, and +many wear jackets of the same material, and fine beaver hats while +they are not without shoes and shirts of much value. The shirts are +not worn outside as the other Indians wear them, but they hide them +as much as possible except the bosom, especially if they are well +embroidered. Those who dress in the most beautiful gala attire, cut +the hair and take care of it, but most of them who are fugitives +and have but little intercourse with the Christians let the hair +grow without taking any care of it. They twist it in order to make +the crown which they hide under a handkerchief, usually a red one, +which they wear tied about the head in the manner of the swains of +Aragon. Some consider it an important ornament for their person to +dye the teeth black and file them by means of flints, which take the +place of a file with them. Although I have not seen it, I have been +assured that the very rich cover their teeth with sheets of very +thin gold, which they only take out when they eat. It is amusing +to see the Monteses, who have recently come down from the woods, +among the old Christians. In order not to be taken for Buquidnons, +they present themselves so prinked out and walk along the streets +so carefully, that one would think that they do not set their feet +on the ground, and being so unnatural in their movements, they move +the others to laughter in that very thing by which they are trying +to please them. There is no better grace than naturalness. + +In the brief examination that we made of what passes among the +individuals of this race, in the deities whom they adorn, their +sacrifices, and their songs and traditions, we shall see that they have +some ideas of God, of heaven, of eternity, and of the first man. But +they are so material, small, and disfigured, that by transverse light +alone can the greatness of the primitive creeds be divined. Like the +polytheists that they are, they have four gods at the four cardinal +points: at the north, Domalongdong; at the south, Ongli; at the +east, Tagolambong; and at the west, Magbabaya. Those gods, with their +wisdom and power rule and govern this great mass of the world which we +inhabit. Who does not see in these four deities a perfect resemblance +to the Vazus, of the worshipers of Brahma? Now then, if those gods, +according to the Buquidnons, govern this great fabric of the world with +so great acumen from the four cardinal points, in the same manner, +according to the Brahmans, Vazu-Pulastia governs the nations of the +north; Vazu-Yama those of the south; those of the east, Vazu-Indra; and +those of the west Vazu-Varuna. And so great is the order and concert of +those regions that therefrom results the harmony of the whole universe, +and, consequently, the so extensive worship which the inhabitants of +India attribute to their Vazus, so that offended by men the order of +this world might not be overturned. The god Magbabaya, that is to say, +"the all-powerful one," has as equals in rank the god Ibabasug, and +Ipamahandi. The former is invoked for the fortunate delivery of women; +the latter takes care of carabaos, horses, and other larger and smaller +cattle, and since a Buquidnon is rarely seen, who does not possess +some of these animals for his ordinary work, hence, they invoke that +divinity with so great frequency and in any disagreeable mischance +that may happen to the said animals. From Tagumbanua, or the god of +the fields, they hope for a good harvest, and dedicate the feast called +caliga to him after the harvesting of the fruits. They invoke the Tao +sa sulup or "men of the woods" (who resemble the Anitos of the Ilocan +heathens) in their wars, diseases, journeys, etc. Those divinities +according to them, are genii, who live within the trunks of the large +trees, or on huge crags. They intervene in the affairs of mortals, +harming them or protecting them, according as they are contrary or +propitious. I noted on a certain occasion that, on passing before a +leafy tree called balite, the mountaineer who accompanied me lowered +his voice and was very much frightened. I asked him the reason for +it, and after many urgings he considered it advisable to give me the +explanation of his fright in these words: "The Buquidnons affirm that +the balite is the habitation of Magtitima, or an invisible being of +the woods, who, if he does not receive a sacrifice of white fowls, +grows angry at mortals and does not allow them to cut the wood, and +sends them sickness. Although I do not believe those things, I have a +certain fear in passing near these trees." I urged him to cast off so +superstitious belief and to trust in God, who is the only one who can +deliver us from all sicknesses and danger of soul and body. The idol +called Tigbas figures among the Buquidnons as a very highly respected +god. They look upon him with great reverence, for they believe that he +descended from the sky. Only the chief datos among them possess that +idol. The said idol is made of stone, as is also the pedestal that +supports it. The people guard it with the greatest care among the most +esteemed objects of their ancestors, and only show it to those whom +they consider as very closely allied to themselves, either by reason +of friendship or kinship. Talian is another little idol represented +by the figure of a monkey seated on its haunches. They make it from +the root of the alder tree. Generally they carry it hanging from the +breast by means of a cord which the unhappy Talian has tied about his +neck. When they go on a journey and fear an ambush, they take that +little idol by the string and let it hang in the air free in the manner +of a plumb-line, and toward the direction where its gaze rests, they +say that the enemies are preparing an ambush for them there. In order +to free themselves from those enemies they leave the road which they +had taken and follow one entirely different. If they suffer from any +sickness, they submerge the idol in a basin of water and then drink +the water immediately, for they believe that by so doing they will +recover their lost health. Sometimes they say that it is sufficient +to touch with the idol the ailing member, or the painful part, in +order to find relief and even a total cure. Finally, they make use +of it in order to divine where the objects or jewels which they have +lost by chance are. They always try to keep the Busao or evil spirit +well dispositioned. For that purpose they offer him food and drink, +singing and dancing, according to their custom. At the same time +they recite certain prayers, asking him to free them from such or +such a calamity which they fear. The old men are generally the ones +who offer the sacrifices, which usually consist only of the offering +of fruits of the soil, and in the sacrifice of some swine and fowls, +in order to court or make amends to one of their deities. One of their +most common altars consists of a column with a dish on the upper part +which contains some offering. The two cross timbers which are seen +in the middle part are for the purpose of holding their little idols. + +Leaving aside many other superstitious things in regard to their gods, +which no less than the preceding give an idea of the sad condition +of these poor wretches, I shall pass on to speak briefly of their +marriages, which are agreed upon by the sole authority of the ancients +or Maslicampo. [157] The latter who is also the one who directs all +the chief affairs, determines by his own opinion that the alliance +between such a youth and such a maiden shall take place, whether it +be at the insinuation of the sweethearts or at the entreaty of their +parents. Some promises then being made between the parents of the +bride and the father of the young man, the relatives of each party +having been summoned assemble in the house that has been previously +prepared, where everything must be in abundance, but especially a +liquor called pangasi, which they keep in certain large jars. When the +hour for the marriage has arrived, the bridal couple having exchanged +some words between themselves, receive from their respective parents +a ball of morisqueta. They hold it for some minutes in the palm of +the hand, and then the groom gives the ball of morisqueta to his +wife and with that ceremony the marriage is effected. By that means, +as is obvious, is indicated the duty which they have and recognize +of mutually supporting one another and trying to procure the support +of the family. A fine bichara is prepared among the guests while the +feast lasts. There is abundance of food, sauces, and beverages, which +are arranged with great anticipation. A solemn drunken revel follows +this kind of banquet, the effect of that beverage, which they suck up +through long reeds, placed in the jars which hold it. Unless they are +datos or chief men, there are but few of them who have two or three +wives, which, unhappily, is more common among other heathen races. + +Father Eusebio Barrado, a missionary among those people, told me on +a certain occasion that they exhibit great repugnance when they have +to pass through the territory of other datos to whom they are not +subject. In order that the traveler may make such passage without +any danger, the chiefs have a spear called quiap, much larger than +ordinary spears with incrustations of silver along the shaft, and the +lower end of metal. They give it for a trifling recompense as a safe +conduct to the travelers who have to cross through the territories of +other datos, and the latter on recognizing the spear of the chief dato +allow such persons to pass freely without harming them in the least, +but on the contrary showing them consideration and deference. This +takes place as I have been informed by a person worthy of all credit, +even when there is war between the different factions. + +The principal datos show their greatness by the use of enormous vases, +where they keep rare and curious articles. Those vases are used at the +same time for the storing of food. The agunes are not less esteemed by +them, but the things held in highest estimation both by rulers and by +subjects are certain quadrangular prismatic boxes like small coffers, +which are ornamented on the outer part and on all their sides with +two cuarto coins, in the form of very symmetrical and harmonious +designs. In those boxes they keep their clothes and weapons. The +weapons which they use most are balaraos of greater or less value, +which they acquire from the Manobos of Agusan, in exchange for cloth, +maize, camotes, salt, etc., etc.; the bangcao, or spear that they use +both for hunting and for fighting with their enemies and for their +exploits, one of which is the capturing and enslaving of children, +after they have assassinated their parents. The said spears are +generally of an excellent temper, as are also their bolos, and a +certain other weapon called kris, which has been seen at times in +the possession of the Buquidnons and is without doubt acquired from +the Moros. For besides it being well-known that the Buquidnons have +communication with the Moros by means of the river Pulangui, the said +krises have Moro inscriptions and seals. I had a bolo in my hands +whose handle or hilt surpassed many krises in value, for since it was +of a dark, very hard and heavy wood, which I thought to be mancono +[158] it had many large incrustations of silver, and from some of the +silver which had been lost I discovered that they were not merely thin +plates but pieces of quite a large size. The corresponding scabbard +was of baticulin [159] and was worked with great skill. + +Father Barrado of whom I have made mention a while ago assured me that +he had seen among these heathens one who had a coat-of-mail made of +brass plates, of very thick wire of the same metal and ornaments of +silver, which was made to cover all the breast and the back. It would +be difficult to say from whom and in what manner they obtained them, +but according to the method in which they are constructed and by +what I have been able to ascertain they appear to be very ancient, +and, consequently, worthy of being exhibited in any museum of arms +or antiquities. They have other more common ones which they make +themselves, and which consist of certain bolsters about three fingers +thick, well quilted, which cover their breast and back, not only from +the darts but also from the spears of their enemies. The petty rulers +of this race bind their temples with the pinditon which is a crown +of cloth with three points, that of the center being the largest, +and all of them ornamented in the style of the mountain. I shall tell +on what occasions they make use of this crown. + +Various are the said objects in my possession, as well as a curious +sacafuegos [firemaker] of which I am going to say a few words, which +are due to the kindness and generosity of Don Procopio de Alcantara, +judge of the village of Tagoloan. The sacafuegos consists of two +cylinders of wood of great resisting power, and not very porous. One +of them is hollow and the other solid. The latter, which is fitted +very perfectly to the interior part of the former, has at one end a +little tinder with very fine powdered sulphur. Having been prepared +in this manner it is inserted a trifle at the said end into the hollow +cylinder, and a smart blow is struck on it in order to send it all at +once [into the hollow cylinder], and then by drawing it out quickly, +the tinder is found to be alight and is immediately applied to the +tobacco. That is no other than a small pneumatic flint and steel, +such as is usually represented by the authors of books on physics. + +They smoke the tobacco which they grow themselves, which is +considered to be of the most excellent quality. They sell it in not +small quantities in Cagayan in exchange for clothes or other objects +that they need. Since the people of this race have been somewhat more +civilized than those of others, they smoke the tobacco in small clay, +wood, or horn pipes, which they make themselves, adding a small bamboo +joint for a mouthpiece. They chew tobacco without swallowing it, as +well as buyo. Instead of keeping the lime [for the buyo] in bamboo +tubes beautifully worked, as do the Manobos and Mandayas, they keep +it in small brass boxes, which are beautified with cunningly-made +adornments, each one of which has its fitting ladle of the same metal, +fashioned by means of a small chain. + +In order to be more unembarrassed in their voyages, they use what +they call salapa, which is a brass box in the form of a crescent which +they fasten to the front of their girdle by cords. The lotoan or pouch +which is adorned with rich and vari-colored embroidery, is also used +by them in their excursions. In it they keep their money, tobacco, +buyo, rice, etc., etc. Although they can undertake long voyages afoot, +without giving out, and can well endure the discomforts of the road +through mountains and woods, they are such good horsemen that however +steep may be the ascents they never alight from their horses. The horse +is generally caparisoned with one or two strings of hawk's-bells, in +the manner of the mule teams conducted by the muleteers of Cataluna, +and they make as do the latter such a racket that they advise the +traveler of their passing from a long distance. + +They engage in the cultivation of the soil, and make extensive +plantations of maize, which supply them not only with their ordinary +food but also with goodly profits by selling it to the beach villages, +thus obtaining in exchange many articles which they do not possess in +the woods, salt being the chief. Since they do not count by months +or by years, but by harvests, in order to know the time for their +sowing they pay attention to the aspect of the sky. Accordingly, +when they see certain constellations in the firmament which they +designate by very curious and completely arbitrary names, since +they know that they are, for example, those which precede the rainy +season, they hasten to burn their trees and prepare the ground for +sowing. I have seen the plow used for the cultivation of the soil, +one somewhat different from those of Espana. He who guides it is never +without his adze with which to cut the roots which he finds as the +plow passes. For the finer labor, they use a small hoe with a short +curved handle. Scarcely will one find a house of Buquidnons where there +are not one or at times more small mills for grinding maize. They are +made of two very hard stone cylinders. The inner is fixed on a wooden +upright, while the upper is movable, and has an orifice in its center +through which the maize is poured. The circular movement by which +the grain is crushed is produced by a handle securely fastened to one +side of the movable cylinder. An apparatus which I saw in Jasaan for +removing cotton seed appeared very ingenious to me. It consists in +the special gearing of the screws [engrenaje particular de las roscas] +of two cylinders. Those cylinders being very close together allow the +filaments of cotton to pass but not the seeds, which are as large as +small peas. The motion is produced by means of a crank which is the +continuation of the upper cylinder. The whole apparatus is wooden, but +is operated with sufficient regularity although with some discomfort +to the one operating it. Not a little time is given by the Monteses to +the harvesting of abaca for they are not ignorant of the high price of +that filament, in commerce. But to many of them their dream proves very +contrary, for they often meet with Chinese traders, cunning as are no +others, who exploit them by deceiving them in the price and weight, +and what is worse, fill them with alcohol, by enticing them to drink +deeply. In fact after the unfortunate fellows have used all the week +in transacting the business they again return to their woods with the +after effects of their intoxication, without abaca, without money, +with some miserable gewgaws perhaps and a mind irritated by the deceit +of which they were the victims. It would be advisable to impose an +efficacious corrective on those exploiters of an evil class, and worse +tricks, in favor of the poor Monteses. When the palay is harvested, +on rising and before undertaking the ordinary labors, until daybreak, +they generally sing popular songs, men and women alternating, either +the history of their ancestors, or the prowess of one of their heroes, +or some events of our first parents, Adam and Eve, corrupted and +mixed as is supposed by their false beliefs. The airs of those songs +are in general gloomy and monotonous. Their musical instruments are +few and rudimentary, among them being the pulala, or bamboo clarinet, +which has a very shrill sound, but which is the most appreciated; and +instruments of bamboo resembling a flute; an imitation of a guitar +(tiape) with only three strings; and the dayuray, or a very small +drum whose box is made of the shell of the cocoanut or a bamboo tube. + +Although they are so sunk in the darkness of heathenism they have +some glimmerings of civilization among themselves, without doubt +the vestige of the past Spanish domination, for they have their laws +and courts for the punishment of theft and other crimes, laws which, +transmitted from father to son, are reformed according to the greater +or less discretion of the superior dato, to whom those who have been +offended in a serious matter have recourse to demand justice. The +dato, seated, and with his temples bound with his flaming pinditon +and grasping in his right hand the famous quiap, has two subordinate +datos sit near him, and then the criminal is immediately brought to +his presence. Those who conduct him leave their spears thrust into the +ground near the steps of that tribunal, so that no one in view of the +crime of which the criminal is convicted dares to take the justice of +the criminal into his own hands. The arguments for each side having +been heard, after deliberation, the superior dato administers justice, +together with the subordinate datos present at the act. The penalty +decreed is executed without delay for the satisfaction of the aggrieved +parties, the punishment of the offender, and the public warning of +all. When the crime is not very serious, the offender is condemned to +pay a certain number of large and small plates, to which a China jar +is sometimes added, if the crime is somewhat greater. After the fine +has been paid the one offended and the offender have to cleave with one +single blow of the bolo, and at the same time a rattan which is held by +the judges. If by accident the rattan should not be cut at one time, +it is an evident sign that the opposing parties are still enemies, +and, consequently, they yet look upon one another with care and dread. + +It is a well-established fact among these heathens that he who kills +a dato has committed so great a crime that it can never be erased, +and the author and all his descendants are considered as slaves, +and all have the right to reduce them to slavery whenever they wish. + +I will mention here certain peculiar apprehensions and some of the +superstitions of this race. + +Whenever they offer any food or drink to guests, they first taste +it in order to remove all suspicion of deceit or poison from their +guests. Among the Monteses it is a lack of education and good breeding +to mention their names in conversation. If any of them is asked +"What is your name?" the one interrogated does not answer, but some +other person of the group will say "His name is Colas." In regard to +the rest which man ought to take they say that it is better for him +to imitate the birds, which go to bed at the setting of the sun and +wake up at the reddening of the dawn. They say that the rainbow is +the red girdle of two famous men, Banlac and Aguio, who mounted up to +heaven by a great leap from the hill called Balabag, without any more +being known of them. These heathens reckon by nights and not by days, +so that their method of expression is as follows: "That voyage will +last about six nights;" "After four nights we shall begin to build +the house." I mind me that the ancient Germans did the same thing, +and I believe that some peoples of Oceanica had the same custom in +remote times. When they are outside of their houses and away from +their village or rancheria, when they see that the moon has a halo, +they are persuaded that somebody is being judged in their village, +and for fear that it may be one of their partisans they immediately +return home, to see whether they can save the defendant. They are +convinced that if it rains and the rays of the sun illumine, at the +same time, such or such a distant wood, it is because the Buquidnons +are at war in the said point, and the sun does not wish to hide its +light so that they may fight with greater valor. If they hear the +song of the bird limocon under certain circumstances, they do not +leave their houses, for as they say some danger or ambush awaits them +on the way. If the song surprises them on the road itself, in this +or that position which they ascertain, they immediately return to +their houses and refuse to continue for certain reasons. When they +find the worm called labud in the middle of the road they go back, +for they assert that some sickness or misfortune would overtake them, +if they did not do so. If they enter any house to visit those who live +there, and during the conversation any cock or hen flies and passes +in front of the stranger, the owners of the house immediately kill the +bold bird, and it is eaten in friendly intercourse with the guest, in +order to remove his fright and bring his soul back, which they believe +has been separated from the body through fright and returns again to +the same body joyfully. I could mention other interesting things of +the same kind, but I leave them in order not to tire your Reverence. + +When speaking of the dwellings of these heathens, one must distinguish +between those who live in settlements and those who live in the +woods. The former build their houses well spread out and comfortably, +it being indispensable for them to have a projecting wing joined to +the house itself in the manner of a gallery, open to the air on all +sides except that by which it communicates with the interior. To this +gallery is fitted the stairway, generally of wood, very simple in form +and generally without balustrades. The materials employed are not +always bamboo and nipa. I have seen the houses of Buquidnons which +have board walls excellently constructed, very strong, but needing +no nails, hammers, or saws. How is that? I will tell something about +it. Here is the crucial point, as one generally says; for some boards +are simply sewn to others. And I must tell another marvel so that +with one surprise we are relieved of another. All the boards have six +holes along their length three on one side and three on the other, +and joining the boards by the edges they pass a bit of very fine and +tough rattan through the said holes, and they are so tightly bound +together that nails are not missed at all. Those who live scattered +in the interior of the woods build their houses low, but raised very +far above the ground through their fear of the spears of their enemies. + +Very great is the respect that all these heathens show for their +deceased. Accordingly, they generally bury them in their fields +and with them the spear, bolo, and other precious things which they +especially used during their lifetime. Along the place that the corpse +occupies they heap up the earth, and form a small mound, and at short +intervals in the ground they fasten certain tree trunks in the form +of an X, on top of which they place the bark of a tree, which serves +as a roof for the earth mound, which they consider as sacred. Never +do they forget to suspend from the upper end of a large pole, a small +sack of rice, on which the deceased supports himself until his soul +takes according to them the long road to Mount Bolotucan. Bolotucan +is the highest peak which dominates all the region comprehended +between Jasaan and Lagonlong. When the deceased reaches the summit +of the same he gets into heaven by jumping up, reaching a higher or +lesser point according to the probity of his life, and there he will +remain forever. All the relatives of the deceased, both men and women, +make great demonstrations of grief when death occurs. They let their +hair hang loose as a sign of mourning, and do not bind it up again +until after a greater or less period, according to the love which +they professed for the deceased. + +I have recounted all these things so minutely in order that the +obscurity and darkness in which all those of this race were before +they were visited by the father ministers, may be understood. Reverend +Father, the consolation which I have had, on seeing the zeal and +activity with which these fathers procure the spiritual and material +welfare of so many poor creatures, is unspeakable. In honor of truth +I must tell your Reverence that their hopes and labors have not been +in vain, for in less than four years, more than 6,600 heathens who +dwelt in the region of the shadow of death, have been illumined +by the torch of the faith, have denied their false beliefs and +ridiculous superstitions, and have been regenerated in the waters of +baptism. Fortunate missionaries who are occupied in such ministries, +and happy converts who have passed from so great vileness to so great +dignity by the labors of those missionaries! + +The objects described in the present letter which are not in my +possession, I have sketched from the natural. When I shall return +there I shall be glad to hand them to your Reverence. + +I beg that you will not forget me in your holy sacrifices and prayers. + +Your servant in Christ Jesus, + + + Jose Maria Clotet, S. J. + + + + + + +PRESENT BELIEFS AND SUPERSTITIONS IN LUZON + + +[The following we translate from the supplement to the Manila newspaper +El Renacimiento, of the date of December 9, 1905, which was called +to our attention by James A. LeRoy. It is deserving of a place in +this series, as showing what is actually believed at the present time +among some of the ignorant Filipinos.] + + + +THE MANGKUKULAM + +Here, as in Europe, and in almost all parts, the people believe +in witches. + +The mangkukulam [160] is the male or female witch of Filipinas. To +that one is attributed a certain power of witchcraft by the common +people which makes him full of terror to many. He has the custom of +not looking straight at his interlocutors, I do not know whether it +is because he fears the open or searching glance of them or not. He +always keeps his eyes lowered, and whenever it is necessary to direct +his gaze toward the person with whom he is talking, he does it on +all occasions by glancing up sideways, and he has never dared to meet +directly the gaze of the others. + +It is a general belief that the mangkukulam is almost omnipotent in +matters pertaining to doing evil to his neighbor. By the mere wish +alone, he can produce sickness in any person who has secured his +ill-will. In general, the sicknesses that he usually deals out are +most intense headaches, or aches in other parts of the body, boils +or internal tumors, swellings on the head or in any other place, +such ailments being all inexplicable to the immense majority of the +crowd, of the ignorant masses, who do not give credit, understand, +or have faith in the power, capacity, or secrets of science. + +He who gains the ill-will or enmity of these witches of Filipinas, +can rest assured that if he goes out for a walk in the street, when +he is about to re-enter his house he will perceive himself to be +stricken with some sort of ailment, through the means and influence +of the angered mangkukulam, who has already taken it upon himself to +make him a present of the illness which suits him best--pains in the +stomach, swellings in any part of the body, swellings on the head, +deformity in the genital parts, etc., etc. + +It happens as a rule that when any person is attacked by any of the +above ailments, he begins to talk of certain deeds as if he had done +them in company with some person there present, at the very moment when +he feels himself stricken by the ailment. At the same time he cites +names that are unknown, and localities more or less distant. That +is an assurance that during such moments, the patient is completely +bewitched by the mangkukulam, who has penetrated into his body, and +that the latter is the one who causes the patient to talk. It cannot +be said that the patient is delirious during those moments, for rarely +is he accustomed to have a fever, and in general has none. Besides, +every day, and whenever the ailment attacks him, he repeats the words, +deeds, and citations that he mentioned the first time--all of this +preceded by the exclamation "Oh! oh! now you are here again!" This +exclamation forces the members of the family of the one attacked to +believe more and more strongly that the sick man has been effectively +bewitched by the mangkukulam, that the latter had entered the body of +the one attacked at that time, and that physicians and medicines are +powerless to cure those evils which are produced by those witches of +Filipinas, for the simple reason that the physicians do not believe +in the existence of the mangkukulam or in their witchcraft. + +In these cases, the herbalists themselves, who are frequently called +in to aid all kinds of sickness are useless. + +Nothing remains except to mention here certain details which complete +the picture of the mangkukulam or give an exact idea of what they are, +according to the popular belief. + +Every mangkukulam has his abubut. [161] The abubut consists of a small +tampipi which does not contain more than a small rag doll similar to +those that, are sold in front of the doors of our churches in order +to amuse our children with them, and a small cushion stuck full of +innumerable pins. + +In the abubut lies, according to popular belief, all the power of +the mangkukulam. Without it, the mangkukulam is powerless, and even +inoffensive, if one wishes. + +When the mangkukulam plans to do any harm to any person whomever, he +goes to the quarter of his house where he always keeps his abubut, +and takes out the doll and a pin. Then he sticks the latter in +whatever part of the body of the doll that he wishes. By that means, +accompanied by the desire of producing or causing evil to the person +at whom he has been angered, that person will be found to be stricken +with some sort of sickness in the part of the body where the doll has +been pricked. And since in general, no success is had in applying +the appropriate remedy for the sickness suffered by those who are +made ill by the means and influence of the mangkukulam, the family +decide to call a physician. + +But the physician in those cases, is not the real physician who has +been for a long time singeing his eyebrows and devouring countless +text books in the universities, and who has not few years of experience +in the hospitals. Neither is he the mediquillo, [162] who is, in many +cases, a simple practitioner with some notions of medical science in +his head. Neither is he the poor herbalist, who knows and is acquainted +with the curative virtues of some plants, aided by the famous book +of Father Santa Maria. [163] No, not one of these serves for the +case. The physician whose services are needed, is he who expressly +devotes himself to the cure of those bewitched by the mangkukulam. + +These physicians of the kulam, after looking at the patient +attentively, who equally with the mangkukulam cannot resist the glance +of any other person in the moments when he is attacked by the sickness; +and after hearing what things the sick one says, approaches any member +of the family to tell him that the sick one is really possessed by +the mangkukulam; and at the same time to ask whether the family cares +to have him cured. + +If the reply is in the affirmative, preparations are made and the +sick man is submitted to the following practices. + +All the toes of his feet, and the fingers of his hands are tied up +in anona bark. If the sick one continues to cry out and to utter all +the things that he has been accustomed to say, adding thereto the +petition for pardon with the promise of not doing it again, it is +a sign that the mangkukulam has not had time to escape or leave the +body of the patient. Then the physician takes a well-dried ray's tail, +such as is often used as a cane, and prescribes for the sick person a +good stiff caning [paliza de padre y senor mio] from his head to his +feet. This operation is repeated for three or four consecutive days, +longer, if contrary to what the mangkukulam promises by word of mouth, +he again takes up his lodging in the body of the sick person. Lastly, +it is decided whether or not to go on with the operation completely +to the end. That consists in bathing the sick person in boiling water, +and in the result thereof the patient finds a true remedy for his ills, +for when the bath is finished, he ceases to suffer forever. + +These practices obey their long-established conviction that it is +not the sick person who suffers from the great acts of nonsense +committed on him. Many affirm that they have found the mangkukulam +who had bewitched the sick person dead on different occasions after +such practices had been finished. + +Since I have been in the province of Nueva Ecija, I have had the +opportunity to prove one thing; namely, that the mangkukulam fears +or flees from anonas. The fact by which I have been able to prove it +is as follows. + +A poor woman was found some weeks ago suffering from severe pains +in the stomach, accompanied by nausea and vomiting. The family which +was composed of several brothers, was thoroughly convinced that their +sister had been bewitched by a mangkukulam. As they did not know any +physicians for the kulam, they summoned me to please visit and treat +the sick woman. I held off as much as possible, by saying that inasmuch +as I did not believe in any of those superstitions, it was impossible +to cure her; aside from the fact that I was not even a physician. My +excuses availed nothing. They begged and entreated me so hard that +there was no other remedy than to comply with their wishes. When +I reached the house of the sick person, she was, as the saying is, +throwing up her guts, so great was the violence of the vomiting. As +soon as she had fallen sick she had lost her sight so completely that +she could see absolutely nothing, as long as she was attacked by the +sickness, and very little (indeed, very little), when the attack left +her. Consequently, she was told nothing of my arrival until she heard +me speak. She asked her brothers who was there, and they told her, +adding that they had summoned me to cure her. + +As soon as it was understood that I was there for that purpose, the +vomiting ceased for a moment, and the woman was quite calm. After a +quarter of an hour, and feeling vexed because of the false light in +which they were trying to make me appear, I took my leave, saying +that since the ailment of the sick woman had passed, I had nothing +to do there. But scarcely had I crossed the threshold of the street +door when the vomiting was repeated and one of the brothers called me +again in a low voice, asking me to please have the kindness to return +since the sick woman was once more attacked by the mangkukulam. I armed +myself with patience, and went back until I again found myself face to +face with the sick woman. At a certain moment in which the patient was +making great efforts to expel what she had in her stomach, I asked +one of those present in a loud voice to please get me some anonas +branches. The vomiting of the sick woman ceased suddenly as soon as she +heard such a request, and did not return to rack her all that day and +until the following day. At that time the same scenes were reproduced +as on the preceding day. For three days they continued to call me to +the said house, and I perceived that the attack disappeared as soon +as I spoke of, or mentioned, the anonas. For the rest, I declare +that in spite of these observations, I have not come to believe in, +or to be convinced of, the existence of witches in Filipinas. However, +such beliefs continue to exist in the popular mind. + +There are two kinds of physicians of the kulam. Those belonging to +the first class are the ones of whom I have just spoken. Those of +the second class are inoffensive and very worthy, therefore, of +being mentioned. + +Several persons have informed me of the following fact of which they +were eyewitnesses. On a certain occasion a physician of the kulam was +summoned to treat a swelling. That physician after having examined the +sick person carefully, and proved that there really was a swelling, +asked for a bit of wax, of which he made a small figure of human +shape. While he was moulding the small figure, he ordered hot water +prepared in a carahay, and when it began to boil, he put the figure +upright on it. When all the people expected to see it dissolved in +the boiling water (tremble, my readers!) they saw the figure begin to +jump about on the water without being submerged or being melted. Ten +or fifteen minutes after the small figure had been hopping about +on the surface of the water, a person came to the door of the house, +calling out with vehemence. He was beating his feet quite openly with a +handkerchief which he carried in his hand. He could not remain quiet or +keep any position for five seconds, so restless was he. He was making +so many contortions and grimaces with his face that one could not at +all doubt that he was suffering terribly. He appeared to be walking +on thorns. When that man reached the inside of the house, he began to +beg pardon over and over again, promising never again to do "what he +had done. The physician of the kulam took the small wax figure from +the water and approached the new arrival, whom he ordered to undo +the charm with which he had troubled the patient. The new arrival +replied immediately that it was undone. Thereupon the physician told +him never again to repeat what he had just done, and threatened him +that it be relapsed, he would have to cut off his ears, so that all +people might recognize him as such magkukulam. The magkukulam, who +was the same man who had just arrived, promised never again to do what +he had done, for fear of being exposed to the wrath of the populace. + +When this was finished, the physician sent him away, and from that +moment, the sick person was completely well. + +Besides these, it is said that there is another kind of magkukulam +who are known under the name of kusim or palipad hagin. But I believe +that it is the same dog with a different collar; for I consider that +the kusim or the palipad hagin is nothing else than a variety of the +power of witchcraft possessed by these beings. + +In the mind of the masses, it is held that the ailment or sickness +which these latter beings bring about are sent through the air, +whence they have taken their name. Those ailments are, moreover, +incurable, for they say (walang pasauli) that they do not return to +the place whence they have come. + +Both these and the first, that is the simple magkukulam dash themselves +face downward every Friday in their respective quarters, well wrapped +up and uttering doleful exclamations. When this occurs, it is said that +they suffer terribly the consequences of their power. That condition +of depression is called nagbabata by the masses. On the following +day these beings are found all sound and well, and hurrying to the +witches' sabbath, or unlawful assembly which is held at a determined +spot, where on midnight of Saturday meet the asuang, mananangal, and +mangkukulam, in order that they may all together enjoy the delicious +feast of human flesh. + + + Jose Nunez + + Manila, December 6, 1905. + + + + + + +NOTES + + +[1] The translation of the title-page of the above book is as follows: +"History of the province of Santissimo Rosario de Philipinas [i. e., +most holy rosary of the Philipinas], China, and Tunking, of the holy +order of the Preachers. Third part. In which are treated the events +of said province from 1669 to 1700. Composed by the Reverend Father +Fray Vicente de Salazar, rector of the college of Santo Thomas of the +city of Manila, and chancellor of its university. Dedicated to the +sovereign queen of the angels, the most holy Mary, in her miraculous +image of the rosary, which is venerated with the universal devotion +of the people in the church of Santo Domingo of the said city of +Manila. Printed by the press of the said college and university of +Santo Tomas of the said city, in the year 1742." The first two parts +of this history (those by Aduarte and Santa Cruz) have been given in +translation and synopsis in preceding volumes in this series. + +Fray Vicente Salazar was born in Ocana and professed at Valladolid. He +became a professor in Spain. Arriving in Manila in 1727, he became +a professor in the college of Santo Tomas and in 1742 was its +rector. Later he became prior of the Manila convent. The last years of +his life were spent in the Ituy missions, his death occurring between +the years of 1755-1759. See Retana's edition of Zuniga's Estadismo, +ii, p. 615. + +[2] For sketches of the members of this mission, see Resena biografica, +ii, pp. 101-194. + +[3] See Resena biografica, ii, pp. 194-230, for sketches of these +missionaries. + +[4] See the Recollect account of these transactions in VOL. XLI. + +[5] Fray Alarcon was a native of Archidona, and professed in +the convent at Madrid June 30, 1661. On arriving at the islands +(1666), he was assigned to the province of Pangasinan. In 1669 he +was appointed master of novitiates in Manila, but resigned the post +that same year. In 1673 he went to Formosa intending to enter the +Chinese missions, but finding that impossible he returned to Manila +in 1674. From 1675-1678 he labored in the missions of the province +of Bataan, being sent the latter year to the Chinese missions; but +finding it necessary to return to Manila shortly after, his subsequent +efforts to return again to China were unavailing. He died in Manila +September 15, 1685, after a lingering illness. See Resena biografica, +ii, pp. 59-61. + +[6] The Zambals were not Negritos, although they may have been a +mixture of Negrito blood. They were probably somewhat the same as +the Igorots, and hence a race of Malay extraction. + +[7] i.e., in Aduarte's Historia; see VOL. XXXII, p. 55. + +[8] Fray Jeronimo de Ulloa was a Galician, who professed at Coruna +March 13, 1665, at the age of twenty-one. He was a zealous missionary +in various Cagayan missions and in the Babuyanes. His death occurred +in 1700 or 1701. See Resena biografica, ii, pp. 175-179. + +[9] Fray Pedro Jimenez took the Dominican habit in 1658, and arrived +in the Philippines in 1666. He labored principally in the province +of Cagayan where he was at different times assigned to different +missions. He died December 20 without being able to receive the last +sacraments. See Resena biografica, ii, pp. 61-77. + +[10] W. A. Reed says (Negritos of Zambales, pp. 40, 41): "He is +repulsively dirty in his home, person, and everything he does. Nothing +is ever washed except his hands and face, and those only rarely. He +never takes a bath, because he thinks that if he bathes often he is +more susceptible to cold, that a covering of dirt serves as clothing, +although he frequently gets wet either in the rain or when fishing +or crossing streams. This is probably one reason why skin diseases +are so common." + +[11] See sketches of these missionaries in Resena biografica, ii, +pp. 230-256. + +[12] This is an error, as the Mandayas are a Mindanao tribe. Probably +the Apayaos, who live in the district of Ayangan in the comandancia +of Quiangan are meant. In Bontoc and other northern provinces of Luzon +the word I-fu-gao means "the people;" it is the name which the Bontoc +Igorots apply to themselves. The name Apayao, in northern Luzon, is +another form of the same word. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 469; +Blumentritt's List of Tribes in Philippines (Mason's translation); +and Jenks's Bontoc Igorot, p. 33. + +[13] Fray Juan Iniguez was a native of Antequera, and made his +profession at Sevilla, September 21, 1671. Reaching the Philippines +(1671) at the age of twenty-four, he was immediately assigned to +the province of Cagayan where he labored until 1720, the year of his +death. See Resena biografica, ii, pp. 211-215. + +[14] These are not a separate tribe as one would be led to suppose +by Blumentritt, but a branch of the Igorot people. See Census of +Philippines, i, pp. 456-459. + +[15] The natives of Malaoeg and Tuao revolted at the end of 1718 under +their leaders Magtangaga and Tomas Sinaguingan. They were put down +by Captain Don Juan Pablo de Orduna, and the rebels were punished. See +Montero y Vidal, i, p. 414. + +[16] Fray Mateo Gonzalez made his profession September 5, 1667, and +arrived at the Philippines in 1671 at the age of twenty-seven. He was +assigned to Cagayan, where he labored extensively. He also worked +in the Babuyanes and introduced the mission work into the Batanes, +his death occurring in the latter islands July 25, 1688. See Resena +biografica, ii, pp. 155-157. + +[17] A correspondent, William Edmonds, principal of schools in the +Batanes Islands, says in a letter of April 9, 1906: "I have an idea +that either the formation of the land [of the Batanes] is entirely +changed (two islands then being one now) or that there is some serious +error in Dampier's topography [see VOL. XXXIX, pp. 96-115]. The names +of many of the islands now are not those given by Dampier." Of the +later history of the Batanes Islands Mr. Edmonds says: "In 1791, +Governor-general Don Jose Basco sent an expedition with an alcalde, +two Dominican missionaries, mechanics, and artificers to establish +civil government. In a short time the people were instructed in +material arts, constructing tribunals, churches, convents, schools, and +houses, all of stone walls, one vara thick, to resist typhoons. Five +municipalities were established, the islands forming a district of the +province of Cagayan. In September, 1897, these pacific islands fell an +easy prey to the Revolutionary expedition which sacked the churches and +convents, and carried away the priests as prisoners to Cagayan. The +Katipunan government ruled until December, 1899, when the American +government took possession. In October, 1903, the various towns were +united into one municipality of the province of Cagayan." As references +concerning these islands, Mr. Edmonds gives El Correo Sino Anamita +(Manila, 1866-1892), xxix, p. 483; and Marin's Ensayo (Manila, 1901), +ii, pp. 690, 801: both publications of the Dominicans. + +[18] Fray Diego Pinero was assigned upon his arrival at the islands in +1684 to the convent of Malaueg in Cagayan. His stay in the Babuyanes +was short as is related in the text. His remaining missionary labors +were in the province of Cagayan. His death occurred at Lallo-c at +the beginning of 1712 or a trifle before. See Resena biografica, ii, +pp. 236, 237. + +[19] The island of Calayan was taken formal possession of for +the United States by the government ship "Princeton," January 10, +1900. It is one of the islands of the Babuyanes group, and is lofty +and uneven. See Gazetteer of Philippine Islands, p. 418. + +[20] Fray Jose Galfarroso (or Halfarroso de la Trinidad, as his name +is given in Resena biografica) made his profession September 10, +1664. Upon his arrival at the Philippines in 1671, he was assigned +to the Cagayan field, where he held various posts, and where most if +not all of his missionary labors were passed. He died, probably in +Cagayan, early in 1700. See ut supra, ii, pp. 160, 161. + +[21] Fray Juan de Santo Domingo was born in 1640 near Calatayud, +and professed in the convent of Ocana October 22, 1661. He went +to the Philippines in 1666, his first two years being occupied in +duties in Manila. Assigned to the province of Pangasinan, he labored +there for eighteen years, and exercised various duties. In 1682 he +was chosen definitor, and in 1686 he was transferred to the Manila +convent. He was the real founder of the Beaterio of Santa Catalina de +Sena, and ordained its rules July 26, 1696, while provincial. During +his term as provincial he also organized the tertiary branch of his +order. After his term as provincial he was appointed vicar of the +beatas and president of the college of San Juan de Letran. In 1702 he +was again elected prior of Manila convent, and because of the death +of the provincial exercised the duties of that office, to which he +was regularly elected again in 1706. At the end of his second term he +again took up his duties as head of the beaterio and college. Besides +the above posts and offices he was also commissary of the Holy Office +and definitor in the chapters of 1682 and 1716. His death occurred +at Manila, January 15, 1726. See Resena biografica, ii, pp. 26-34. + +[22] See sketches of these missionaries in Resena biografica, ii, +pp. 363-457. + +[23] Sketches of these missionaries will be found in Resena biografica, +ii, pp. 457-497. + +[24] Fray Francisco de la Vega was assigned to Cagayan in 1686, +where he labored in various missions there and in the Babuyanes. He +died at Fotol in the beginning of 1710. See Resena biografica, ii, +pp. 249, 250. + +[25] Fray Vicente del Riesgo was a native of San Felix de Valdesoto. On +arriving at the Philippines at the age of twenty-six, he was assigned +to the Cagayan field where he spent the rest of his life (with the +exception of a brief period spent in Manila as prior of that convent, +and master of novitiates), and where he occupied various posts. He +died in Cabagan, June 24, 1724. See Resena biografica, ii, pp. 440-446. + +[26] Fray Tomas Ortiz took the Augustinian habit at the age of +nineteen, at the Valladolid convent in 1687. Within a short time after +his arrival in Manila he became lecturer there (1695), and acted as +secretary of the province. Soon however he went to China to engage +in the mission work of that empire, and upon the expulsion of the +missionaries in 1713, he was appointed prior of Manila, and in 1716 +provincial. He filled other important posts in the mission work of the +islands, and died at Manila in 1742. He composed numerous works in +Spanish, Tagalog, and Chinese. See Perez's Catalogo, pp. 167-173. A +fuller account of his life is also given in vol. xxix of Revista +Agustiniana. + +[27] The calumpang tree (Sterculia foetida--Linn.) grows to a great +size; its roots branch out half way up the trunk, and are so large +that a roof could be laid over them so that they could be used as +a dwelling. The fruit of this tree resembles a pomegranate, which +divides when ripe into four quarters having certain kernels, from +which an oil is extracted which is used for medicine, and which the +natives use to anoint the hair. The wood is easy to work but is not +very durable. See Delgado's Historia, p. 457; Blanco's Flora, p. 524; +and Official Handbook of the Philippines, p. 346. + +[28] Many instances of ancestor worship by the peoples of the +Philippines are recorded in this series. There is no evidence that +suggests that the custom was borrowed from the Chinese. It had become +the general rule almost in the Philippines to refer many things, +the origin of which was unknown, to the Chinese. + +[29] This is the anting-anting. See Retana's Aniterias, which gives +examples of formulas, most of which are a meaningless conglomeration +of words. + +[30] A Tagalog word for a sort of earthen vessel. See Noceda and +Sanlucar's Vocabulario de la lengua tagala. + +[31] The translation of the title-page of the Historia is as follows: +"History of the Philipinas Islands, composed by the reverend father +lector, Fray Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga of the Order of St. Augustine, +ex-definitor of his province, calificador of the Holy Office, +and regular parish priest of the village of Paranaque. With the +necessary licenses. Printed in Sampaloc, by Fray Pedro Argueelles de +la Concepcion, Franciscan religious, in the year 1803." + +Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga was one of the most illustrious men +of the Augustinian order who ever labored in the Philippines. He +was born in Aguilar in Navarra, February 19, 1760, and deciding to +embrace the religious life professed in the Augustinian college at +Valladolid January 26, 1779. Setting out for the Philippines in 1785, +he remained one year in Mexico, before going to them, arriving in +Manila, August 3, 1786. In the islands he learned the Tagalog language, +and acted as minister-associate in Batangas and Tambobon for four +years. In 1790 he was appointed lector [i. e., reader or lecturer], +but was soon appointed parish priest of Hagonoy (1791). In 1792 he +acted as secretary of the province, and in 1794 and 1797 administered +the villages of Calumpit and Pasig respectively. Being invited by +General Alava to accompany him on his tour of inspection among the +islands, he did so, and the Estadismo (published in Madrid in 1893 by +W. E. Retana) is the fruit of that journey. After returning to Manila, +he took charge of the parish of Paranaque (1801-1806). In 1806 he was +elected provincial of the order. He had also filled the office of +definitor in 1794, and was a calificador of the Holy Office. After +his provincialate he resumed charge of the ministry of Paranaque +which he held until his death (March 7, 1818). The Historia has been +translated into English by John Maver and printed in two editions. He +is said also to have translated, annotated, and printed the work of Le +Gentil, but which Retana (Estadismo, i, pp. xviii, xxix) says cannot +now be found. Apropos of this, Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera sends a copy +of the title-page of a MS. of this Spanish work which is as follows: +"Voyage of M. Le Gentil, to the Philipinas Islands, translated from +the French into the Spanish, by the very reverend father lector, Fray +Joaquin Martinez de Zuniga.... The translator adds some notes in which +he reveals and refutes many errors of the author." Pardo de Tavera says +that this MS. is unpublished and that its existence is unsuspected and +not known even by the Augustinians. See Perez's Cataloga, pp. 346-348, +and Pardo de Tavera's Biblioteca Filipina (Washington, 1903), p. 252. + +[32] Louis Lapicque, chief of the laboratory of the faculty of Medicine +in Paris, was commissioned by the Minister of Public Instruction +in 1892 to study the question of the distribution of the Negrito +and to collect data concerning that race. He spent the months of +March-December 1893 in this study, working in the Andaman Islands, +the Mergui Islands in the Bay of Bengal, and the Malay Peninsula, +and considering also in his report the inhabitants of other places, +especially the Philippines. He brings out the interesting conclusion +that the inhabitants of the Andaman Islands are perhaps the purest race +in existence, and that they are closely allied to the Negritos of the +Philippines. Both being brachycephalic, they are thus differentiated +from the African negro, who is dolichocephalic. See Annales de +Geographie, v, pp. 407-424. Wm. A. Reed (Negritos of Zambales, p. 34) +gives the average of the cephalic index of the nineteen individuals +whom he was able to measure as 82 for the males and 86 for the females. + +[33] Angola, formerly called Dongo or Ambonde, is located on the west +coast of Africa. Its coast was discovered in 1486 by the Spaniards +who still own it. + +[34] Of the Bontoc Igorot, Albert Ernest Jenks, chief of the +Ethnological Survey of the Philippines, says (The Bontoc Igorot, +Manila, 1905, p. 14): "He belongs to that extensive stock of primitive +people of which the Malay is the most commonly named. I do not believe +he has received any of his characteristics, as a group, from either the +Chinese or Japanese, though this theory has frequently been presented." + +[35] That the theory of the origin of the Filipino peoples here +expressed is false needs no demonstration. The peoples of the +Philippines show two stocks--the Malayan and the Negrito. The +inhabitants of the Polynesian Islands (using the term in its restricted +sense) probably migrated from the East Indies and hence are allied +to the modern Malayan peoples, and the same is true of the Huvas of +Madagascar, having migrated from the parent stock from which the latter +peoples originated. Sec Cust's Modern Languages of East India (London, +1878); and New International Encyclopaedia; Lesson's Les Polynesiens +(Paris, 1880-84); and Ratzel's History of Mankind (English translation, +London, 1898). + +[36] The San Duisk Islands are the Sandwich or Hawaiian Islands; +and the Otayti Islands are the Society Islands, so called from their +largest island O-Taiti, Taiti, or Tahiti. The group of the Society +Islands, of which Tahiti is chief, is called Windward Islands. + +[37] Easter Island, so called because discovered by Roggeveen +on Easter of 1772; called also Waihu, Teapi, and by the natives +Rapanui. The inhabitants of this island are the last outpost of the +Malayo-Polynesian race. It has belonged to Chile since 1888. + +[38] The Tagalog word for "house" is bahay, not balay. + +[39] A reference to La Araucana, a Spanish epic poem written by +Alonso de Ercilla y Zuniga, the first part of which (15 cantos) was +published at Madrid, 1569. This is the first work of literary merit +known to have been composed upon either American continent. Ercilla +y Zuniga accompanied Felipe II to England on the occasion of his +marriage to Mary Tudor. Thence he went to Chile with the army to +fight the rebellious Araucanians. He was accused of having plotted an +insurrection, and was condemned to death but the sentence was commuted +to exile to Callao. He returned to Spain in 1562 and being coldly +received wandered through various European countries until 1580 when +he died in Madrid poor and forgotten. The continuations of his poem +consisting of 37 cantos in all, were published in 1578 and 1590. The +complete poem is published in vol. 17 of Autores espanoles (Madrid, +1851). See New International Encyclopaedia, and Grande Encyclopedie. + +[40] In May, 1874, three canoes containing sixteen savages were driven +by gales from the Pelew Islands, and after drifting on the ocean sixty +days reached Formosa, distant 1,600 miles; and all but one survived +these hardships--a striking example of endurance in both themselves +and their craft (Davidson, Formosa, p. 215). + +[41] Charles Wilkes was born in New York City, in 1798. He entered +the U. S. navy as midshipman in 1818, and sailed in the Mediterranean +and Pacific. He became lieutenant in 1826, and was placed in charge +of the department of charts and instruments in 1830. In 1838, he was +placed in charge of the expedition authorized by Congress in 1836 +for the purpose of exploring and surveying the southern ocean. This +was the first scientific expedition fitted out by the United States +government, and much valuable information resulted from it. Of the +record of the expedition (which lasted during the years 1838-1842) +consisting of nineteen volumes, Wilkes wrote the six containing the +narrative and the volumes on meteorology and hydrography. In 1843 he +was made a commander, and a captain in 1855. He served through most +of the Civil war on the northern side and was the one who removed +the Confederate commissioners Slidell and Mason from the English mail +boat "Trent," November 8, 1861. He was made a commodore in July 1862, +retired in June 1864, and created a rear admiral on the retired list, +in 1866. His death occurred in 1877. The names of the vessels in +his fleet were the sloops of war "Vincennes" and "Peacock," the brig +"Porpoise," the store-ship "Relief," and the two tenders, "Sea-Gull," +and "Flying-Fish." See Introduction to Vol. i. of Wilkes's narrative, +and New International Encyclopaedia. + +[42] i.e., The island of Busuanga, the largest of the Calamianes group, +which has an area of 390 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, +p. 274. + +[43] i.e., The island of Ambolon, south of Mindoro, of four square +miles. See ut supra, i, p. 267. + +[44] The island of Simara, near Romblon. + +[45] "Although Spain had jurisdiction over these islands for more than +three centuries, little topographic information had been acquired +regarding them, except such as was of a very general character. The +coasts were badly mapped, and in many places are now known to have been +miles out of position. The coast charts, made from Spanish surveys, are +so inaccurate as to be, on the whole, worse than useless to mariners, +while of the interior of the larger islands, little was known except +what could be seen from the sea." Census of the Philippines, i, p. 51. + +[46] The population is given by the Census for 1903 (ii, p. 30) +as 743,646. + +[47] On my arrival at Singapore, this circumstance was investigated by +a court of inquiry. The result showed that Mr. Knox had no knowledge +of the Vincennes having been seen; for the officer of the watch had +not reported to him the fact.--Wilkes. + +[48] The full name of this village is San Jose de Buenavista. It is +the capital of Antique. + +[49] The crest of the mountains in Panay is a few miles inland from +the west coast. Among the peaks of that range, are the following: +Usigan, 4,300 ft.; Agotay, 3,764 ft.; Madiaas, 7,466 ft.; Nangtud, +6,834 ft.; Maymagui, 5,667 ft.; Llorente, 4,466 ft.; Tiguran, 4,900 +ft.; and Igbanig, 4,343 ft. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 69. + +[50] Wilkes accompanies (p. 349) this description of Caldera fort +with a sketch. + +[51] There are two islands called Sangboy, one called the north island +and the other the south island. They both belong to the Pilas group of +the Sulu Archipelago, and are less than one square mile in area. See +Census of Philippines, i, p. 283. + +[52] Wilkes presents figures of both the whole canoe and a cross +section, on p. 353. + +[53] For the methods of fishing in the Philippines, see Official +Handbook, p. 151. Wilkes also mentions (v, pp. 321, 322) various +methods, namely, by weirs, hooks, and seine. The former are made +of bamboo stakes in the shallow waters of the lake of Bay where it +empties into the Pasig. The nets used in the bay are suspended by the +four corners from hoops attached to a crane by which they are lowered +into the water. The fishing-boats are little better than rafts and +are called saraboas. + +[54] Evidently at the village of Jolo. + +[55] On p. 354, Wilkes presents a sketch of houses at Soung--the +typical Moro house. + +[56] A full-page engraving of the "Mosque in the town of Sooloo" +faces page 354 of Wilkes's narrative. + +[57] Chewing the betel-nut and pepper-leaf also produce this effect, +and is carried on to a great extent among these islanders.--Wilkes. + +[58] Cf. the description of the betel caskets given by Morga, VOL. XVI, +p. 99. + +[59] The Sultan, on the visit of one of our merchant-vessels, had +informed the supercargo that he wished to encourage our trade, and +to see the vessels of the United States coming to his port.--Wilkes. + +[60] An engraving made from this sketch is given by Wilkes facing +p. 358. + +[61] Opium is known by its Arabic name "afyun" throughout the Eastern +Archipelago. Crawfurd asserts that its moderate use produces no worse +results than does the moderate use of wine, spirits, and perhaps +smoking. Shortly after American occupation of the Philippines, +the necessity for taking some action in regard to the traffic was +seen. The Philippine Commission were convinced that the smoking of +opium was increasing among the Filipinos. Accordingly a committee +was appointed to study the conditions, and restrictions of other +Oriental countries in regard to opium. There were then practically no +restrictions in regard to the smoking of the drug. On August 1, 1903, +there were 190 opium dens in Manila, and no license was required, as +they had no authority in law. The vice was mainly restricted to the +Chinese. In 1904 a considerable amount of opium was smuggled into the +district of Lanao in Mindanao. "Nothing has had a more demoralizing +effect upon the Moros and savage peoples than opium, and it will +absolutely destroy them if its importation and use is authorized.... It +is believed that a license to smoke opium, sufficiently low to escape +fraud, should be issued for those hopelessly addicted to the habit, +and that exceedingly severe penalties should attach to those who +furnish opium to youth or those who are nonsmokers.... It is a poor +policy in developing a people to count on the income of legalized +vice for a large portion of the revenue, as is done in most eastern +colonies." The importation of opium has shown considerable increase +during American occupation. See Crawfurd's Dictionary, pp. 312-314; and +the following reports of the Philippine Commission--for 1903, pt. i, +p. 63, pt. 2, p. 96; for 1904, pt. 2, pp. 590, 591, pt. 3, p. 545. + +[62] Since our return, inquiries have been made by him, which resulted +in proving that such was in truth their origin, and that the vessel +in which they were shipped was for a long time missing. The identical +stones which he saw were a part of a monument that was on its way +to Canton.--Wilkes. + +[63] Marongas belongs to the Jolo group of the Sulu Archipelago, and +has an area of .4 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 284. + +[64] The Sulug or Sulus were the dominant people of Jolo before their +conversion to Mahometanism, and still maintain that position. The bulk +of the Moro Sulus is on the island of Jolo and the islands immediately +south as far as Siassi and Pandami. See Census of Philippines, i, +pp. 463, 464. + +[65] Orang is the Malay term for man or human being. As used here it +would mean "the men," i. e., "nobles." + +[66] The tripang or sea-slug (Holothuria edulis), which is esteemed +as a great delicacy by the Chinese. + +[67] Evidently the people called Guimbajanos by the historians of the +eighteenth century. From Wilkes's description, they would appear to +be at least partially Negrito. + +[68] Banjarmasin is a principality and river on the southern side of +Borneo, the word meaning in Javanese "salt or saline garden." The +sovereignty of Banjarmasin is said in olden times to have extended +over all of southeastern Borneo. See Crawfurd's Dictionary (pp. 36, +37), where an historical sketch of the principality is given. + +[69] The Chinese emperor at this time was Choo Yuen Chang, the +founder of the Ming dynasty, who defeated Chunti, the last of the +Mongol dynasty, in 1367, and ruled from then until the year 1398. He +adopted as emperor the name of Hongwon. The statements in the text may +be only common report. See Boulger's Short History of China, pp. 79-87. + +[70] See Montero y Vidal's account of Joloan affairs during this +period, in his Historia, i, pp. 475-548, 561-581, ii, pp. 6-77, +575, 576. + +[71] Manila was captured by the English October 6 (or, October 5, +according to Spanish reckoning), 1762 (not 1763). See A plain Narrative +(London, 1565?), p. 4. + +[72] This name is derived from the large bay that makes in on the south +side of the island of Mindanao, and on which a set of free-booters +reside.--Wilkes. + +This is the bay of Illana. Illano or Illanum means "people of the +lake." At present they inhabit the south coast of Mindanao from Punta +[de] Flechas to Polloc. They are but few in number, but in the past +have been bold pirates. They are probably closely connected with the +Malanao or Moros dwelling in the valley of Lake Lanao. See Census of +Philippines, i, pp. 466, 472. + +[73] Pulo Toolyan is Tulaian of the Jolo group of the Sulu Archipelago, +with an area of .5 sq. mi.; Tonho may be Tango or Tangu of the Tawi +Tawi group; Pilas is the chief island of its group, with an area of +8.2 sq. mi.; Tawi Tawi is the chief island of its group, with an area +of 232 sq. mi.; Sumlout is perhaps Simaluc, of the Tawi Tawi group, +with an area of 1.3 sq. mi.; Pantutaran is perhaps Pantocunan, of the +Jolo group, with an area of .6 sq. mi.; Parodasan is perhaps Parangaan +of the Tawi Tawi group, or Parangan of the Tapul group; Basilan is +the chief island of its group, with an area of 478 sq. mi. See Census +of Philippines, i. + +[74] In 1861 a number of light steam gunboats with steel hulls +and of twenty or thirty horsepower were constructed in England for +the Spaniards for use against the Moro pirates; and they were very +effective in reducing piracy, both in the Lake Lanao district and that +of Mindanao and the adjacent islands. See Montero y Vidal's Historia, +iii, pp. 327, 328, and elsewhere; and Historia de la pirateria, ii. + +[75] The sea-gypsies. See VOL. XXXVI, p. 199, note 38. + +[76] This treaty is as follows: + +[Preceding the text of the treaty are some Arabic characters.] + +I, Mohamed, Sultan of Sooloo, for the purpose of encouraging trade +with the people of the United States of America, do promise hereby +and bind myself that I will afford full protection to all vessels of +the United States, and their commanders and crews visiting any of +the islands of my dominions, and they shall be allowed to trade on +the terms of the most favoured nation, and receive such provisions +and necessaries as they may be in want of. + +2dly. In case of shipwreck or accident to any vessel, I will afford +them all the assistance in my power, and protect the persons and +property of those wrecked, and afford them all the assistance in my +power for its preservation and safe-keeping, and for the return of +the officers and crews of said vessels to the Spanish settlements, +or wherever they may wish to proceed. + +3dly. That any one of my subjects who shall do any injury or harm to +the commanders or crews belonging to American vessels, shall receive +such punishment as his crime merits. + +In witness whereof I have hereunto set my hand and seal, in presence +of the datus and chiefs at Soung, island of Sooloo. + + +February 5th, 1842. + +[Here follows a signature in Arabic characters.] + +Witnesses: + +Charles Wilkes, +Commanding Exploring Expedition. + +William L. Hudson, +Late Commanding U. S. Ship Peacock. + +R. R. Waldron, Purser, +U. S. Exploring Expedition. + +[77] Pangutarang is the largest island of the numerous group of the +same name belonging to the Sulu Archipelago, and has an area of 42 +square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 284. + +[78] Cagayan Sulu has an area of 27 square miles. It is located in +a group of 31 islands. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 286. + +[79] According to Census of Philippines (i, p. 28, ii, p. 123), +the area of the Davao district is 9,707 square miles, and the total +population 65,496, of whom 45,272 are uncivilized. + +[80] Jose Oyanguren was a native of Guipuzcoa who went to the +Philippines in 1825, leaving Spain for political reasons. He passed +several years in the province of Caraga (now Surigao), engaged in +business, and in the Calamianes. For a number of years also he occupied +the judicial post in Tondo. In 1846 he was deprived of that post +because such officials were thereafter appointed in Madrid. On hearing +of the cession of the gulf of Davao by the sultan to the Spaniards, +he visited that region. On his return he proposed to Governor Claveria +to conquer and subdue the entire gulf district, expel or pacify the +Moros there, and establish the Christian religion, if he were given +supplies and equipment, the command of the district, and exclusive +rights of trade therein. A decree issued by Claveria February 27, +1847, gave him the command for ten years and exclusive rights of +trade for the first six years. He was also given artillery, muskets, +and ammunition, and permission to raise a company. By the beginning +of 1849 he was in peaceful possession of the entire coast-line of the +gulf and then turned his attention into the interior. The government, +however, did not live up to its promises, and Oyanguren after the +death of Claveria was removed from his command. The last years of +his life (1852-1859) were spent in the fruitless endeavor to obtain +what had been promised him. See Montero y Vidal's Hist. pirateria, +i, pp. 382-403. + +[81] A vessel for the coasting trade in the Philippines. See New +Velazquez Dictionary. + +[82] The island of Samal is located in the Gulf of Davao, and has an +area of 147 square miles. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 282. + +[83] This is the Tagalog word for the upper part of a village. It +seems here to mean the eastern mountainous district of Surigao. + +[84] Of the tribes of Mindanao, Census of Philippines, i, p. 462, +says: "Going eastward in Mindanao and passing by the central lake +region, which is inhabited entirely by Lanao Moros, we come to other +tribes, which, so far as I have seen, differ in no essential from +the Subanon.... Around the headwaters of the Rio Grande de Mindanao +they are called Manobo. South of the Rio Grande they are called +Tiruray, Bilan, Manobo, and other names. The reason for the use +of these different terms is not satisfactorily explained. There are +doubtless changes of dialect between them comparable to the changes we +find among the Igorots in northern Luzon, but I believe it is hardly +justifiable to break up into separate tribes or divisions a population +so thoroughly homogeneous as these pagans of Mindanao appear to be." + +[85] Sangil is a local term apparently derived from the volcano of +the same name. It is sometimes applied as a collective title for pagan +tribes of that region and sometimes to the Maguindanao Moros, who have +settled between Craan and Makar. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 476. + +[86] The Tagacaolos are closely related to the Bagobos. The word +is probably derived from "olo," meaning "head," and thus "source" +(of a river), the particle ka, "toward," and the prefix taga. The +entire word thus means "people who go up toward the source of the +river," to distinguish them from the "Tagabawa," people who live in +the lowlands, bawa meaning "down," the "region low down." See Census +of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 476. + +[87] This promise was fulfilled June 21 of the same year, and the +letter is given in the Cartas, pp. 93-111. + +[88] i. e., The district ruled over by a dato. + +[89] The pagatpat (Sonneratia), called also palapad and palatpat, +is frequently found along the beaches. It grows to the height +of twenty feet or so. Its wood is strong and is used in ordinary +construction. The fruit is very sour and a vinegar is made from +it. See Blanco, pp. 296, 297. + +[90] Pedro Rosell, S. J., was born at Lerida September 4, 1849, +and entered his novitiate in the Society of Jesus, October 2, 1878, +being already a priest. He went to the Philippines in 1880, and died +in Caraga, January 4, 1888. See Sommervogel's Bibliotheque. + +[91] This mission belongs to the district of Misamis. + +[92] i.e., From my inmost heart. + +[93] i.e., We have labored in vain. + +[94] The bayog (Pterospermum hastatum) is often found along the +Batangas beach and in other places. Oars are made of the wood which +is soft and light. See Blanco, pp. 367, 368. + +[95] See citation of these verses and brief description of the +sacrifice by Pablo Pastells, in VOL. XII, p. 270, note 83. + +[96] It is difficult to believe that this eloquent passage was written +so recently as 1885. It furnishes a striking proof of the medievalism +of thought that persevered even among the Jesuits--a medievalism that +is not yet, unfortunately, entirely eliminated from the Christian +sects, both Catholic and Protestant. This same thought prevails +throughout the document. + +[97] The coffee of the Philippines has a fine aroma and excellent +flavor, and will compare favorably with either Java or Mocha coffee. It +is said to have been brought to the islands by Spanish missionaries +during the latter part of the eighteenth century and its systematic +cultivation to have commenced early in the nineteenth century, +although it was neglected considerably and did not in consequence +attain the advanced state to which it should have attained. It was +first cultivated in the province of Laguna, and subsequently in other +provinces, notably Batangas and Cavite, coffee becoming quite an +extensive industry. Most of the coffee was produced in the provinces +named and in Tayabas, in Luzon and in Misamis and the district of +Cottabatto, in Mindanao, though appreciable quantities were grown +in other provinces. The highest grades of the berry were grown in +Batangas Province and the most inferior in Mindanao. In 1890 and +for several preceding years coffee ranked fourth in exports, falling +not far short of tobacco. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 76-78; +and Official Handbook, pp. 106, 107. + +[98] i.e., The end of the earth. + +[99] Beleno: Birth, in the sense of representing that of our Lord +Jesus Christ (Echegaray's Diccionario etimologico). Hence it was the +representation of a manger. + +[100] Literally the "mass of the cock;" the mass that is said at +midnight on Christmas Eve, and hence equivalent to midnight mass. + +[101] This mass is also called media. It is a mass sung, but without +deacon and sub-deacon and the ceremonies proper to High Mass. In some +American dioceses the use of incense is permitted at such masses. See +Addis and Arnold's Catholic Dictionary, p. 565. + +[102] Or Missa solemnis, the high mass. See Addis and Arnold's Catholic +Dictionary, p. 565. + +[103] Possibly a "house with festal decorations." + +[104] i.e., And beyond. + +[105] The Carolinas were discovered first by the Portuguese navigator, +Diogo da Rocha, in 1525, and different groups of them were seen by +early Spanish navigators. In 1686, one of them was discovered by the +Spanish admiral, Francisco Lezcano, who named it Carolina, in honor +of Carlos II, and the whole archipelago finally took its name from +it. They number about 525 islands counting reefs and uninhabited rocks, +and contain about 525 square miles. In the beginning of the eighteenth +century they were entirely abandoned by Spain, and were only brought +back to public notice in the beginning of the nineteenth century +through several scientific expeditions. Gradually German commercial +interests became paramount, and in 1885 the German flag was hoisted +in the island of Yap in the presence of two Spanish gunboats. The pope +arbitrating on the matter declared that the islands belonged to Spain, +but gave special privileges to Germany. In 1899, the Carolinas, Palaos, +and all of the Ladrones except Guam were ceded to Germany in payment +of 16,750,000 marks. See Montero y Vidal's Archipielago, pp. 483-505 +(who gives the propositions submitted by the pope); Gregorio Miguel's +Estudio sobre las islas Carolinas; and New International Encyclopaedia. + +[106] The volcano of Apo is located on the highest summit of the +Philippines, which is 10,311 ft. high. The first to attempt its ascent +was Jose Oyanguren in 1859, but he failed. It was first ascended in +1880 by Montano, Joaquin Rajal, and Mateo Gisbert, S. J. See Census +of Philippines, i, pp. 202-204. + +[107] The Bilans are an exceedingly timid and wild people, fleeing, +it is said, even from Moros with whom they are unacquainted. They +inhabit the mountains south and west of Lake Buluan, in South Mindanao, +their range being southeast of that of the Tirurayes. Their religion +is a sort of demon worship and they are very superstitious. They +do not live in communities but each family by itself in a house +at least one-half mile from any other house. The brief examination +of those houses by Lieutenant H. Rodgers of the Philippine scouts, +leads to the belief that the Bilans are a race superior to the Moro, +being more cleanly, industrious, and more wealthy. The Moros do not +allow them to trade direct with the Chinese merchants. See Census of +Philippines, i, pp. 560, 561. + +[108] Dr. Barrows says (Census of Philippines, i, p. 461): "Manobo +is a native word which, in the Bagobo language on the Gulf of Davao, +means 'man.' It is so given in Padre Gisbert's vocabulary and also in +a special vocabulary taken for the ethnological survey. Blumentritt, +however, suggests--and I believe with merit--that Manobo here in +Northern Mindanao is a derivation of Manubo, which is itself derived +from Masuba, meaning 'people of the river.' This term Manobo should +be retained for all of this great group living along the affluents +and tributary streams of the river Agusan, and the term might, with +propriety, I believe, be extended to the Montes farther west and +back of Misamis. If there are objections to applying the term Manobo +to these pagans of Misamis, I would suggest the application of our +general term Bukidnon." + +[109] This letter is addressed directly to the superior of the mission. + +[110] On the prevailing custom of making slaves among the peoples +in Mindanao, Father Gisbert says in a letter written May 20, 1886 +(Cartas, Manila, 1887): "The slavehunt is not always easy. By availing +themselves of tricks and surprises, they can generally capture the +old people, women, and the children easily. They first kill those +who can make any resistance." + +[111] Literally "shields." That is, the rice was measured into +the shield. + +[112] i.e., So so, or, just as it was. + +[113] On the Moros, see Census of Philippines, i, pp. 465-467, 561-585. + +[114] The Yakan are a primitive Malayan tribe of the same type and +general culture as the Subanon of the Mindanao mainland, who live in +Basilan, and who, some generations ago, accepted the Mahometan faith +and are fanatical adherents thereof. They live scattered over the +island cultivating a little maize, rice, and tapioca, bringing out some +jungle product, but living as a whole miserably and in poverty. Some +of them have migrated to the peninsula of Zamboanga and the islands +adjacent to this coast. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 465, 466. + +[115] According to Census of Philippines, the population of the +comandancia of Basilan is 30,179, of whom 28,848 are uncivilized. + +[116] Among the Samal Laut boys are trained for the priesthood by +making their homes with priests, where they remain for several years in +the capacity of servant and pupil. Occasionally, when grown they are +sent to Singapore for continuous study, but such cases are rare. If +a man goes to Mekka he is given the honorable title of pilgrim and +is held in high consideration. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 571. + +[117] i.e., A distance of two palm-lengths. + +[118] A dish made in the Philippines from the inner and harder shell +of the cocoanut.--See Echegaray's Diccionario etimologico, and Noceda +and Sanlucar's Vocabulario de la lengua tagala. + +[119] See beliefs and superstitions of the North American Indians +in regard to eclipses in Jesuit Relations (Cleveland reissue), vi, +p. 223, xii, pp. 31, 73, xxii, p. 295. + +[120] The principal articles of food are rice, for which corn is +sometimes substituted, fish, chickens, vegetables, wild fruits, +and cocoanut oil. The natives are fond of chickens and eggs, and most +families raise poultry for the table. Pork is forbidden by their faith, +and the use of venison, or the flesh of the carabao, ox, sheep, or +goat, is limited, the Moros being apparently not fond of meat. See +Census of Philippines, i, p. 564. + +[121] Cogon (Imperata koenigii) is a species of grass of general +natural growth, the young shoots of which afford excellent food for +cattle. The grass is used in some localities as a substitute for +nipa, where the latter does not grow, in thatching roofs. The name +"cogon" is applied to many coarse, rank-growing grasses. See Census +of Philippines, iv, p. 118. + +[122] We give the verses in the original language with the Spanish +translation of Father Pablo Cavalleria, and add the English translation +of the latter, which is necessarily crude. + +[123] An authority among the Moros, after the panglima, and as well a +name denoting nobility of race and blood. See Cartas de ... la mision +de Filipinas (Manila, 1887), p. 34, note. + +[124] The letter occupies pp. 326-349, and is accompanied by an +ethnographical map (which we do not reproduce) made by the fathers +of the Society of Jesuits. Our extract relates to the ethnology of +Mindanao, and occupies pp. 336-349. + +[125] Dr. Barrows (Census of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 463), says +in speaking of the tribes of Mindanao that the term Indonesian has +been applied to some of them to explain their higher stature and +finer physique, which means that they are connected with people of +mixed Caucasian blood, who were in primitive times distributed across +the Malay Archipelago, and who find their purest living type in the +Polynesians. He does not accept the evidence, as the perceptible gain +in height among such peoples is not apparently accompanied by the other +distinguishing marks of the Caucasian or Polynesian, and consequently +regards them as Malayan. See also Le Roy's Philippine Life (New York, +1905), p. 20. + +[126] See laws of the Samal Laut in regard to family and social life +in Census of Philippines, i, p. 569. + +[127] The root of the plant gabe (Colocasia antiquorum variety) +is highly prized and extensively cultivated, the leaves also being +used as food. Of the resins and oils mentioned, piayo, also called +conferal and galagala (Agathis orantifolia--Salisb.) is used for +burning and lighting, and the manufacture of varnish; and balao or +malapaho (Dipterocarpus velulinno--Bl.) is used for calking. See Census +of Philippines, iv, pp. 121, 202, 221; and Philippine Gazetteer, p. 78. + +[128] Cabo Negro (Caryota urens) is a palm from which a kind of starch +or sago is extracted. The camagon (Diospyros discolor) is a native +persimmon tree 30 to 45 ft. high growing in Luzon and some of the +other islands. See Census of Philippines, iv, pp. 139, 143. + +[129] Salt is produced by evaporation, from a method taught prior to +the coming of the Spaniards by the Chinese. Sea-water, enclosed in +a depression surrounded by dykes, is evaporated by the sun's rays; +when the water has disappeared, the salt deposited on the floor of +the basin is gathered up and cleaned by filtration. See Census of +Philippines, iv, p. 469. + +[130] This is the Musa sapientum, which is a variety of banana. This +fiber is inferior to abaca. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 167. + +[131] See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 566, 567, for the industrial +life of the Moros. The occupation of smith is especially honorable. + +[132] The Coripha minor. Its trunk is black and very straight, and +the wood is very hard. It is also used for making stockades and for +conducting water. See Blanco, p. 161. + +[133] Blanco describes a shrub called tubli, the fruit of which is +very small, and which he does not believe to belong to the species +Galactia under which he describes it. The lagtan or lactang (Anamirta +cocculus) is a coarse woody plant whose stems are used for tying and +binding. The wood is of a yellow color. It like the preceding plant +makes the fish that eat mixtures containing it exhibit the appearance +of intoxication so that they can be caught by the hand. The fruit is +called bayati by the natives. See Census of Philippines, iv, p. 155; +Blanco, pp. 411, 557, 558. + +[134] The claims often put forward by many writers that some of +the peoples of the Philippines arise from a mixture of Chinese and +Japanese blood with the Malay have no foundation. The Chinese have, +it is true, mingled with almost every tribe in the archipelago, +but they have not given rise to a new tribe or race. + +[135] i.e., They are a Negrito tribe. + +[136] This is the Calamus maximus, a very large species of rattan. See +Blanco, pp. 185, 186; and Census of Philippines, iv, p. 159. + +[137] See ante, p. 241, note 106. + +[138] Throughout the friar chronicles and accounts the words "reduce" +and "reduction" are frequently employed. As used the words have a +rather wide application. The primary meaning is of course "conversion" +to the Christian faith, but along with this idea must be understood +the settlement of the converts in villages in a civilized manner, +where they could be under the immediate eye of their spiritual +directors. Hence the words bear in a sense a two-fold meaning--the +one religious, and the other civil. + +[139] An allusion to Joseph Montano's Rapport a M. le ministre +de l'instruction publique sur une Mission aux Iles Philippines et +en Malaise (Paris, 1885). Of him Pardo de Tavera says (Biblioteca +filipino, p. 270): "Doctor Montano is a French anthropologist and +physician.... This book is very important and the author divides +it into five parts, namely, geology, meteorology, anthropology, +pathology, and dialects and political geography, with a few notices +regarding agriculture and commerce. The most important chapters are +those relating to anthropology and linguistics." + +[140] Census of Philippines, i, p. 473, calls these people a branch +of the Mandayas. + +[141] Dr. Barrows (Census of Philippines, i, p. 460) restricts the +term "Buquidnon" to mountain-dwellers in Luzon and the Visayas, who +escaped reduction when those islands were christianized. The term +"Buquidnon" means "people of the mountain forest." + +[142] These are the Negritos. Aetas is the oldest known name for that +people. It is probably derived from the Tagalog word itim, "black." In +many places the Negrito seems to have disappeared by absorption into +the conquering Malay race. There are about 23,000 of them still in +the islands. See Census of Philippines, i, pp. 468, 478, 532, 533. + +[143] Dr. Barrows (Census, i, p. 471) calls this people a division +of the Bagobos. + +[144] The Bagobos, together with the Moros and Mandayas, are migratory +in habit, though they do not leave the province. They are said to be +fire worshipers. The blood feud prevails. The Ocacola Bagobos have +discontinued their annual sacrifice which they would eat. See Census +of Philippines, i, pp. 462, 463, 531. + +[145] Called by Barrows (Census, i, p. 470) a Bagobo tribe. + +[146] See ante, p. 199, note 84. + +[147] A more complete title of this book by Jose Gumilla, S. J., +is, El Orinoco ilustrado, historia natural, civil, y geographica, +de este gran rio ... govierno, usos y costumbres de los Indios sus +habitadores (Madrid, 1741). + +[148] See ante, p. 197, note 82. Pardo de Tavera derives Tiruray from +atew rooter, "people living above," that is, "up the river." This +branch of the Manobos are described by First Lieut. G. S. Turner, Tenth +U. S. Infantry, who collected information for the Census among them, +"as ignorant, shiftless savages ruled by superstitions and fear, with +little moral or legal restraint upon their desires or passions. They +were formerly much preyed upon by Moros and Manobos, but they are +troubled no longer in this respect." See Census of Philippines, i, +pp. 462, 549-552. + +[149] The Samal are an exceedingly important element in the Sulu +Archipelago. Their former locus, where the pure Samal dialect was +spoken, is in the islands between Basilan and Jolo, especially +Tonguil and Balanguingui. These were the very latest pirate haunts +to be broken up by the Spaniards. The Samal are now scattered along +the coast of Zamboanga and nearly everywhere in the archipelago of +Sulu. See Census of Philippines, i, p. 475. + +[150] It is the custom among the heathen to change, suppress, and +add vowels. For example: binag for bunag, "baptism;" bidi for budi, +"girl;" isug for usug, "man;" buhay for bahay, "woman;" guianga for +guanga, "forest;" inay for ina, "mother;" budiay for budi; di for dili, +"no;" etc.--Pablo Pastells, S. J. + +[151] An important pagan tribe whose habitat is about the bay of +Sibuguey and the bay of Dumanquilas. See Census of Philippines, i, +pp. 461, 462, 476. + +[152] "The campaign of General Terrero in 1887 against the Sultanates +of Buhayen, Bacat, and Kuduranga in the 'cuenca' of the Pulangui +resulted in the occupation of Liong, Bacat, and Kuduranga, taking +possession likewise at this time of the cove of Pujaga (east coast) +of the bay of Sarangani, the port of Lebak, and that of Santa Maria, +commencing work on the trocha of Tukuran." Memoria de Mindanao by +Julian Gonzales Parrado. + +In 1902 two military roads were planned by General George W. Davis +through Mindanao, one passing from the south and one from the north +coast of Mindanao into the very heart of the Moro country, and meeting +on the waters of Lake Lanao. See the story of the building of the roads +by Major R. L. Bullard of the 28th U.S. Infantry, who is stationed +at Iligan, Mindanao, in the Atlantic Monthly for December, 1903. + +[153] Governor Narciso Claveria personally conducted an expedition +against the Moros in 1848. The three vessels were under command of Jose +Ruiz de Apodaca, of the royal navy. He administered heavy defeats on +the Moros at several points. The expedition of Antonio de Urbistondo +against Jolo was made in 1850-1851. The expedition of Jose Malcampo +y Monje was made in 1875. By these three expeditions the Moro power +was badly crippled. See Montero y Vidal, Historia de la pirateria, +and Historia general, iii. + +[154] Speaking of the efforts of the Jesuits in Mindanao in his Memoria +de Mindanao, Julian Gonzales Parrado says: "This proper zeal causes +them, nevertheless, not to see this question clearly and leads them +to an excusable optimism, but which gives them credit for the success +obtained in so many years of preaching and teaching as to what relates +to the Moros. In spite of their efforts, sacrifices, and infinite +constancy, neither in Jolo nor in Mindanao have they succeeded during +the three centuries in causing to be admitted into the labarum of the +Evangelist more than an insignificant number of Mahometans, and even +of this small contingent of converts and baptized, nearly all have +been observed to have abjured their new religion and returned to their +former practices as soon as possible; or the interest or the danger +that impelled them at receiving the baptism more than anything else, +has ceased." He concludes by saying that this is not to the discredit +of the Jesuits, but due to the peculiarities of the Moros, and to their +fanatic religion. It is advised that no forcible attempt be made to +convert them, but that they adopt Christianity only if they so desire. + +[155] This volume of the Cartas is accompanied by a large map of +Mindanao. + +[156] Taclobo is the Tagalog name of a large snail; here used for +the shell. + +[157] Masalicampo, or Maestre de campo is a title which was formerly +given to the Monteses, who had distinguished themselves in any +service for Spain or its government, by the superior authorities; +for instance, by fighting against the Moros in favor of our banner, +as is seen by the title despatched at the petition of Father Ducos, +S. J. (note to this letter, p. 176). + +[158] The Xanthostemon verdugonianus--Naves, of the family of Myrtaceae, +allied to the Iron wood of Java. It is found in Luzon and Mindanao, +and is a hard, heavy wood, exceedingly difficult to work. See Important +Philippine Woods (Manila, 1901), pp. 65, 66. + +[159] There is a species of tree called baticulin, which is the Litsea +obtusata of Villar, and the Olax baticulin of Blanco, belonging +to the family Laurineae. It is extensively used for cabinet making +and carving, and is not readily attacked by the white ant. Blanco +(pp. 351, 352) describes a wood Millingtonia quadripinnata, which he +also calls baticulin, and which is easily worked and extensively used +for carving. It is called Ansohan in the Visayas Islands. The latter +is probably the wood meant in the text. See Blanco, and Important +Philippine Woods, pp. 31-33. + +[160] Vicente Fragante, one of the Philippine government students in +the University of Wisconsin (1906), an Ilocano, says that the term +mangkukulam is used in Ilocos to signify an invisible being. Whenever +anything is lost or disappears, it is supposed that the mangkukulam +has stolen it. The term pogot is used to signify a big black man. It is +the bugaboo of the Filipino mothers with which they threaten refractory +children. In some families an image to represent the pogot is shown to +the children to cause them to be good. The pogot is said to inhabit +unfinished or deserted houses, and to sit on the window-sill at +night where he smokes a large pipe. In sparsely-settled districts +the pogot also inhabits santol, tamarind, and lomboy trees. It is +the custom of the small Ilocano boys, who partly live the belief, +and who also wish to frighten their more timid playmates of the other +sex, to make a great racket about the supposed abodes of the pogot, +with tin cans and other instruments in order to scare him away. At +night when the pogot is frightened or angered, he throws stones at the +houses. These stones have the power of passing completely through the +walls of the house, and strike against the dishes in the place where +they are kept. The dishes are, however, unharmed, as neither are the +people who may be struck by those stones. Ansisit is an Ilocan term +for a sort of scarecrow, which is used to scare the children into +goodness. It consists of an old coat through the arms of which is +thrust a stick, while another stick is placed at right angles to it, +thus enabling the coat to be set up or moved. + +The Manila newspaper La Democracia, of August 29, 1903, contains an +item in regard to some men who were hanged for killing a "witch." + +[161] Noceda and Sanlucar's Vocabulario de la lengua tagala defines +abobot, the same word as abubut, as a basket woven from rattan, +which has a lid. + +[162] Native of the Philippines, with medical experience, but no +title. See Appleton's New Velazquez Dictionary. Mediquillo is literally +"little, or petty physician." + +[163] Probably the Dissertation sur les maladies convulso-clenico-toniques +en general ([Montpellier], 1806), by Joseph Boy y Santa Maria. + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898, by Various + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, 1493-1898 *** + +***** This file should be named 35391.txt or 35391.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/3/9/35391/ + +Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team for Project Gutenberg at +https://www.pgdp.net/ + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |